Garmin | G1000: Beechcraft Baron G58 | Garmin G1000: Beechcraft Baron G58 G1000 Pilot's Guide Beechcraft G58 - SSV 0500.00

Garmin G1000: Beechcraft Baron G58 G1000 Pilot's Guide Beechcraft G58 - SSV 0500.00
G1000
TM
Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
Part Number
190-00629-00
Rev. A
190-00629-00
Rev. B
Change Summary
Corrected figure numbering sequence in Section 7
Record of Revisions
Revision Date of Revision Revision Page Range
A
10/18/05
------------B
11/09/05
All
Description
Initial release
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
COPYRIGHT
Copyright © 2005 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0500.01 or later.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411
Fax 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Unit 5, The Quadrangle, Abbey Park Industrial Estate, Romsey, Hampshire S051 9DL, U.K.
Tel: 44/0870.8501241
Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or
stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission
to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to
be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text
of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is
strictly prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, and G1000™ is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries.
These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc., Silver Crown Plus™ is a trademark of
Honeywell International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Stormscope® and Skywatch® are registered
trademarks of L-3 Communications; TCAD® is a registered trademark of Ryan International, Inc.; and XM® is a registered trademark
of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
November 2005
190-00629-00 Rev. B
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
Printed in the U.S.A.
i
WARNINGS & CAUTIONS
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain
function. The G1000 Terrain Proximity feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for
terrain avoidance and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings
during flight. The Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not
certified for use in applications requiring a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained
from third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The Garmin G1000, as installed in Beechcraft 58/G58 aircraft, has a very high degree of
functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test
capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for
erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by the G1000. It is thus the responsibility
of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated
information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level
and could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A
Air Data Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical
navigation. Always use pressure altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in
aircraft.
WARNING: The Jeppesen database used in the G1000 system must be updated regularly in order to
ensure that its information remains current. Updates are released every 28 days. A database information
packet is included in the G1000 package. Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own
risk.
ii
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
WARNINGS & CAUTIONS
WARNING: The basemap (land and water data) must not be used for navigation, but rather only for nonnavigational situational awareness. Any basemap indication should be compared with other navigation
sources.
CAUTION: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the G1000 to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Airman’s Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or
giving an intense radar echo.”
CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision
electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the
G1000 can be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the
G1000 Pilot’s Guide documentation. Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During
flight operations, carefully compare indications from the G1000 to all available navigation sources,
including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always
resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made
by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the
warranty and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
CAUTION: The GDU 1040 PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating
that is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA
WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lintfree cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
iii
WARNINGS & CAUTIONS
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel
and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: There are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms that can cause
isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more discharge points
in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after the screen
has been cleared. Avoid the clusters to avoid the thunderstorms. In the cell display mode, even a single
discharge point may represent thunderstorm activity and should therefore be avoided.
iv
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no
charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty does not
cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING
FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole discretion.
SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit the
Garmin Web site at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
v
WARRANTY
This page intentionally left blank.
vi
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Introduction.................................................... 1-1
System Description......................................... 1-1
Optional Equipment ....................................... 1-3
PFD/MFD Controls .......................................... 1-4
Secure Digital Cards ....................................... 1-6
System Power-up ............................................ 1-7
Display Backlighting ....................................... 1-9
System Operation ........................................... 1-9
Normal Mode .............................................................1-9
Reversionary Mode ..................................................1-10
AFCS Preflight Test ...................................................1-10
AHRS Operation .......................................................1-11
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
SECTION 2 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Introduction.................................................... 2-1
Backlighting ................................................... 2-4
Softkey Function ............................................ 2-5
Flight Instruments .......................................... 2-9
Airspeed Indicator ......................................................2-9
Attitude Indicator .....................................................2-10
Altimeter ..................................................................2-12
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator ....................2-14
Marker Beacon Annunciations ..................................2-14
Vertical Speed Indicator ...........................................2-14
Horizontal Situation Indicator ..................................2-15
2.5 Communication, Navigation, & Surveillance
(CNS) 2-21
Communication Frequency Window .........................2-21
Navigation Frequency Window .................................2-21
Navigation Status Bar ..............................................2-22
Transponder (XPDR) Status Bar ................................2-22
2.6 Supplemental Flight Data..............................2-23
Outside Air Temperature Box ....................................2-23
190-00629-00 Rev. B
System Time Box ......................................................2-23
Inset Map .................................................................2-23
Auxiliary Window Keys .............................................2-26
Working with Menus ................................................2-27
Auxiliary Windows....................................................2-27
2.7 Reversionary Mode .......................................2-42
2.8 Alerts and Annunciations...............................2-43
Alerts Window ..........................................................2-43
Annunciation Window ..............................................2-43
Softkey Annunciations ..............................................2-43
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) Alert
Annunciations (optional) ..........................................2-44
Traffic Annunciation .................................................2-44
SECTION 3 NAV/COM
3.1 NAV/COM Description .................................... 3-1
Windows and Fields ...................................................3-2
Radio Selection...........................................................3-2
Controls......................................................................3-3
Tuning Box .................................................................3-4
Switching Between Radios .........................................3-4
Manually Tuning a Frequency .....................................3-4
Radio Indicators .........................................................3-5
Volume .......................................................................3-5
Frequency Transfer Arrow ...........................................3-5
3.2 Com Operation ............................................... 3-6
Frequency Spacing......................................................3-6
Automatic Squelch .....................................................3-6
Selecting a COM Radio...............................................3-6
Emergency Frequency (121.500 MHz) ........................3-7
Quick-Tuning and Activating121.500 MHz .................3-7
Stuck Microphone ......................................................3-7
3.3 NAV Operation................................................ 3-8
Frequency Range ........................................................3-8
Morse Code Identifier.................................................3-8
NAV Radio Selection for Navigation ...........................3-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DME TUNING .............................................................3-9
3.4 Frequency Auto-Tuning ..................................3-10
Auto-Tuning on the PFD ...........................................3-10
Auto-Tuning on the MFD ..........................................3-11
NRST – Nearest Airports Window .............................3-14
NRST – Nearest VOR Window...................................3-15
Auto-Tuning on Approach Activation (NAV Frequencies) .
3-17
SECTION 4 TRANSPONDER
4.1 Transponder Description................................. 4-1
Transponder Softkeys .................................................4-1
Transponder Status Bar ..............................................4-1
Mode S Features.........................................................4-2
Traffic Information Service (TIS)..................................4-2
4.2 Operation ....................................................... 4-3
Mode Selection ..........................................................4-3
Code Selection ...........................................................4-4
IDENT Function ..........................................................4-5
SECTION 5 AUDIO PANEL
5.1 Audio Panel Description ................................. 5-1
Transceivers ................................................................5-1
Mono/Stereo Headsets ...............................................5-2
Unmuted/Unswitched Inputs ......................................5-2
Front Panel Controls ...................................................5-2
5.2 Operation ....................................................... 5-4
Power-up and Fail-Safe Operation ..............................5-4
Key Annunciators........................................................5-4
Lighting ......................................................................5-4
Transceiver Keys .........................................................5-4
Split COM Function ....................................................5-5
PA Function ................................................................5-5
Speaker ......................................................................5-5
Marker Beacon Receiver .............................................5-6
Navigation Radios ......................................................5-7
viii
Intercom System (ICS) Isolation ..................................5-8
Intercom Volume and Squelch ....................................5-9
Entertainment Inputs..................................................5-9
GDL 69A XM Radio System ......................................5-10
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ) .............................5-10
Digital Clearance Recorder with Playback ................5-11
Reversionary Mode ..................................................5-11
SECTION 6 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.1 Introduction.................................................... 6-1
EIS Pages ....................................................................6-1
EIS Indicators..............................................................6-1
EIS Page Reversion .....................................................6-2
6.2 Engine Page .................................................... 6-3
6.3 Lean Page ....................................................... 6-4
6.4 System Page ................................................... 6-6
SECTION 7 MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.1 Introduction.................................................... 7-1
Description .................................................................7-1
Optional Equipment ...................................................7-1
MFD Power-up............................................................7-2
MFD Backlighting .......................................................7-2
MFD Softkeys ............................................................7-2
Reversionary Mode ....................................................7-2
Electronic Checklists (optional) ..................................7-3
MFD Page Groups ......................................................7-7
Working With Menus..................................................7-8
7.2 Navigation Map Page ..................................... 7-9
Navigation Map Page Operations ............................7-11
7.3 Traffic Map Page ............................................7-33
TIS Symbology ..........................................................7-34
Traffic Map Page Operations ....................................7-34
7.4 Terrain Proximity Page ...................................7-37
Terrain Proximity Page Operations ...........................7-38
Displaying Obstacle Data .........................................7-39
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.5 TAWS (Optional).............................................7-40
7.5 Direct-to Navigation......................................7-47
Direct-to Navigation Operations...............................7-48
7.6 Flight Plans ....................................................7-53
Active Flight Plan Page .............................................7-53
Active Flight Plan Page Options ...............................7-53
Flight Plan Catalog Page ..........................................7-63
Flight Plan Catalog Page Operations .......................7-63
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Page..............................7-69
7.7 Procedures .....................................................7-71
Arrivals and Departures ............................................7-71
Approaches ..............................................................7-72
G1000 Navigational Guidance for Approaches ........7-72
Selecting Approaches ...............................................7-73
7.8 Waypoint Page Group ....................................7-77
AIRPORT Information Page (INFO)............................7-78
Airport Frequency Information Field .........................7-81
AIRPORT Information Page Options .........................7-82
Departure Information Page (DP) .............................7-83
Arrival Information Page (STAR) ...............................7-84
Approach Information Page......................................7-86
Intersection Information Page ..................................7-88
NDB Information Page..............................................7-90
VOR Information Page ..............................................7-93
User Waypoint Information Page ..............................7-96
Creating User Waypoints ..........................................7-98
Modifying User Waypoints .....................................7-100
User Waypoint Information Page Options...............7-101
7.9 Auxiliary Page Group ................................... 7-105
Trip Planning Page ..................................................7-105
GPS Status Page .....................................................7-112
System Setup Page .................................................7-116
System Status Page ................................................7-126
7.10 Nearest Page Group .................................. 7-127
Navigating to a Nearest Waypoint .........................7-128
Nearest Intersections Page .....................................7-132
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Nearest NDB Page ..................................................7-133
Nearest VOR Page ..................................................7-134
Nearest User Waypoint Page ..................................7-136
Nearest Frequencies Page.......................................7-137
Nearest Airspaces Page ..........................................7-138
SECTION 8 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
8.1 Introduction.................................................... 8-1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
AFCS Overview ...........................................................8-1
AFCS Controls ............................................................8-2
Flight Director Operation ............................... 8-4
Activating the Flight Director .....................................8-4
AFCS Status Bar .........................................................8-5
Command Bars ...........................................................8-5
Flight Director Limitations ..........................................8-5
Flight Director Modes .................................... 8-6
Pitch Modes ...............................................................8-6
Roll Modes ...............................................................8-13
Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation ..........8-17
Flight Control ...........................................................8-17
Engagement .............................................................8-18
Control Wheel Steering ............................................8-18
Overspeed Protection ...............................................8-18
Disengagement ........................................................8-19
Procedures .....................................................8-20
Departure .................................................................8-21
Intercepting a VOR ...................................................8-22
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course ...............................8-23
Flight Level Change Descent ....................................8-24
Approaches ..............................................................8-25
AFCS Alerts ....................................................8-27
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 9 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
9.1 Optional Equipment ....................................... 9-1
9.2 Stormscope..................................................... 9-2
Displaying Stormscope Lightning Data on the Nav Map .
9-2
Stormscope Page ........................................................9-5
9.3 Traffic Advisory Systems ................................. 9-8
Introduction................................................................9-8
L-3 SKYWATCH Traffic Advisory Systems (SKY497/
SKY899) ...................................................................9-10
9.4 Optional XM Weather ....................................9-12
Introduction..............................................................9-12
GDL 69A Weather ....................................................9-12
Weather Product Symbols ........................................9-23
GDL 69A – XM Digital Audio Entertainment ............9-24
XM Radio Page .........................................................9-26
GDL 69A Troubleshooting .........................................9-29
9.5 Airborne Weather Radar ................................9-31
SECTION 10 ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
10.1 Annunciations and Alerts.............................10-1
Alert Level Definitions ..............................................10-2
Beechcraft 58/G58 Annunciations & Alerts...............10-3
AFCS Alerts...............................................................10-4
TAWS ALERTS ...........................................................10-5
TAWS System Status Annunciations .........................10-6
G1000 System Annunciations ...................................10-6
G1000 System Alert Messages .................................10-8
Appendix D G1000 Map Datums .......................... D-1
Appendix E General TIS Information .................... E-1
Introduction................................................................E-1
TIS vs. TCAS ................................................................E-1
TIS Limitations ............................................................E-1
Appendix F Map Symbols ..................................... F-1
Airport ........................................................................F-2
NAVAIDS ....................................................................F-2
Basemap ....................................................................F-2
Traffic .........................................................................F-3
Lightning Strike ..........................................................F-3
Miscellaneous ............................................................F-3
Line Symbols ..............................................................F-4
Obstacle database .................................................... G-1
Terrain Color Chart .................................................... G-1
Appendix G G1000 System Specifications ........... G-2
GDU 1040 MFD & PFD .............................................. G-2
GMA 1347 Audio Panel ............................................. G-2
GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units .............................. G-2
GDC 74A Air Data Computer ..................................... G-3
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder ..................................... G-3
GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit .................................... G-3
GDL 69/69A Weather Data Link................................. G-3
GRS 77 AHRS ............................................................. G-4
INDEX
Index ...................................................................... I-1
APPENDICES
Appendix A SD Card Use ...................................... A-1
Aviation Database ..................................................... A-1
Terrain and Obstacle Databases ................................ A-1
Appendix B Abbreviations, Acronyms & NAV Terms ..
B-1
Appendix C Questions & Answers ........................ C-1
x
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This System Overview Pilot’s Guide provides a basic
description of the G1000 System as it pertains to the
Beechcraft 58/G58. The description includes the Garmin
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS).
This section gives a brief description of the G1000
System. A G1000 system block diagram is given in
Figure 1-1. Refer to the Pilot’s Guide Appendices for LRU
specifications.
High-Speed Data Bus (Ethernet)
Reversionary
Control
Reversionary
Control
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
No. 1 GIA 63
Integrated Avionics Unit
No. 2 GIA 63
Integrated Avionics Unit
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
System Inegration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GPS Output
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director Calculations
Servo Communication
GRS 77
AHRS
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
GPS Output
Servo Communication
GMU 44
Magnetometer
Heading
GTX 32
or GTX 33
Transponder
GEA 71
Engine/Airframe
Unit
GSA 81
Pitch Servo
Autopilot Calculations
GSA 81
Yaw Servo
Autopilot Calculations
GSA 81
Pitch Trim Servo
Autopilot Calculations
GSA 81
Roll Servo
Autopilot Calculations
Figure 1-1 G1000 System Block Diagram
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
1-1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GDU 1040/GDU 1043 – The G1000 features two
displays, the GDU 1040 and GDU 1043. The GDU
1040 is a 10.4-inch LCD display with 1024 x 768
resolution and is configured as a Primary Flight
Display. The GDU 1040 displays the Flight Director
command bars, system annunciations and alerts,
pilot-selectable references, and flight information.
The GDU 1043 is configured as a Multi Function
Display which contains the dedicated AFCS keys
and GPS/Navigation controls. The displays communicate with each other through a high-speed data
bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is
also paired via an ethernet connection.
Each GIA 63 also contains the AFCS software
which controls the Flight Director. During normal
operation, the GRS 77 AHRS and GDC 74A Air Data
Computer send attitude and air data information
to the GIA 63s. This information, combined with
GPS and other system data, is used by the Flight
Director and Autopilot. Flight Director commands
are calculated within the #1 GIA 63 and are sent to
the PFD for display and mode annunciation. Flight
information is also sent to the GSA 81 servos for
Autopilot operation. A GIA #1 failure results in the
loss of the AFCS system. Any GIA 63 failure results
in loss of the Autopilot function.
• GMA 1347 – Installed between the MFD and PFD,
the GMA 1347 integrates NAV/COM digital audio,
intercom system and marker beacon controls. The
GMA 1347 communicates with both GIA 63s using
an RS-232 digital interface. The GMA 1347 also
controls manual display reversionary mode.
• GRS 77 – The GRS 77 is an Attitude and Heading
Reference System (AHRS) that provides aircraft
attitude and heading information to both the
G1000 displays and the GIA 63s. The unit contains
advanced sensors, accelerometers and rate sensors.
In addition, the GRS 77 interfaces with both the
GDC 74A Air Data Computer and the GMU 44
Magnetometer. The GRS 77 also utilizes GPS signals
sent from the GIA 63. Attitude and heading information is sent using an ARINC 429 digital interface
to both GDU 1040s and GIA 63s. AHRS modes of
operation are discussed later in this document.
• GIA 63 – There are two GIA 63s. The GIA 63 functions as a main communication hub, linking all LRUs
with the PFD and the MFD displays. Each GIA 63
contains a GPS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, and system integration microprocessors. Each
GIA 63 is paired with a respective display through
an ethernet connection. The GIAs are not paired
together and do not communicate with each other
directly.
1-2
• GMU 44 – The GMU 44 Magnetometer measures
local magnetic field information. Data is sent to
the GRS 77 AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power
directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with
the GRS 77 using an RS-485 digital interface.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GDC 74A – The GDC 74A Air Data Computer
processes information from the pitot/static system
as well as the outside air temperature (OAT) sensor.
The GDC 74A provides pressure altitude, airspeed,
vertical speed and OAT information to the G1000
system, and communicates with the GIA 63s,
GDU 1040s and GRS 77 using an ARINC 429 digital
interface.
• GEA 71 – The GEA 71 receives and processes signals
from the engine and airframe sensors. Sensor types
include engine temperature and pressure sensors as
well as fuel measurement and pressure sensors. The
GEA 71 communicates with both GIA 63s using an
RS-485 digital interface.
• GTX 33 – The GTX 33 is a solid-state, Mode-S
transponder that provides Modes A, C and S operation. The GTX 33 is controlled through the PFD
and communicates with both GIA 63s through an
RS-232 digital interface.
Each servo moves its respective aircraft control
surface in response to commands generated by
internal servo calculations. For pitch trim, the servo
positions the aircraft pitch trim surface in response
to commands generated by automatic and manual
electric pitch trim calculations. Calculations are
performed using data sent through the common
serial data bus from the GIA 63. Manual Electric
Pitch Trim is also provided in response to the Manual
Electric Trim (MET) switch.
1.3 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
This System Overview only covers the baseline
configuration of the G1000. Descriptions and procedures
relating to optional equipment is covered in the G1000
Optional Equipment section. Consult a Garmin authorized
service center for optional equipment availability and
configuration.
• SA 81 AFCS Servos – Four GSA 81 servos are
used for automatic control of the aircraft flight
control surfaces. One servo is used for the each of
the following:
•
•
•
•
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Pitch
Roll
Pitch Trim
Yaw
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
1-3
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 PFD/MFD CONTROLS
1
2
3
5
4
17
6
7
8
9
Figure 1-2 PFD/MFD Controls
18
24
10
14
19
25
11
15
20
26
12
16
27
13
21
22
23
28
MFD Only
1-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Functionality of the PFD and MFD controls are the
same with the exception of the dedicated autopilot keys
located only on the MFD bezel.
(1) NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls the NAV audio level.
Press to toggle the Morse code identifier ON and OFF.
Volume level is shown in the field as a percentage.
(2) NAV Frequency Toggle Key – Toggles the standby
and active NAV frequencies.
(3) Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the MHz (large knob)
and kHz (small knob) standby frequencies for the NAV
receiver. Press to toggle the tuning cursor (light blue
box) between the NAV1 and NAV2 fields.
(4) Heading Knob – Turn to manually select a heading
on the HSI. When pressed, it synchronizes the heading
bug with the compass lubber line. Selected Heading
provides the heading reference to the Flight Director
while operating in Heading Select mode.
(5) Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated.
Activates the map pointer when pressed.
(6) CRS/BARO Knob – The large knob sets the altimeter
barometric pressure and the small knob adjusts the
course. The course is only adjustable when the HSI is in
VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode. Pressing this knob
centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. Selected
Course provides course reference to the Flight Director
when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
(7) Dual COM Knob – Tunes the MHz (large knob)
and kHz (small knob) standby frequencies for the COM
transceiver. Pressing this knob toggles the tuning cursor
(light blue box) between the COM1 and COM2 fields.
(8) COM Frequency Toggle Key – Toggles the standby
and active COM frequencies. Pressing and holding this
key for two seconds automatically tunes the emergency
frequency (121.5 MHz) in the active frequency field.
(9) COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio level.
Pressing this knob turns the COM automatic squelch ON
and OFF. Audio volume level is shown in the field as a
percentage.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
(10) Direct-to Key – Allows the user to enter a
destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (specified by the identifier, chosen
from the active route, or taken from the map cursor
position).
(11) FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for
creating and editing the active flight plan, or for accessing
stored flight plans.
(12) CLR Key (DFLT MAP) – Erases information,
cancels an entry, or removes page menus. To display the
Navigation Map Page immediately, press and hold CLR
(MFD only).
(13) Dual FMS Knob – Used to select the page to be
viewed (only on the MFD). The large knob selects a page
group (MAP, WPT, AUX, NRST), while the small knob
selects a specific page within the page group. Pressing
the small knob turns the selection cursor ON and OFF.
When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the
different windows using the small and large knobs. The
large knob is used to move the cursor on the page, while
the small knob is used to select individual characters
for the highlighted cursor location. When the G1000
displays a list that is too long for the display screen, a
scroll bar appears along the right side of the display,
indicating the availability of additional items within the
selected category. Press the FMS/PUSH CRSR knob to
activate the cursor and turn the large FMS knob to scroll
through the list.
(14) MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of
options. This list allows the user to access additional
features, or to make setting changes that relate to certain
pages.
(15) PROC Key – Selects approaches, departures and
arrivals from the flight plan. If a flight plan is used,
available procedures for the departure and/or arrival
airport are automatically suggested. If a flight plan is not
used, the desired airport and the desired procedure may
be selected. This key selects IFR departure procedures
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
1-5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approaches (IAPs)
from the database and loads them into the active flight
plan.
(16) ENT Key – Accepts a menu selection or data entry.
This key is used to approve an operation or complete data
entry. It is also used to confirm selections and information
entries.
(17) Dual ALT Knob – Sets the reference altitude in
the box located above the Altimeter. The large knob
selects the thousands, while the small knob selects the
hundreds. Selected altitude provides an altitude setting
for the Altitude Capture/Hold mode, in addition to the
standard G1000 altitude alerter function.
(18) AP Key – Engages/disengages the Autopilot and
Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral modes.
(19) FD Key – Activates/deactivates the Flight Director
only. Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight Director in
the default vertical and lateral modes. Pressing the FD
key again deactivates the Flight Director and removes the
command bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the
Autopilot is engaged, the FD key is disabled.
(20) NAV Key – Selects/deselects the Navigation mode.
(21) ALT Key – Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold
mode.
(22) VS Key – Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode.
(23) FLC Key – Selects/deselects the Flight Level Change
mode.
(24) YD Key – Engages/disengages the Yaw Damper.
(25) HDG Key – Selects/deselects the Heading Select
mode.
(26) APR Key – Selects/deselects the Approach mode.
(27, 28) NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys – Controls the
active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed,
and Flight Level Change modes.
1-6
1.5 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
The GDU 1040 data card slots use Secure Digital (SD)
cards. SD cards are used for aviation database updates
and terrain database storage.
To install an SD card:
1.
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot located
on the right side of the display bezel (the front
of the card should be flush with the face of the
display bezel).
To remove an SD card:
1.
Gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Guide Appendices for
instructions on updating the aviation database.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 SYSTEM POWER-UP
The G1000 system is integrated with the aircraft
electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The Garmin G1000 PFD/MFD and supporting
sub-systems include both power-on and continuous builtin test features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM,
external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
While the system begins to initialize, test annunciations
are displayed to the pilot at power-up, as shown in the
figure below. All system annunciations should be cleared
within one (1) minute of power-up. The GMA 1347 also
annunciates all bezel lights briefly upon power-up.
NOTE: Refer to the Beechcraft 58/G58 Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures
concerning avionics power application and
emergency power supply operation.
On the PFD, the AHRS system displays the ‘AHRS
ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’ message and begins to initialize.
The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields
within one (1) minute of power-up. The AHRS can align
itself both while taxiing and during level flight.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS
initialization bank angle limitations.
NOTE: See the Annunciations and Alerts Section
for additional information regarding system
annunciations and alerts.
Figure 1-3 PFD Initialization Display
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
1-7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Page
displays the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System version
Copyright
Checklist filename
Land database name and version
Obstacle database name and version
Terrain database name and version
Aviation database name, version and effective
dates
When this information has been reviewed for currency
(to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is
prompted to continue. Current database information is
displayed with the valid operating dates, cycle number
and database type.
Press the ENT key to acknowledge this information
and proceed to the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-4 MFD Power-up Page
1-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
The G1000 PFD and MFD displays use photocell
technology to automatically adjust for ambient lighting
conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured
to optimize display appearance through a broad range
of cockpit lighting conditions. The PFD, MFD, and
GMA 1347 bezel/key lighting is typically controlled
directly by the existing instrument panel dimmer bus.
If desired, the PFD and MFD display backlighting can
be adjusted manually. The PFD, MFD and GMA 1347
bezel/key brightness can also be adjusted manually. The
GMA 1347 bezel/key brightness is directly tied to the
MFD bezel/key adjustment.
NOTE: Refer to the Primary Flight Display
section for instructions on adjusting backlighting
manually.
1.8 SYSTEM OPERATION
NORMAL MODE
The PFD and MFD are connected together on a single
Ethernet bus, allowing for high-speed communication
between the two units. Each GIA 63 is connected to a
single display This allows the units to share information,
thus enabling true system integration.
In normal operating mode, the PFD displays graphical
flight instrumentation instead of the traditional gyro
instruments. Attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude
and vertical speed are all shown on one display. The
MFD shows a full-color moving map with navigation
information. Both displays offer control for COM and NAV
frequency selection, as well as for the heading, course/baro
and altitude reference functions. On the left of the MFD
display, the Engine Indication System (EIS) cluster shows
engine and airframe instrumentation. Figure 1-5 gives an
example of the G1000 system in normal mode.
Figure 1-5 Normal Mode
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
1-9
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
REVERSIONARY MODE
Should a failure occur in either display, the G1000
automatically enters reversionary mode. In reversionary
mode, all important flight information is shown on the
remaining display. An example of reversionary mode
entry due to a failed PFD is shown in Figure 1-6.
If a display fails, the GIA 63-GDU 1040 Ethernet
interface is cut off. Thus, the GIA can no longer
communicate with the remaining display, and the NAV
and COM functions provided to the failed display by the
GIA are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The
system reverts to using backup paths for the GRS 77, GDC
74A, GEA 71 and GTX 33, as required. The change to
backup paths is completely automated for all LRUs, and
no pilot action is required.
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup
paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the
Annunciations and Alerts Pilot’s Guide for further
information regarding these and other system
alerts.
Reversionary mode may also be manually activated by
the pilot if the system fails to detect a display problem.
Reversionary mode is activated manually by pressing
the red DISPLAY BACKUP button at the bottom of
the GMA 1347 Audio Panel. Pressing this button again
deactivates reversionary mode.
AFCS PREFLIGHT TEST
When power is applied to the G1000, the AFCS system
starts preflight system tests. ‘PFT’ is annunciated on the
PFD at the AFCS System Status field. The Autopilot
disconnect aural alert tone sounds at the end of the test
and the ‘PFT’ annunciation disappears.
Figure 1-6 Reversionary Mode
1-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
Air Data Input Failure
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77
AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and
air data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In
normal (primary) mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and
magnetic field measurements. If either of these external
measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS
modes of operation are available (see table below) and
depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs.
Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is
communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS
output while AHRS is operating in normal/primary mode.
A failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating
in reversionary ‘No GPS’ mode results in invalid attitude
and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red
‘X’ flags).
GPS Input Failure
Magnetometer Failure
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions
to one of the reversionary ‘No Magnetometer’ modes and
continues to output valid attitude information. However,
the heading output on the PFD does become invalid (as
indicated by a red ‘X’).
The G1000 system provides two sources of GPS
information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the
information provided from one of the GPS receivers is
unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the
other GPS receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of
the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail,
the AHRS continues to operate in reversionary ‘No GPS’
mode so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs are
available and valid.
Available AHRS Functions
AHRS Mode
Normal/Primary
Reversionary:
No GPS
Reversionary:
No Magnetometer
Reversionary:
No Magnetometer
No Air Data
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NOTE: Please refer to the Annunciations and
Alerts Pilot’s Guide for specific AHRS alert
information.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware that aggressive
maneuvering in any of the three reversionary
modes listed below can degrade AHRS
accuracy.
Available Sensor Inputs
GPS Input
GMU 44
GDC 74A
(At least one) Magnetometer Air Data Computer
X
X
X
Pitch
Roll
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
1-11
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
This page intentionally left blank
1-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Primary Flight Display
SECTION 2 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.1 INTRODUCTION
WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, attitude,
altitude, or heading indications become unusable,
please refer to the backup instruments.
This section describes the major features of the G1000
Primary Flight Display (PFD) as installed on Beechcraft 58/
G58 aircraft. Information is displayed using the G1000’s
two 10.4-inch color flat-panel displays. During normal
operation, the left display is configured as a Primary Flight
Display.
The PFD provides increased situational awareness by
replacing the traditional instrument “six pack” on the
pilot’s panel with an easy-to-scan display that provides
a large horizon and airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical
speed, navigation, communication, annunciation,
terrain, traffic, and lightning (optional) information. The
PFD also controls the operation of the transponder, the
selection of NAV/COM frequencies, audio volume, and
many navigation features. The operation of these features
is explained in other supporting sections.
The G1000 system controls were designed so that,
regardless of which seat the pilot is flying from, the aircraft
can be flown with one hand and the controls manipulated
with the other hand.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
The PFD displays the following:
• Flight Instruments (2.4)
– Airspeed Indicator with True Airspeed Box
– Attitude and Slip/Skid Indicators
– Altimeter with Selected Altitude and Barometric
Setting Boxes
– Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator
– Marker Beacon Annunciations
– Vertical Speed Indicator
– Horizontal Situation Indicator
- Turn Rate Indicator
- Bearing Pointers and Information Windows
- DME Information Window (optional)
- Radio Tuning Window (if DME equipped)
- Navigation Source
• Communication, Navigation, and Surveillance
(CNS) Information (2.5)
– Communication Frequency Window
– Navigation (NAV) Frequency Window
– Navigation Status Bar
– Transponder Status Bar
• Supplemental Flight Data (2.6)
– Outside Air Temperature Box
– System Time Box
– Inset Map
– Auxiliary Windows
- Timer/References Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- Direct-to Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
• Alerts and Annunciations (2.8)
– Alerts Window
– Annunciation Window
– Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)
Alert Annunciations
– Traffic Annunciation
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-1
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
2
13
12
3
11
4
10
9
5
6
8
7
1
NAV Frequency Window
11
Barometric Setting Box
2
Airspeed Indicator
12
Vertical Speed Indicator
3
True Airspeed Box
13
Altimeter
4
Heading Box
14
Selected Altitude Box
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator
15
COM Frequency Window
6
Outside Air Temperature Box
16
TAWS Alert Annunciation
7
Softkeys
17
Navigation Status Bar
8
System Time Box
18
Slip/Skid Indicator
9
Transponder Status Bar
19
Attitude Indicator
10
Turn Rate Indicator
Figure 2-1 Default PFD Information
2-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
10
1
9
8
2
7
3
6
5
4
1
Traffic Annunciation
6
Alerts Window
2
Selected Heading Box
7
Selected Course Box
3
Inset Map
8
Annunciation Window
4
DME Information Window
9
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator
5
BRG Information Windows
10
Marker Beacon Annunciation
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-3
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.2 BACKLIGHTING
To manually adjust the backlighting for the
PFD and MFD keys:
Turn the “FLIGHT INST” dimmer knob (for
location refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual).
NOTE: The backlighting can only be adjusted
from the PFD, except in reversionary mode.
1.
Press the MENU key on the PFD to display
the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ is now
highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘PFD
DSPL’. Turn the small FMS knob in the direction
of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
3.
• Auto (default) – The G1000 adjusts backlighting
automatically with reference to the amount of
light in the cockpit
• Manual – Allows the pilot to manually adjust
backlighting
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection window. Turn the FMS knob to select
‘MANUAL’, then press the ENT key.
4.
To manually adjust the backlighting for the
PFD and MFD:
With the intensity value now highlighted,
turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
backlighting, then press the ENT key.
5.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘MFD
DSPL’ and turn the small FMS knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD
KEY’. Repeat steps 3 and 4. Press the CLR or
MENU key to remove the window.
NOTE: No other window can be displayed in the
lower right corner of the PFD when the MENU
key is pressed to change the backlighting.
The backlighting of both the display and keys can be
adjusted for the PFD and MFD. The backlighting intensity
ranges from 0.14% to 100.00%. Two modes exist for
adjustment:
Turn the “FLIGHT INST” dimmer knob (for
location refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual).
OR
1.
Press the MENU key on the PFD to display
the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ is now
highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection window. Turn the FMS knob to select
‘MANUAL’, then press the ENT key.
3.
With the intensity value now highlighted,
turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
backlighting, then press the ENT key.
4.
2-4
OR
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next
to ‘MFD DSPL’, and repeat steps 2 and 3. Press
the CLR or MENU key to remove the window.
Figure 2-3 PFD Setup Menu Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.3 SOFTKEY FUNCTION
When a softkey is turned on, its color changes to black
text on gray background and remains this way until it is
turned off, at which time it reverts to white text on black
background. The CDI, IDENT, DME, TMR/REF, NRST,
and ALERTS softkeys change momentarily to black text
on gray background and automatically switch back to
white text on black background.
On
Off
Figure 2-4 Softkey Operation
The PFD softkeys listed provide control over flight
management functions including GPS, NAV, terrain,
traffic, and weather (optional).
• INSET – Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left
corner
OFF – Removes Inset Map
DCLTR (3) – Selects desired amount of map detail;
declutter level appears in the DCLTR softkey:
NO DECLUTTER: All map features visible
DECLUTTER – 1: Declutters land data
DECLUTTER – 2: Declutters land and SUA
data
DECLUTTER – 3: Declutters large NAV data
remaining (removes everything except the
active flight plan)
TRAFFIC – Displays traffic on Inset Map
TOPO – Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale
on Inset Map
TERRAIN – Displays terrain information on Inset
Map
STRMSCP (optional) – Displays lightning data
on Inset Map (within 200-nm radius of
aircraft)
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NEXRAD (optional) – Displays NEXRAD weather
and coverage information.
XM LTNG (optional) – Displays XM lightning
information
BACK – Returns to previous level softkeys
• PFD – Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configurations
METRIC – Displays current and reference
altitudes in meters, in addition to feet; also
changes barometric setting to hectopascals
from inches of mercury (in Hg)
DFLTS – Resets PFD to default settings
DME (optional) – Displays DME Information
Window which shows actual DME distance
BRG1 (Bearing 1) – Cycles through the following information in the BRG1 Information
Window:
NAV1 – Displays NAV1 waypoint frequency
or identifier and GPS-derived distance
GPS – Displays GPS waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance
OFF – Removes BRG1 Information Window
BRG2 (Bearing 2) – Cycles through the following information in the BRG2 Information
Window:
NAV2 – Displays NAV2 waypoint frequency
or identifier and GPS-derived distance
GPS – Displays GPS waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance
OFF – Removes BRG2 Information Window
STD BARO – Sets barometric pressure to 29.92
in Hg (1013 hPa if METRIC softkey is
pressed)
BACK – Returns to previous level softkeys
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-5
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
• CDI – Changes navigation mode on the CDI to
GPS, NAV1, or NAV2
• IDENT – Provides special aircraft position identification to ATC
• DME (optional) – Displays DME Tuning Window
• TMR/REF – Displays Timer/References Window
• OBS – Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
• NRST – Displays Nearest Airports Window
• ALERTS – Displays Alerts Window
• XPDR – Displays transponder mode selection
softkeys:
STBY – Selects standby mode (transponder does
not reply to any interrogations
ON – Selects Mode A (transponder replies to
interrogations)
ALT – Selects Mode C - altitude reporting mode
(transponder replies to identification and
altitude interrogations)
VFR – Automatically enters the VFR code (1200
in the U.S.A. only)
CODE – Displays transponder code selection
softkeys 0-7
0 through 7 – Use numbers to enter code
IDENT – Provides special aircraft position
identification to Air Traffic Control (ATC)
BKSP – Removes numbers entered one by one
BACK – Returns to previous level softkeys
IDENT – Provides special aircraft position identification to ATC
BACK – Returns to previous level softkeys
2-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
����������
�����
���
���
���
���
����
�����
�������
����
������
����
������
����������
����������
���������
Figure 2-5 Top Level PFD Softkeys
�����
(��������) (��������)
���
�����
�������
����
�������
������ �������
�������
�����������������������������
������������������������������������
�������
�������
Figure 2-6 INSET Softkeys
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-7
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
���
����������
�����
������
���
�������
����
�������
����
�����������
�����������
����������
����������
����������
����������
��������
����
������
���������������������
��������������������������
�����������������������
Figure 2-7 PFD Configuration Softkeys
����
����
��
���
���
����
�����
����
������
��������������������������������
��������������������������
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�
�����
����
����
������
��������������������������������
������������������������������������
Figure 2-8 XPDR Softkeys
2-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.4 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling
number gauge using a moving tape.
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Speed Ranges
A color-coded (white, green, yellow, and red) speed
range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors
denote flaps operating range, normal operating range,
caution range, and never exceed speed (VNE). A red range
is also present for low speed awareness. Refer to the
Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for speed criteria.
Airspeed Trend Vector
Vspeed
References
VYSE (Blue Line)
Actual
Airspeed
VMCA (Red Line)
Speed Ranges
True Airspeed
Box
Figure 2-9 Airspeed Indicator
Speed Indication
The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots, while minor tick
marks on the moving tape are indicated in intervals of 5
knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots
of airspeed viewable at one time. The actual airspeed is
displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains
black until reaching never-exceed speed (VNE), at which
point it turns red.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line,
extending up or down on the airspeed scale, located to the
right of the color-coded speed range strip. The end of the
trend vector displays approximately what airspeed will be
reached in six seconds if the current rate of acceleration is
maintained. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not
available due to a system failure.
The color of the text within the airspeed pointer
changes to yellow to indicate a forecasted airspeed greater
than VNE. The color of the text reverts back to white once
the Airspeed Trend Vector descends back below VNE.
Vspeed References
Black arrows with denote Glide, VX, and VY. VYSE and
VMCA are shown with blue and red lines, respectively. A
white triangular pointer is set at the maximum flap and
landing gear extension speed.
VFE/VLE
Figure 2-11 Pointer at VFE/VLE
Figure 2-10 Red Pointer at VNE
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Glide, VX, and VY may be set and displayed using the
Timer/References Window (refer to the Auxiliary Windows
portion of this Flight Instruments section). When ON, the
Vspeeds are displayed to the right of the airspeed scale
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-9
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue
sky and brown ground with a white Horizon Line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the following information:
NOTE: Supplemental flight data, such as the Inset
Map and the Alerts and Annunciation Windows,
disappear from the PFD when pitch exceeds +30˚
or -20˚ or when a 65˚ bank angle is reached.
• Pitch indication
• Roll indication
• Slip/Skid indication
9
8
1
7
2
6
3
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-12 Attitude Indicator
2-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Pitch Indication
Roll Indication
The Horizon Line is part of the Pitch Scale. Above and
below the Horizon Line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch
marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ above and 45˚ degrees below the Horizon Line are
shown.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the Roll
Scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right
of the zero on the Roll Scale. Angle of bank is indicated by
the position of the Roll Pointer on the Roll Scale.
Red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward
the horizon are displayed, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚
below the Horizon Line.
Nose High
Slip/Skid Indication
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the Roll
Pointer. The indicator moves with the Roll Pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral
acceleration. A slip/skid is indicated by the location of
the Slip/Skid Indicator relative to the Roll Pointer. One
Slip/Skid Indicator displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid Indicator.
Nose Low
Figure 2-13 Pitch Attitude Warnings
Figure 2-14 Roll and Slip/Skid Indication
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-11
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
ALTIMETER
Altitude Select Bug
The Altimeter displays barometric altitude values in
feet on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. The
Altimeter offers the following information:
The Altitude Select Bug is displayed at the Selected
Altitude or the edge of the tape (whichever is closer to
the current altitude). This altitude also appears in the
Selected Altitude Box above the Altimeter.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Altitude values
Altitude Select Bug
Altitude Trend Vector
Selected Altitude Box
Barometric Setting Box
Altitude Alerting Function
To set the Altitude Select Bug:
Turn the ALT knobs to set the Altitude Select
Bug. The small ALT knob sets the hundreds and
the large ALT knob sets the thousands.
Altitude Trend Vector
The Altimeter can also be configured for Metric
Display.
Selected Altitude
Box
This vertical, magenta line extends up or down the
altitude scale located left of the numeric labels. The end
of the trend vector displays approximately what altitude
will be reached in six seconds if the current rate of vertical
speed is maintained. The trend vector is absent if altitude
remains constant, or if any data needed to calculate it is
not available due to a system failure.
Selected Altitude Box
Current Altitude
Altitude Trend
Vector
The Selected Altitude Box is located above the Altimeter
and displays, in feet, the altitude selected by turning the
ALT knobs. The metric value, when selected, is displayed
on top of the Selected Altitude Box.
Barometric Setting Box
Altitude Select Bug
Barometric Setting
Box
Figure 2-15 Altimeter
Altitude Values
The numeric labels and major tick marks are shown
at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals
of 20 feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black
pointer.
2-12
The Barometric Setting Box displays the barometric
pressure in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa).
To select barometric pressure:
Turn the large BARO (outer) knob to select
the desired setting.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Altitude Alerting
Metric Display
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with
a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude.
This function is independent of the flight control system.
Visual annunciations appear in the Selected Altitude
Box. The Altitude Alerting function is reset whenever the
Selected Altitude is adjusted.
Selected and current altitudes can be displayed in
meters in addition to English units. The barometric
pressure may also be displayed in hectopascals.
The Selected Altitude Box flashes for five seconds,
reversing color to black text on a cyan background when
the aircraft reaches 1000 feet from the Selected Altitude.
At 200 feet from the Selected Altitud, color reversal to
normal occurs along with an aural tone.
To display altitude in meters and barometric
pressure in hectopascals:
1.
2.
Press the PFD softkey to display the secondlevel softkeys.
Press the METRIC softkey to display altitude in
meters and barometric pressure in hectopascals.
Press the BACK softkey to return to the top-level
softkeys.
After capturing the Selected Altitude, the Altitude
Alerting feature alerts the pilot whenever deviations of
±200 ft from the Selected Altitude occur. The Selected
Altitude Box flashes yellow text on a black background for
five seconds to indicate the deviation.
Within 1000 ft
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
Figure 2-16 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
Figure 2-17 Altimeter (Metric)
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-13
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
VERTICAL DEVIATION/GLIDESLOPE INDICATOR
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR
The Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator is a
window on the left side of the Altimeter. The window
appears when an ILS is tuned in the active NAV field (and
selected on the Audio Panel). A green diamond appears
and acts as the vertical deviation indication, just like a
glideslope needle on a conventional indicator.
The Vertical Speed Indicator displays the aircraft
vertical speed with numeric labels and tick marks at 1,000
and 2,000 ft in each direction on the non-moving tape.
Minor tick marks are at intervals of 500 ft.
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the
PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude Box. Outer marker
reception is indicated by a blue light, middle by amber,
and inner by white (refer to the Audio Panel section for
more information).
Marker Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical Speed Pointer
The Vertical Speed Pointer displays the current vertical
speed and points to that speed on the non-moving tape.
If the rate of ascent exceeds 2,000 feet per minute, the
pointer appears at the top edge of the non-moving tape and
the rate in fpm appears inside the pointer. If the rate of
descent exceeds 2,000 fpm, a negative sign is displayed in
the pointer (-2,000) for negative (down) vertical speed and
the pointer appears at the bottom edge of the non-moving
tape.
NOTE: Digits appear in the pointer when the
climb or descent rate exceeds 100 fpm.
Vertical
Deviation/Glideslope
Indicator
Vertical Speed
Pointer
Figure 2-18 Marker Beacon and Vertical Deviation
Figure 2-19 Vertical Speed Indicator
2-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a
rotating compass card with letters at the cardinal points
and numeric labels every 30 degrees. Major tick marks
are at 10-degree intervals and minor tick marks are at 5degree intervals. The HSI is displayed in a heading-up
orientation. The HSI is available in two formats (360˚
compass rose and 140˚ arc) and displays the following
information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Heading indication
Turn Rate Indicator
Course Deviation Indicator
Bearing pointers
Bearing Information Windows
Navigation source
14
1
12
2
11
3
10
4
9
8
5
7
6
1
HSI Display Format
2
The HSI compass can be displayed as a 360° rose or a
140° arc by pressing the PFD softkey, followed by the 360
HSI or ARC HSI softkey.
3
360˚ HSI
4
5
6
The 360˚ HSI contains a course deviation indicator
(CDI) with a course pointer arrow, the TO/FROM arrow,
and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer
is a single-line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction
of the set course. The TO/FROM arrow rotates with the
course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID
is received.
13
7
8
Turn Rate Indicator
Lateral Deviation Scale
Navigation Source
Aircraft Symbol
Course Deviation Indicator
Rotating Compass Rose
OBS Mode
TO/FROM Indicator
9
Heading Bug
10 Course Pointer
11
Flight Phase
12 Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector
13 Heading
14 Lubber Line
Figure 2-20 360˚ Horizontal Situation Indicator
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-15
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Heading Indication
Arc HSI
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed the BRG1
and BRG2 Information Windows and pointers are
disabled.
NOTE: If the pilot makes a heading change
greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the
CDI switches to the opposite side of the deviation
scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass
rose. The Arc contains a course pointer arrow, the TO/
FROM indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the TO/
FROM and sliding deviation indicators are one and the
same), and a deviation scale. Upon station passage,
the TO/FROM indicator flips and points to the tail of
the aircraft, just like the conventional TO/FROM flag.
Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc
HSI can appear in two different ways:
• GPS, OBS, VOR – Arrowhead
• Localizer – Diamond
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Course Deviation and
TO/FROM Indicator
Figure 2-21 Arc HSI
2-16
A digital reading of the current magnetic heading
appears on top of the HSI. A rotatable heading bug on the
compass rose marks the desired heading.
Figure 2-22 Current Heading
The selected heading appears in a box left of the lubber
line, next to the HSI. The color of the digital readout is
cyan (light blue).
Figure 2-23 Selected Heading Box
The selected course appears in a box right of the lubber
line, next to the HSI. The color of the digital readout
appears in magenta if the navigation source is GPS, or
green if the navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2.
Figure 2-24 Selected Course Box
NOTE: The heading displayed on the HSI is always
magnetic, even if the NAV ANGLE is set to ‘TRUE’
in the AUX System Setup Page on the MFD.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Turn Rate Indicator
Course Deviation Indicator
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the
rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn
rates. A magenta turn rate trend vector shows the current
turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading
predicted in six seconds, based on the present turn rate.
At rates greater than 4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at
the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is
no longer valid.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves to the left
or right of the course pointer along a deviation scale to
display aircraft position relative to the course.
Half-Standard Turn
Rate Tick Mark
Standard Turn
Rate Tick Mark
Turn Rate
Trend Vector
(rate > 4 deg/sec)
The CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical
CDI when coupled to a VOR or LOC. When coupled
to GPS, the full-scale limits for the CDI are defined by a
GPS-derived distance (5.0, 1.0, or 0.3 nm). The CDI scale
automatically adjusts to the desired limits based on the
current phase of flight (en route: 5.0 nm, terminal area:
1.0 nm, or approach: 0.3 nm). The desired GPS scale
settings may be selected manually on the MFD (refer to
the Multi Function Display section).
Figure 2-25 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
A standard-rate turn (3 deg/sec) is shown on the
indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18
degrees from the current heading.
Turn Rate
Trend Vector
(standard rate)
Figure 2-26 Standard-Rate Turn Indication
Figure 2-27 Course Deviation Indicator
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-17
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Bearing Pointers and Information Windows
Up to two bearing pointers can be displayed on the
HSI. Pressing the PFD softkey provides access to the
BRG1 and BRG2 softkeys. The BRG1 pointer is a single
cyan line with an open arrowhead at the end. The BRG2
pointer is a double cyan line with an open arrowhead at
the end. The bearing pointers never override the CDI.
When at least one bearing pointer is displayed (but not
necessarily visible if there is no data available), a white
ring appears around the center of the compass rose to
visually separate the bearing pointer(s) from the CDI.
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated
information window is also displayed. The Bearing 1
(BRG1) Information Window is displayed to the lower
left of the HSI and includes the bearing source (NAV1 or
GPS), a pointer icon, frequency (NAV1), and distance to
the bearing source. The Bearing 2 (BRG2) Information
Window is displayed to the lower right of the HSI and
includes the bearing source (NAV2 or GPS), a pointer icon,
frequency (NAV2), and distance to the bearing source.
If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint
identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency. If an active
waypoint is not selected, the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the
information window.
DME
Information
Window
Bearing 2
Pointer
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 1
Information
Window
Bearing 2
Information
Window
Figure 2-28 HSI with Bearing Information
Distance to
Bearing Source
Waypoint
Identifier
Bearing
Source
Pointer
Icon
Figure 2-29 BRG1 Information Window
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to
an ILS frequency, the bearing pointer is removed from the
HSI and the frequency is replaced with “ILS”. If the NAV
radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station, the bearing
pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency field
displays “NO DATA”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected
bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is in range.
Distance to
Bearing Source
Waypoint
Identifier
Pointer
Icon
Bearing
Source
Figure 2-30 BRG2 Information Window
2-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
DME Radio (optional)
Radio Tuning Window (optional)
The optional DME radio is a Honeywell KN63 remotemounted, 200-channel, 100-watt, all-solid-state digital
DME which provides distance information to the G1000.
Press the PFD softkey followed by the DME softkey
to display the DME Information Window. The DME
Information Window is displayed above the BRG1
Information Window and displays the DME label, tuning
mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance.
When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by “–.–
– NM”.
NOTE: The Radio Tuning Window is only available
if a DME radio is installed.
The Radio Tuning Window is displayed by pressing the
DME softkey. This window provides display and control
of the DME radio.
The pilot may select from three DME tuning modes:
• NAV1 – Tunes the DME frequency from the
selected NAV1 frequency
• NAV2 – Tunes the DME frequency from the
selected NAV2 frequency
• HOLD – When transitioning from NAV1 or NAV2
mode to Hold mode, the DME frequency remains
set to the last selected NAV frequency.
NOTE: When navigating in GPS mode, the
distance displayed is the GPS-derived great-circle
distance, not the actual DME distance.
Figure 2-31 DME Information Window
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Figure 2-32 Radio Tuning Window
To change the DME mode:
1.
From the Radio Tuning Window, turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the DME mode field.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection window. Turn the FMS knob to select the
desired mode and press the ENT key.
Figure 2-33 DME Selection Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-19
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Navigation Source
To enable/disable OBS mode while navigating
with GPS:
NOTE: OBS is only available with the active flight
plan leg, when navigating under GPS.
The HSI can display two sources of navigation, GPS
or NAV (VOR, localizer, and glideslope). In GPS mode,
the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically. Enabling
OBS mode suspends auto sequencing of waypoints, but
retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the navigation
reference, even after the waypoint is passed. When OBS
is disabled, the GPS returns to normal operation, with
automatic sequencing of waypoints. OBS mode also
allows the pilot to set the desired course TO/FROM a
waypoint.
1.
Press the OBS softkey to select OBS Mode.
2.
Turn the small CRS knob to select the desired
course TO/FROM the waypoint.
3.
Press the OBS softkey again to return to normal
operation.
Color indicates the current navigation source: magenta
(GPS ) or green (VOR and LOC). As the user crosses the
MAP, “SUSP” appears on the HSI in place of OBS and the
OBS softkey now reads “SUSP”, indicating that automatic
sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the
MAP. The following yellow annunciations may appear on
the HSI:
• INTEG – RAIM not available
• WARN – GPS detects position error
To change between navigation sources:
1.
2.
3.
2-20
Press the CDI softkey to change from GPS to
VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV1 standby frequency in the upper
left corner of the PFD.
Press the CDI softkey again to change from
VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places
the cyan tuning box over the NAV2 standby
frequency.
Press the CDI softkey a third time to return to
GPS.
Figure 2-34 GPS INTEG, GPS SUSP, LOC1 and VOR2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.5 COMMUNICATION,
NAVIGATION, & SURVEILLANCE
(CNS)
COMMUNICATION FREQUENCY WINDOW
The Communication (COM) Frequency Window,
located in the upper right corner of the PFD, provides
control and display of dual VHF Radio Communication
Transceivers (COM1 and COM2). The COM Frequency
Window displays the following information:
• COM1 and COM2 active and standby frequencies
• Color-coded indication of the active COM transceiver
Active COM
Frequency Field
Frequency
Tuning Box
Selected COM
Radio
(Green)
COM Radios
Frequency
Toggle Arrow
Standby COM
Frequency Field
Figure 2-35 Communication Frequency Window
NOTE: Operating procedures for the COM
Frequency Window are located in the NAV/COM
section.
NAVIGATION FREQUENCY WINDOW
The Navigation (NAV) Frequency Window, located in
the upper left corner of the PFD, provides control and
display of dual VOR/ILS receivers (NAV1 and NAV2).
The NAV Frequency Window displays the following
information:
• NAV1 and NAV2 active and standby frequencies
• NAV1 and NAV2 identifier, if the active NAV1 or
NAV2 frequency is a valid, identified frequency
• Color-coded indication of the active NAV receiver
Frequency
Tuning Box
Active NAV
Frequency Field
Selected NAV
Receiver
(Green)
NAV Receivers
Standby NAV
Frequency Field
Frequency
Toggle Arrow
Figure 2-36 Navigation Frequency Window
NOTE: Operating procedures for the NAV Frequency
Window are located in the NAV/COM section.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-21
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
NAVIGATION STATUS BAR
TRANSPONDER (XPDR) STATUS BAR
The Navigation Status Bar is located at the top of the
PFD and displays valuable information while flying a
route:
•
•
•
•
•
The next waypoint in the active flight plan
Distance to the next waypoint (DIS)
Desired track to the next waypoint (DTK)
Current track angle (TRK)
GPS Navigation Annunciations
NOTE: The fields in the PFD Navigation Status
Bar cannot be changed.
Next Waypoint
Distance to
Next Waypoint
Desired Track
To
Next Waypoint
Current Track
Figure 2-37 Navigation Status Bar Information Examples
NOTE: Refer to the Transponder section for
information regarding transponder operation.
The Transponder (XPDR) Status Bar is located in the
lower right corner and displays the transponder code,
reply symbol, and mode of operation.
Figure 2-39 Transponder Status Bar
Transponder code selection is performed with eight
softkeys (0-7) providing 4,096 active identification codes.
Pressing one of these softkeys begins the code selection
sequence. The new code is activated five seconds after
the fourth digit is entered. The BKSP softkey removes
one digit at a time until the status bar is empty. The
VFR softkey can be used to enter the pre-programmed
VFR code (1200 in the USA only) selected in G1000
configuration mode.
NOTE: Refer to ICAO standards for VFR codes in
other countries.
Pressing the IDENT softkey activates the Special
Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds,
identifying the transponder return on the ATC screen.
Figure 2-38 Navigation Status Bar Messages
2-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.6 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE BOX
The outside air temperature (OAT) is displayed in
°C. On the MFD AUX System Setup Page, OAT can be
configured to be displayed in °F instead of °C (refer to the
Multi Function Display section).
Figure 2-40 Outside Air Temperature Box
SYSTEM TIME BOX
The System Time Box displays the local time. Time and
date is obtained from the satellites and cannot be changed.
The pilot may select the desired time format and offset.
There are three time formats available: Local 12 hr, Local
24 hr, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). The Time
Offset (Time Zone) represents the number of hours plus or
minus UTC (refer to the Multi Function Display section).
Figure 2-41 System Time Box
190-00629-00 Rev. B
INSET MAP
NOTE: The Inset Map orientation is always
the same as that for the MFD Navigation Map
Page.
NOTE: Map orientation and other map features
are enabled on the MFD (refer to the Multi
Function Display section).
NOTE: Refer to the Multi Function Display
section for a detailed explanation of the declutter
levels.
The Inset Map is a smaller version of the MFD
Navigation Map Page. It appears in the lower left corner
of the PFD and is displayed by pressing the INSET softkey.
The map disappears from the PFD when pitch exceeds
+30° or –20° or when a 65° bank angle is reached. The
direct-to function is not available from the Inset Map. The
fuel reserve rings are enabled and disabled from the MFD
only. The Inset Map displays the following information:
• Moving map with orientation references
– North Up
– Track Up
– DTK Up
– HDG Up
• Zoom range legend
• Declutter levels (3)
• Aircraft icon
• Traffic data
• Topographic data
• Terrain data
• Weather information (optional)
• Enabled map features
• Active navigation route
• Track vector
• Fuel ring (reserve)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-23
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
The following Inset Map operations can be performed
independently of the MFD:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change zoom range
Change declutter level
Enable/disable traffic data
Enable/disable topographic data
Enable/disable terrain data
Enable/disable weather information (optional)
Pan map
1
10
2
9
3
8
4
7
5
6
1
Wind Vector
2
NAV Compass Range
3
Track Vector
4
5
Active Navigation Route
Traffic Icon and Scale
6
Map Scale
7
Lightning Icon (optional)
8
Terrain Icon
9
NAV Compass
10
Map Orientation
To change the zoom range:
Turn the joystick clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the range. Zoom
ranges from 500 feet to 2,000 nautical miles.
To change the declutter level:
1. Press the INSET softkey.
2.
Press the DCLTR softkey to remove background
map details until the desired amount of detail
is depicted. The declutter level appears above
the softkey (e.g., DCLTR-1). Refer to the Multi
Function Display section for more details.
To enable/disable traffic data:
1. Press the INSET softkey.
2. Press the TRAFFIC softkey to display Traffic
Information Service (TIS) or Traffic Advisory
System (TAS) traffic. Traffic symbology appears
next to the aircraft icon and in the bottom right
corner of the map.
2. Press the TRAFFIC softkey again to remove data
from the map.
NOTE: TIS displays traffic within seven nautical
miles from 3,000 feet below to 3,500 feet
above the requesting aircraft, and includes
location, direction, altitude, and climb/descent
information.
NOTE: Refer to the Multi Function Display section
for more details about Traffic Advisory System
(TAS).
Figure 2-42 Inset Map
2-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
To enable/disable topographic data:
1. Press the INSET softkey.
2. Press the TOPO softkey to display topographic
land colors, which represent land elevation.
3. Press the TOPO softkey again to remove topographic data from the map.
NOTE: When topographic data is removed from
the display, all cartographic data is automatically
removed and the Jeppesen Nav Data is presented
on a black background.
To enable/disable terrain data:
1. Press the INSET softkey.
2. Press the TERRAIN softkey to display color-coded
terrain tiles, which are based upon the aircraft
current altitude. A mountain icon appears above
the zoom range in the lower right corner of the
map, showing that terrain is selected.
• Red (warning) – Land elevation is within 100
ft or above the aircraft current altitude.
• Yellow (caution) – Land elevation is greater
than 100 ft to 1,000 ft below aircraft altitude.
• Black – Land elevation greater than 1,000 ft
below aircraft altitude.
3. Press the TERRAIN softkey again to remove the
terrain data from the map.
NOTE: Refer to the Optional Equipment section
for more details about weather options.
To enable/disable Stormscope (optional),
NEXRAD (optional), or XM lightning
(optional) data:
1. Press the INSET softkey.
2. Press the STRMSCP (optional), NEXRAD
(optional), or XM LTNG (optional) softkey to
display weather information.
3. Press the STRMSCP, NEXRAD, or XM LTNG
softkey again to remove the weather information from the map.
To pan the map:
NOTE: The joystick on the PFD operates
independently from the one on the MFD.
1.
2.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the
aircraft latitude is greater than 75˚ N or 60˚ S.
3.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendix for more details
about terrain.
Push in the joystick to display the panning pointer.
This allows the pilot to move the map beyond its
current limits without adjusting the range.
Push in and move the joystick to pan the map
in the general direction of the desired location.
When the pointer is placed on an object, the name
of the object is highlighted for approximately four
seconds (even if the name was not originally
displayed on the map). This feature applies to
everything displayed on the map except for route
lines.
Push in the joystick again to cancel the panning
function and return to the present position on
the map.
NOTE: The airspace boundary stays highlighted
for approximately four seconds before returning
to normal shading.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-25
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
AUXILIARY WINDOW KEYS
The main keys which are used in association with PFD
Auxiliary Window operations are listed below:
1
DIRECT-TO – Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination
waypoint and establishes a direct course to the
selected destination (specified by identifier chosen
from the active route)
2
FPL – Displays the active Flight Plan Page
for creating and editing the active flight plan or
accessing stored flight plans
3
CLR – Erases information, cancels an entry, or
removes page menus
4
MENU – Displays a context-sensitive list of
options
This option list allows the user to access additional features or make setting changes which
relate to certain pages.
5
PROC – Selects approaches, departures and
arrivals for the flight plan.
When using a flight plan, available procedures
for departure and/or arrival airport are offered
automatically. If a flight plan is not used, the
desired airport, then the desired procedure may
be selected. This key selects IFR departure
procedures (SIDs), arrival procedures (STARs) and
approaches (SIAPs) from the database and loads
them into the active flight plan.
6
ENT – Accepts a menu selection or data entry
This key is used to approve an operation or
complete data entry. It is also used to confirm
information.
The MENU key opens the PFD Setup Menu if no
Auxiliary Window is open.
1
4
2
5
3
6
Figure 2-43 PFD Auxiliary Window Keys
2-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
WORKING WITH MENUS
AUXILIARY WINDOWS
NOTE: Pressing a softkey does not display a menu
or sub-menu.
Much G1000 operation is accomplished using a menu
interface. The G1000 has a bezel-mounted dedicated
MENU key that displays a context-sensitive list of options
when pressed. This option list allows the pilot to access
additional features or make setting changes specifically
relating to the currently displayed window. There is no
all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional sub-menus that are in turn used to view, edit,
select, and review options.
No Options
with NRST
Window
Displayed
The lower right area of the PFD is a shared area that at
any one time can present the following windows:
•
•
•
•
•
TIMER/REFERENCES
NEAREST
DIRECT-TO
FLIGHT PLAN
PROCEDURES
Timer/References Window
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM)
for limitations.
The Timer/References Window is enabled/disabled by
pressing the TMR/REF softkey. The Generic Timer and
Vspeed references are set using this window.
Options with
FPL Window
Displayed
Figure 2-45 Timer/References Window
Figure 2-44 Page Menu Examples
To navigate the Page Menu Window:
1.
Turn the FMS knob to scroll through a list of
available options (a scroll bar always appears
to the right of the window when the option
list is longer than the window).
2.
Press the ENT key to select the desired
option.
3.
The CLR key or the FMS knob may be pressed to
remove the menu and cancel the operation.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
The following Vspeeds and Vspeed bugs can be set
using the Timer/References Window:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Best glide speed reference
Best glide speed bug (ON, OFF)
Best angle-of-climb speed reference (VX)
VX bug (ON, OFF)
Best rate-of-climb speed reference (VY)
VY bug (ON, OFF)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-27
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Generic Timer
The Generic Timer displays time (hr:min:sec), timer
count direction (UP or DOWN), and timer status (START,
STOP, or RESET).
To change the Generic Timer:
Flight ID
Automatic reporting of aircraft identification (ID) is
transmitted by the transponder to the ground stations and
other aircraft.
The flight ID is set to fixed (“SAME AS TAIL” and
“CONFIG ENTRY”), or variable (“PFD ENTRY”) at the time
of installation. The two fixed selections do not require
any action from the pilot. The variable (“PFD ENTRY”)
flight ID requires the pilot to enter the flight ID on the
Timer/References Window each time the G1000 is powered
on.
1.
Press the TMR/REF softkey, then turn the large
FMS knob to select the time field (hr:min:
sec).
2.
Turn the FMS knobs to set the desired time,
then press the ENT key. The UP/DOWN field is
now highlighted.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the UP/
DOWN window.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select ‘UP’ or ‘DOWN’,
then press the ENT key. ‘START?’ is now highlighted.
5.
Press the ENT key to START, STOP, or RESET the
timer (if the timer is counting DOWN, it must
be reset manually).
1.
Press the CLR key or the TMR/REF softkey to
remove the window.
Press the TMR/REF softkey, then turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the flight ID field.
2.
Turn the FMS knobs to enter the desired flight
ID. Press the ENT key to update the flight ID.
6.
NOTE: If the G1000 is set to variable (“PFD
ENTRY”) and the flight ID entry field on the Timer/
References window is not visible, the pilot should
contact a Garmin-authorized Service Center.
To enter or change the Flight ID:
Figure 3-47 Flight ID Field
Figure 2-46 Timer Status Prompts
2-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Vspeeds and Vspeed Bug Status
NOTE: Default settings are automatically restored
when power is cycled.
Vspeed values for the aircraft can be found in the
Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM). The Vspeeds can be
changed and the Vspeed bugs can be turned ON or OFF.
To change Vspeeds and turn the Vspeed
bug ON or OFF:
1. Press the TMR/REF softkey, then turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the field of the Vspeed
to be changed.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
speed and press the ENT key (when a speed has
been changed, an asterisk appears next to the
speed). The ON/OFF field is now highlighted.
3. To change each setting individually, turn the
small FMS knob in the direction of the green
arrowhead.
4.
All Vspeed bugs can be simultaneously turned
OFF/ON by pressing the MENU key and selecting ‘All References ON’ or ‘All References OFF’,
then pressing the ENT key.
To restore all defaults:
1. From the Timer/References Window, press the
MENU key.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Restore
Defaults’ and press the ENT key.
3. Press the TMR/REF softkey to remove the window.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Nearest Airports Window
Pressing the NRST softkey enables/disables the Nearest
Airports Window. From the Nearest Airports Window,
information for a selected airport can be viewed, the active
primary communications frequency can be selected, and
direct-to navigation can be activated.
The Nearest Airports Window displays the 25 nearest
airports with the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Identifier
Airport Symbol
Bearing to
Distance from
Best approach available
Primary communications frequency
Length of longest hard surface runway (or soft
surface, if no hard surface runway exists)
Airport Symbol
Identifier
Primary
COM
Frequency
Best
Approach
Available
Distance
Runway
Length
Bearing
To
Figure 2-48 Nearest Airports Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-29
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
To view information about an airport:
1. Press the NRST softkey to display a list of the
Nearest Airports.
2. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired airport
and press the ENT key. The airport information
is displayed with ‘BACK’ highlighted at the
bottom of the window.
3. When finished viewing the airport information, press the ENT key to return to the nearest
airports list.
Figure 2-49 Airport Information Window
To activate a Direct-to from the Nearest
Airports Window:
1. From the Nearest Airports Window, turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the desired airport,
then press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to
Window appears.
2.
Press the ENT key twice to activate.
To activate a Direct-to from the Airport
Information Window:
1. From the Airport Information Window, press
the Direct-to key.
2. Press the ENT key twice to activate.
To select a COM frequency:
From the Nearest Airports Window, turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the desired frequency, then press the ENT key. The frequency
is tuned in the standby COM frequency field
selected by the tuning box.
To select an airport by the airport identifier,
location, and name fields from the Airport
Information Window:
1. From the Nearest Airport Window, turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the desired field.
2. Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired location, then press the ENT key.
3.
2-30
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘BACK’,
then press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Direct-to Window
NOTE: When entering an all-letter/alphabetical
airport identifier (only in the USA), the pilot must
precede it with the letter “K” (e.g., KMCI). If the
airport identifier is alpha-numeric, simply enter
the three-digit identifier (e.g., 51K). The full ICAO
identifier must be entered for all waypoints.
The Direct-to Window is enabled/disabled by pressing
the Direct-to key.
To select a Direct-to by identifier:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the FMS knobs
to select the desired waypoint identifier. Press
the ENT key to confirm the selection.
Figure 2-50 Direct-to Window
The currently selected waypoint displays the following
information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Identifier
Waypoint symbol
Waypoint location
Facility name
Flight plan waypoint list
Nearest waypoint List
Bearing to waypoint
Distance from waypoint
Latitude/longitude
Course to selected waypoint
• By specifying the identifier, waypoint location or
facility name
• From a list of waypoints in the active flight plan
• From a list of the 25 nearest airports
Press the ENT key again to activate the direct-to.
To select a Direct-to by city or facility name:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the large FMS
knob to highlight the city field (to the right of
the identifier) or facility field (directly below
the identifier) field.
2. Turn the FMS knobs to enter the city (to the
right of the identifier field), or the facility
(directly below the identifier field). Once the
desired city or facility name is displayed, press
the ENT key to confirm the selection.
3.
Direct-to Navigation
Selection of a waypoint for Direct-to navigation may be
done in the following ways:
190-00629-00 Rev. B
2.
Press the ENT key again to activate the direct-to.
To select a Direct-to from a list of
waypoints in an active flight plan:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the large FMS
knob to highlight the FPL field.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to display a selection
window showing all waypoints in the active
flight plan.
3. Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list and
highlight the desired waypoint, then press the
ENT key.
4. Press the ENT key again to activate the direct-to.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-31
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
To select a Direct-to from the Nearest Airports list:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the large FMS
knob to highlight the NRST field.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to display a selection
window showing the 25 nearest airports.
3. Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list
and highlight the desired airport, then press
the ENT key.
4.
Press the ENT key again to activate the direct-to.
To select a specific course to a waypoint:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the FMS knobs
to select the desired destination waypoint, then
press the ENT key.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘CRS’
field. Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired
course and press the ENT key.
3.
Press the ENT key to activate the direct-to using
the selected course to the destination.
To cancel a Direct-to:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then press the MENU
key to display the Direct-to Options menu.
2. Press the ENT key to cancel direct-to navigation.
If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
Figure 2-51 Cancel Direct-To NAV
2-32
Flight Plan Window
NOTE: COM frequency and stored flight plans
cannot be loaded from the PFD Flight Plan
Window.
The Flight Plan Window is enabled and disabled by
pressing the FPL key.
Flight plans can be created, edited and activated from
the PFD. The G1000 allows for the creation up to 99 flight
plans, with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan.
The Flight Plan Window on the PFD displays the
following information:
•
•
•
•
•
Flight plan title
Indication of active leg (magenta line and arrow)
Flight plan waypoint, including airport identifiers
Leg distance
Leg desired track
The following options are available for the Flight Plan
Window:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Create New Flight Plan
Activate Leg
Store Flight Plan
Invert Flight Plan
Delete Flight Plan
Load Departure
Load Arrival
Load Approach
Remove Departure
Remove Arrival
Remove Approach
Closest Point of FPL
Change Fields
Restore Defaults
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Activate Leg
Activate leg selects the highlighted leg as the “active leg”
(the flight plan leg which is currently used for navigation
guidance).
To activate a flight plan along a specific
leg:
Figure 2-52 Flight Plan Window
1.
From the active Flight Plan Window, press the
FMS knob to activate the cursor, and turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the desired destination waypoint.
2.
Press the MENU key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’ and
press the ENT key. A confirmation window is
displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted. Press
the ENT key.
Create New Flight Plan
NOTE: An ‘active’ flight plan is created as soon as
the first two waypoints are entered on the Active
Flight Plan Page.
New flight plans can be created on the PFD and MFD.
The system can store up to 99 flight plans with up to 31
waypoints in each flight plan.
To create a new flight plan:
1.
2.
3.
4.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Press the FPL key, then press the FMS knob to
activate the cursor. The waypoint field is now
highlighted.
Turn the small FMS knob to activate the
Waypoint Information Window.
Turn the FMS knobs to enter the identifier of
the airport/waypoint and press the ENT key.
The system returns to the Flight Plan Window,
with the cursor flashing on the next waypoint
field.
Repeat step 3 above to enter the identifier for
each additional waypoint.
Figure 2-53 Activate Leg Confirmation Window
Store Flight Plan
NOTE: The active flight plan is erased when the
unit is turned off and when another flight plan
is activated.
When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from
the current database to define the waypoints. If the
navigation database is changed or updated, the G1000
automatically updates the information if the procedure has
not been modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival
procedure is no longer available, the flight plan becomes
locked until the procedure is deleted from the flight plan
or until the correct navigation database is installed.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-33
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
To store a flight plan:
1. From the Flight Plan Window, once all of the
waypoints have been entered, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to select ‘Store Flight Plan’,
then press the ENT key. The Store Flight Plan
Window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted.
3. Press the ENT key to store the flight plan.
4. To cancel, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
Delete Flight Plan
The entire flight plan or selected waypoints within the
flight plan may be deleted.
To delete the entire flight plan:
1. From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight
Plan’, then press the ENT key. The ‘Delete All
Waypoints in Flight Plan’ message is displayed
with ‘OK’ highlighted.
3. Press the ENT key to delete all waypoints in the
flight plan.
4.
Figure 2-54 Page Options Menu
Invert Flight Plan
The Invert Flight Plan option reverses the active flight
plan. After traveling along a flight plan, the pilot may
wish to reverse the route for navigation back to the original
departure point.
To activate an existing flight plan in
reverse:
1.
From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Invert Flight
Plan’, then press the ENT key. The flight plan
is now reversed and activated.
To cancel, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
To delete selected waypoints in the flight
plan:
1. From the Flight Plan Window, turn the large
FMS knob to select the desired waypoint.
2. Press the CLR key. The ‘Remove Waypoint
Name’ Window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted. Press the ENT key to delete the
selected waypoint.
3. To cancel, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
Figure 2-56 Delete Flight Plan Confirmation Window
Figure 2-55 Invert Flight Plan Confirmation Window
2-34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Load Departure
Load departure allows the pilot to select a published
standard instrument departure (SID) for the departure
airport or replace the current departure with a new
selection. When using a direct-to, the G1000 uses the
nearest airport as a reference for displaying available
departures.
Figure 2-58 Departure Runway
NOTE: The PROC key can also be used to load a
departure, an approach, or an arrival.
To select a departure for the departure
airport:
1. From the Flight Plan Window , press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available departures for the
departure airport.
NOTE: The runway window is not displayed for
every departure. ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway
field, indicating that the departure procedure
applies to all runways. For airports with parallel
runways, ‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway
designation to indicate that the departure
procedure applies to both runways.
5.
Figure 2-59 Departure Transition
Figure 2-57 Departure
3.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired departure, then press the ENT key.
A window may appear listing runways for the
departure. Turn the FMS knob to select the
desired runway, then press the ENT key. The
transition window is now displayed.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition waypoint, then press the ENT key.
6.
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
Figure 2-60 Select Departure Window
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-35
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Load Arrival
Load Approach
Load Arrival allows the pilot to select a published
standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination
airport or replace a current arrival with a new selection.
Load Approach allows the pilot to select a published
instrument approach for the destination airport, or replace
the current approach with a new selection.
NOTE: The PROC key can also be used to load a
departure, an approach, or an arrival.
To select an approach for a direct-to or
flight plan destination airport:
1. From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Load Approach’,
then press the ENT key. A window appears listing the available approaches for the destination airport.
3. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
approach, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available transitions for the
approach.
4. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition or vectors, then press the ENT key.
NOTE: When adding an arrival to an active flight
plan, the pilot may need to remove a duplicate
destination waypoint from the flight plan list.
To select an arrival for a direct-to or flight
plan destination airport:
1. From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’,
then press the ENT key. A window appears
listing the available arrivals for the destination
airport.
3. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired arrival,
then press the ENT key. A window appears
listing available transitions for the arrival.
4. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition waypoint, then press the ENT key.
5. A window may appear listing runways for the
arrival. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
runway, then press the ENT key.
NOTE: The runway window is not displayed for
every arrival. ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway
field, indicating that the arrival procedure
applies to all runways. For airports with parallel
runways, ‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway
designation to indicate that the arrival procedure
applies to both runways.
6.
2-36
NOTE: The ‘Vectors’ option assumes that the pilot
will receive vectors from ATC to the final course
segment of the approach.
5.
6.
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key
to load the approach.
To activate the approach, turn the large FMS
knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’, then press the
ENT key.
NOTE: ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight
plan without immediately using the approach
for navigation guidance. This allows the pilot to
continue navigating the original flight plan until
cleared for the approach, but keeps the approach
available for quick activation when needed.
‘ACTIVATE’ adds the approach to the flight plan
and begins navigating the approach course.
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Remove Departure, Arrival, or Approach
Remove Departure, Arrival, or Approach deletes the
current standard instrument departure (SID), terminal
arrival route (STAR), or selected approach from the active
flight plan.
To remove a departure, an arrival, or an
approach from a direct-to or active flight
plan:
1.
From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Remove Departure’, ‘Remove Arrival’, or ‘Remove Approach’,
then press the ENT key. A confirmation window
appears listing the procedure that is about to
be removed, with ‘OK’ highlighted.
3.
Press the ENT key to remove the procedure.
4.
To cancel, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’, then press the ENT key.
Closest Point of FPL
Closest Point of FPL calculates the bearing and closest
distance at which a flight plan passes from a reference
waypoint. It may also be used to create a new user
waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a
chosen reference waypoint.
To determine the closest point along the
active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1.
From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Closest Point
of FPL’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears with the reference waypoint field
highlighted.
3.
Turn the FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the
reference waypoint, then press the ENT key. The
G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and distance
(DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan
from the selected reference waypoint.
4.
To create a user waypoint at this location and
add it to the flight plan, press the ENT key. The
name for the new user waypoint is derived from
the identifier or the reference waypoint.
Change Fields
Change Fields allows the pilot to select the desired
data items to be displayed on the Flight Plan Window.
The user-selectable data fields can be changed to display
the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cumulative Distance (CUM)
Distance (DIS)
Desired Track (DTK)
En route Safe Altitude (ESA)
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Estimated Time En route (ETE)
Figure 2-61 Closest Point of FPL Window
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-37
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Procedures Window
The Procedures Window is enabled/disabled by
pressing the PROC key. The following options are
available from the Procedures Window:
Figure 2-62 Change Fields on Flight Plan
To change a data field on the Flight Plan
Window:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Change Fields’,
then press the ENT key. The cursor flashes on
one of the data fields.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the desired
field to be changed.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
with optional data items.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired data
item, then press the ENT key.
Press the small FMS knob to remove the
cursor.
Restore Defaults
Restore Defaults restores all data fields to the factory
default settings.
To restore factory default settings for data
fields on the Flight Plan Window:
2-38
1.
From the Flight Plan Window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Restore
Defaults’, then press the ENT key.
•
•
•
•
•
Activate Vector-To-Final
Activate Approach
Select Approach
Select Arrival
Select Departure
Figure 2-63 Procedures Window
Select Approach
Select Approach allows the pilot to choose a published
instrument approach for the destination airport or replace
the current approach with a new selection.
To select an approach for a direct-to or
flight plan destination airport:
1.
From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Select
Approach’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available approaches for
the destination airport.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Figure 2-64 Approach
3.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
approach, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available transitions for the
approach.
5.
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key
to load the approach.
6.
To activate the approach, turn the large FMS
knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’, then press the
ENT key.
NOTE: ‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight
plan without immediately using the approach
for navigation guidance. This allows the pilot to
continue navigating the original flight plan until
cleared for the approach, but keeps the approach
available for quick activation when needed.
‘ACTIVATE’ adds the approach to the flight plan
and begins navigating the approach course.
Select Arrival
Select Arrival allows the pilot to choose a published
standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination
airport, or replace a current arrival with a new selection.
Figure 2-65 Approach Transition
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition or vectors, then press the ENT key.
NOTE: The ‘Vectors’ option assumes that the pilot
will receive vectors from ATC to the final course
segment of the approach.
To select an arrival for a direct-to or flight
plan destination airport:
1. From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Select
Arrival’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available arrivals for the
destination airport.
Figure 2-67 Arrival
Figure 2-66 Select Approach Window
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-39
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
3.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired arrival,
then press the ENT key. A window appears
listing the available transitions for the arrival.
NOTE: When adding an arrival to an active flight
plan, the pilot may need to remove a duplicate
destination waypoint from the flight plan list.
Figure 2-68 Arrival Transition
4.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition, then press the ENT key.
A window may appear listing runways for the
arrival. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
runway, then press the ENT key.
NOTE: The runway window is not displayed for
every arrival. ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway
field, indicating that the arrival procedure
applies to all runways. For airports with parallel
runways, ‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway
designation to indicate that the arrival procedure
applies to both runways.
Figure 2-69 Arrival Runway
6.
2-40
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
Figure 2-70 Select Arrival Window
Select Departure
Select Departure allows the pilot to choose a published
standard instrument departure (SID) for the departure
airport, or replace the current departure with a new
selection. When using a direct-to, the G1000 uses the
nearest airport as a reference when displaying available
departures.
To select a departure for the departure
airport:
1.
From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Select
Departure’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available departures for the
departure airport.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired departure, then press the ENT key.
4.
A window may appear listing runways for the
departure. Turn the FMS knob to select the
desired runway, then press the ENT key. The
transition window is now displayed.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Activate Vector-To-Final
NOTE: The runway window is not displayed for
every departure. ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway
field, indicating that the departure procedure
applies to all runways. For airports with parallel
runways, ‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway
designation to indicate that the departure
procedure applies to both runways.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition, then press the ENT key.
6.
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
Activate Approach
Activate Vector-To-Final allows the pilot to activate the
final course segment of the approach. This option assumes
that the pilot will receive vectors to the final approach fix
(FAF) and provides guidance to intercept the final course,
before reaching the FAF.
To activate the approach with vectors to
final:
1.
From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Activate VectorTo-Final’, then press the ENT key.
Activate Approach allows the pilot to activate the
approach when ready to begin navigating the approach
course (cleared for the approach).
To activate the approach for a direct-to or
flight plan destination airport:
1.
From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Activate
Approach’, then press the ENT key.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-41
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.7 REVERSIONARY MODE
NOTE: Refer to the System Overview for a
detailed description of Reversionary mode.
The PFD is designed to enter reversionary (backup)
mode based on automatic fault monitoring and detection,
internal switching. Reversionary mode can also be
activated manually by pressing the dedicated DISPLAY
BACKUP button at the bottom of the Audio Panel (refer
to the Audio Panel section).
In reversionary mode, the computer display units
(CDUs) are re-configured to present the PFD symbology
together with the engine parameters (engine parameters are
incorporated on the left side of the display). Reversionary
PFD parameters are presented in the same format as prior
to re-configuration. In the event of a display failure, the
pilot loses one NAV, one COM, and GPS:
• PFD failure – NAV1, COM1 and GPS1 are lost
• MFD failure – NAV2, COM2 and GPS2 are lost
Figure 2-71 PFD Reversionary Mode
2-42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.8 ALERTS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations
and alerts, refer to the Annunciations and Alerts
section.
Annunciation
Window
Alerts Window
Figure 2-72 G1000 Alerting System
Alerts Softkey
Annunciation
ANNUNCIATION WINDOW
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of
the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text. Text color is based on alert level. New
messages, regardless of priority, are displayed at the top of
the Annunciation Window, separated by a white line from
acknowledged messages. Once acknowledged, they are
sequenced based on priority.
SOFTKEY ANNUNCIATIONS
The ALERTS softkey label changes to display the
appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert
sounds until acknowledged by depressing the softkey.
The softkey then reverts to the ALERTS label and, when
pressed again, displays a description of the annunciation
in the Alerts Window.
ALERTS WINDOW
The Alerts Window appears in the lower right corner
of the PFD when a warning, caution, or advisory alert
message occurs. This window allows system alert messages
to be displayed simultaneously. The FMS knobs can be
used to scroll through the alerts. Pressing the ALERTS
softkey enables/disables the Alerts Window.
Alert messages are provided to make the pilot aware
of G1000 system problems or status and may not require
pilot action. An alert message is accompanied by a
flashing white ALERTS softkey label to alert the pilot.
Pressing the ALERTS softkey acknowledges the presence
of an alert and opens the Alerts Window.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Figure 2-73 Alerts Softkey Annunciations
Warnings are time-critical and require immediate pilot
attention. A flashing “WARNING” softkey annunciation
and an aural tone (single chime every two seconds) are
used to alert the pilot of any warnings. The aural tone
and flashing “WARNING” annunciator continue until
acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing the WARNING
softkey).
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
2-43
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
Caution indicates the existence of abnormal conditions
on the aircraft that may require pilot intervention. A
flashing “CAUTION” softkey annunciation and a single
aural tone (one chime) are used to alert the pilot of any
cautions. The flashing “CAUTION” annunciator continues
to flash until acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing the
CAUTION softkey).
An advisory provides general information to the
pilot that may not need immediate attention. A flashing
“ADVISORY” softkey annunciation (no aural tone) is
used to alert the pilot of any message advisories. The
flashing “ADVISORY” annunciator continues to flash until
acknowledged by the pilot (by pressing the ADVISORY
softkey).
TERRAIN AWARENESS AND WARNING
SYSTEM (TAWS) ALERT
ANNUNCIATIONS (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: Refer to the Annunciations & Alerts and
Multi Function Display sections for detailed
TAWS discussions.
The following alert annunciations appear on the PFD
(to the top right of the Altimeter; see Figure 2-1) and
MFD:
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: Refer to the Appendix for detailed
information on the Traffic Information Service
(TIS).
NOTE: Refer to the Multi Function Display section
for detailed information on the Traffic Advisory
System (TAS).
The G1000 system displays Traffic Information
Service (TIS) or Traffic Advisory System (TAS) traffic on
the PFD Inset Map and the MFD Navigation Map Page.
When a Traffic Advisory (TA) is detected, the following
automatically occurs:
• The Inset Map is enabled and displays the traffic
• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is generated
• A flashing black-on-yellow “TRAFFIC” annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator (see Figure 2-2) for five seconds and remains
displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
NOTE: If a second TA appears or if the TAs
displayed decrease and then increase, new aural
and visual alerts are generated.
Figure 2-75 Traffic Annunciation
Figure 2-74 TAWS Annunciations
2-44
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
NAV/COM
SECTION 3 NAV/COM
NAV/COM
3.1 NAV/COM DESCRIPTION
The NAV/COM frequency controls and windows are
located in the top corners of the Primary Flight Display
(PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD). The NAV
controls and NAV frequency window are located on the
left side, the COM controls and COM frequency window
are on the right. The DME Tuning window is located in
the lower right corner on the PFD, as shown in the figure
below.
NAV
Controls
NAV Frequency Window
The NAV/COM interface includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windows and fields
Radio selection
Tuning boxes
Frequency Transfer Arrows
Radio status indications
Controls
COM Frequency Window
Figure 3-1 G1000 NAV/COM Interface (PFD)
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
COM
Controls
DME Tuning Window
3-1
NAV/COM
WINDOWS AND FIELDS
RADIO SELECTION
The NAV and COM Frequency windows are located
at the top of the display on either side of the Navigation
Status bar on both the PFD and the MFD.
Frequencies in the active window are displayed in
either green or white.
• The NAV Frequency window is displayed to the left
of the Navigation Status bar.
• The COM Frequency window is displayed to the
right of the Navigation Status bar.
Each radio frequency window is composed of two
fields, a standby field and an active field.
• In the NAV Frequency window, the active frequency
is on the right side, the standby frequency is on the
left.
• In the COM Frequency window, the active frequency
is on the left side, the standby frequency is on the
right.
• An active COM frequency is displayed in green
indicating that the COM radio is selected on the
audio panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC keys).
White numbers indicate that the radio is not
selected.
• An active NAV frequency is displayed in green
indicating the NAV radio is selected for navigation
on the HSI. NAV radio selection is made with the
PFD CDI softkey.
• NAV1 selected: a single green arrow with ‘VOR1’ or
‘LOC1’ displayed on the HSI.
• NAV2 selected: a double green arrow with ‘VOR2’
or ‘LOC2’ displayed on the HSI.
• Both active NAV frequencies displayed in white
indicate that GPS is in use.
Standby NAV
Frequency Field
Tuning Box
3-2
Selected NAV
Radio
Active NAV
Frequency Field
Navigation Status Bar
Selected COM
Radio
Figure 3-2 Frequency Fields
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
Active COM
Frequency Field
Standby COM
Frequency Field
Tuning Box
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NAV/COM
CONTROLS
The COM controls:
The NAV Frequency window is controlled by knobs
and keys on the left, the COM Frequency window by
knobs and keys on the right.
• VOL/PUSH SQ knob
– Turn to adjust the COM radio volume.
– Press to turn automatic squelch ON and OFF.
The NAV controls:
• VOL/PUSH ID knob
– Turn to adjust the NAV radio volume level.
– Press to turn the Morse code ID ON and OFF.
• Frequency Transfer key
– Press to transfer the NAV frequencies between
the active and standby fields.
• Dual NAV tuning knob
– Turn to tune a NAV frequency in the NAV
tuning box (large knob for MHz; small knob
for kHz).
– Press to transfer the NAV tuning box between
the NAV1 and NAV2 radios.
• Frequency Transfer key
– Press to transfer the COM frequencies between
the active and standby fields.
– Press and hold for two seconds to tune the
emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) in the
active COM field.
• Dual COM tuning knob
– Turn to tune a COM frequency in the COM
tuning box (large knob for MHz; small knob
for kHz).
– Press to transfer the COM tuning box between
the COM1 and COM2 radios.
NAV Controls
COM Controls
VOL/PUSH
ID Knob
VOL/PUSH
SQ Knob
Frequency Transfer Keys
Dual NAV
Knob
Dual COM
Knob
• Turn to tune desired
frequencies.
• Press to change tuning box
positions.
Figure 3-3 NAV/COM Controls
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
3-3
NAV/COM
TUNING BOX
A light blue tuning box is displayed around the radio
standby frequency window, on both the PFD and MFD.
Pressing the small COM or NAV knob transfers the tuning
box back and forth between the two windows.
Frequencies located in the standby window are
displayed in either white or gray.
Pushing the small COM knob switches the
tuning box from one COM radio to the other.
Figure 3-5 Switching COM Radios
• The standby frequency appearing in the tuning box
is white.
• The other standby frequency is gray.
Pushing the small NAV knob switches the
tuning box from one NAV radio to the other.
Figure 3-6 Switching NAV Radios
Frequency Transfer Arrow
Tuning Box
Figure 3-4 Frequency Transfer Arrow and Tuning Box
MANUALLY TUNING A FREQUENCY
SWITCHING BETWEEN RADIOS
Pressing the small COM or NAV knob transfers the
tuning box between the radio frequency windows.
When a different COM transceiver is selected on the
audio panel, the COM frequency tuning box highlights
the frequency on both the PFD and MFD.
When a different NAV radio is selected on the HSI, the
NAV frequency tuning box highlights the frequency on
the PFD and MFD. The NAV frequency tuning box does
not change when GPS mode is selected.
3-4
The dual COM and dual NAV frequency knobs are
used for manual COM and NAV radio tuning. The
frequencies are tuned in the standby field.
• The MHz frequency digits are tuned with the large
COM and NAV knobs.
• The kHz frequency digits are tuned with the small
COM and NAV knobs.
Turning the knobs clockwise increases frequency.
Turning the knobs counterclockwise decreases frequency.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NAV/COM
RADIO INDICATORS
• RX – During COM signal reception, a white RX
appears by the active COM frequency.
• TX – During COM transmission, a white TX
appears by the active COM frequency replacing the
Frequency Transfer Arrow.
Figure 3-9 COM and NAV Volume Levels
FREQUENCY TRANSFER ARROW
Figure 3-7 COM Radio Status Indications
• ID – When the Morse code identifier is ON for a
NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the
active NAV frequency.
The Frequency Transfer Arrow is displayed between
the COM and NAV active and standby frequencies for
the active radio. Pressing the Frequency Transfer key
toggles the frequencies. Pressing the small COM or
NAV knob transfers the frequency tuning box and the
Frequency Transfer Arrow between the radios.
NOTE: When a COM signal is received or
transmitted, the Frequency Transfer Arrow is
replaced by a white RX or TX indication.
The Morse code identifier is
ON for the GHM VOR.
Figure 3-8 ID Indication
Pressing the COM Frequency Transfer
key toggles the COM frequencies.
VOLUME
Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100%
using the VOL/PUSH SQ knob for COM or VOL/PUSH
ID knob for NAV. Turning the knob clockwise increases
volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the
standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for
two seconds after the change.
Pressing the NAV Frequency Transfer
key toggles the NAV frequencies.
Figure 3-10 Transferring COM and NAV Frequencies
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
3-5
NAV/COM
3.2 COM OPERATION
FREQUENCY SPACING
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25 kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33 kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel
configuration.
COM channel spacing is configured through the MFD
on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page group.
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
SELECTING A COM RADIO
The desired COM radio is selected by pressing the
COM MIC keys on the audio panel. When the COM MIC
key is annunciated, the associated active COM frequency
is displayed in green in the COM Frequency window.
Top section of the
audio panel
This COM radio is selected
on the audio panel.
Figure 3-12 Selecting a COM Radio
Automatic squelch quiets unwanted static noise when
no audio signal is received, while still providing reasonable
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable auto squelch,
press the VOL/PUSH SQ knob.
When automatic squelch is disabled, COM audio
reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard
over the speaker and phones, and an RX indication
appears on the display.
NOTE: When PA mode is selected on the audio
panel, the COM MIC annunciator is no longer lit
and the active COM frequency changes to white,
indicating that there is no COM activity.
NOTE: Refer to the Audio Panel section for more
details on transceiver selection.
Figure 3-11 Overriding Automatic Squelch
To enable automatic squelch, press the VOL/PUSH
SQ knob again.
3-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NAV/COM
EMERGENCY FREQUENCY (121.500 MHZ)
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency
frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in the
radio in which the tuning failure occurred.
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING
121.500 MHZ
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer
key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the
active COM radio (the one with the transfer arrow).
Figure 3-13 COM Tuning Failure
NOTE: In case of a dual display failure, the COM
radios are automatically tuned to the emergency
frequency (121.500 MHz).
Press for two seconds to load 121.5 MHz.
Figure 3-14 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) switch becomes stuck, the
COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to
advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
Figure 3-15 Stuck Microphone Alert
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC key annunciator on
the audio panel continues to blink as long as the PTT
switch remains stuck.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
3-7
NAV/COM
3.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION FOR NAVIGATION
The desired NAV radio is selected for navigation by
pressing the CDI softkey located on the PFD. The three
navigation modes that can be selected are:
FREQUENCY RANGE
The NAV radios receive in the VOR/ILS frequency range
of 108.00 to 117.95 MHz with 50 kHz spacing. The NAV
Frequency window displays the following information:
• NAV1 and NAV2 active and standby frequencies
• NAV1 and NAV2 identifier indication (if the Morse
code identifier is received by the system)
• Color-coded indication of the selected NAV radio
• Morse code identifier status
MORSE CODE IDENTIFIER
Press the VOL/PUSH ID knob to turn the Morse code
identifier ON and OFF. When the identifier is ON, a
white ID indication appears to the left of the active NAV
frequency, and the Morse code is heard on the NAV audio.
The VOR/LOC Morse code identifier is displayed next to
the active NAV frequency.
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a single
green arrow (shown) labeled either ‘VOR1’ or
‘LOC1’ is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1
frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a double
green arrow (not shown) labeled either ‘VOR2’ or
‘LOC2’ is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2
frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS mode is selected, a single magenta
arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither
NAV radio is selected.
NOTE: In GPS mode, both active NAV frequencies
are displayed in white.
When the identifier is OFF, the ID indication disappears
and the Morse code is off.
NAV audio is available with the ID filtered out for
listening to HIWAS and FSS transmissions on VOR
stations.
NAV2 radio is selected on the
audio panel. The Morse code
identifier for the GHM VOR
can be heard.
The NAV radio is
selected by the CDI
softkey.
NAV section
of the audio
panel
Figure 3-16 Morse Code Identifier Audio
Figure 3-17 Selecting a NAV Radio
3-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NAV/COM
DME TUNING
Selecting DME Transceiver Pairing
The G1000 system tunes the optional DME transceiver.
The UHF DME frequency is paired with a VHF NAV
frequency, providing DME distance information.
Frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV
frequency is shown on the display.
The following DME transceiver pairing can be
selected:
The DME radio is tuned by selecting the associated
NAV system or HOLD in the DME Tuning window. The
DME Tuning window is located to the right of the HSI on
the lower right corner of the PFD. Pressing the top-level
DME softkey toggles the DME Tuning window ON and
OFF.
• NAV1 – Tunes the DME frequency from the selected
NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Tunes the DME frequency from the selected
NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME
frequency remains tuned to the last selected NAV
frequency.
NOTE: When turning ON the G1000 for use,
the system remembers the last frequency used
for DME Tuning and the NAV1, NAV2 or HOLD
state prior to shutdown.
NOTE: When another Auxiliary window is turned
on, the DME Tuning window is replaced on the
PFD.
To select DME transceiver tuning:
DME
Modes
Figure 3-18 DME Tuning Window
1.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
DME tuning.
2.
Press the ENT key to complete the selection.
NOTE: Pressing the CLR key while in the process
of DME tuning cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning
state.
NOTE: Pressing the FMS knob activates/
deactivates the cursor in the DME Tuning
window.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
3-9
NAV/COM
3.4 FREQUENCY AUTO-TUNING
The G1000 system offers multiple auto-tuning
capabilities. The PFD allows auto-tuning of COM
frequencies associated with the nearest airports. The MFD
provides auto-tuning of both COM and NAV frequencies
from waypoint and nearest pages. In addition, the primary
NAV frequency is entered automatically in the NAV
window during approach loading or approach activation.
AUTO-TUNING ON THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports may be
viewed and automatically loaded from the Nearest Airports
Window on the PFD.
To auto-tune a COM frequency for a nearby
airport:
1.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the
frequency windows in the following ways:
Press the NRST softkey to open the Nearest
Airports Window, which displays the list of
airport identifiers and COM frequencies.
2.
• By using the ENT key when the frequency is
highlighted on the appropriate page (PFD and
MFD).
Turn either FMS knob to highlight the desired
COM frequency.
3.
Press the ENT key to load the COM frequency
into the COM tuning box.
• When loading or activating an approach (PFD and
MFD).
NOTE: Turn the FMS knob to scroll through a
list of frequencies.
When the desired frequency is entered in the tuning
box, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the
Frequency Transfer key places this frequency into the
active field.
Press the ENT key to load
a highlighted frequency into
the frequency window.
Turn the FMS knob
to scroll through a
list of frequencies.
Figure 3-19 Loading Frequencies
Pressing the NRST softkey opens
the Nearest Airports window
Figure 3-20 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
3-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NAV/COM
AUTO-TUNING ON THE MFD
WPT – Airport Information Window
Frequencies can be selected and loaded from the
following MFD pages:
The Airport Information Window displays runway
information and a list of frequencies for the selected airport
identifier as well as departure, arrival, and approach
information.
• WPT – Airport Information
• WPT – VOR Information
To display the entire list of frequencies for
an airport:
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest VOR
1.
On the Airport Information Window, press the
INFO softkey to display runway and frequency
information for a specific airport.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the selection
cursor in the window.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired airport
identifier and press the ENT key. A list of all
available frequencies for the selected airport
appears.
• NRST – Nearest (ARTCC, FSS, WX) Frequencies
Figure 3-21 MFD Page Group Icon
In NAV mode during any VOR/ILS approach activation,
the NAV frequency is automatically loaded into the
standby field of the selected NAV radio.
In GPS mode during any VOR/ILS approach activation,
the appropriate NAV frequency is automatically loaded
into the active field of NAV1.
Figure 3-22 WPT – Airport Information Window
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
3-11
NAV/COM
To load a COM frequency into the COM
tuning box:
To load the primary approach NAV
frequency into the NAV tuning box:
1.
When the list of frequencies for the selected
airport is displayed, highlight the desired
frequency by turning the large FMS knob.
1
On the Airport Information Window, press the
APR softkey to display approach information
for a specific airport.
2.
Press the ENT key.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the selection
cursor in the window.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
primary NAV frequency located in the Primary
Frequency box.
4.
Press the ENT key.
The Pilot Controlled Lighting (PCL) frequency, located
in the Runways box of the INFO portion of the Airport
Information Page, may also be highlighted and loaded
into the COM tuning box.
Figure 3-23 WPT – Airport Information Page (APR)
3-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NAV/COM
WPT – VOR Information Window
The VOR Information Window displays information
specific to individual VORs, including the airport that is
nearest to the VOR.
To load a VOR frequency into the NAV
window:
1.
On the VOR Information Window, press the
FMS knob to activate the VOR Information
window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob as needed to select the
desired VOR and press the ENT key to validate
the selection.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the VOR
frequency and press the ENT key to load this
frequency into the tuning box of the NAV
Frequency window.
NOTE: If the MENU key is pressed when on the
VOR Information Window, the ‘View Recent VOR
List’ menu option is displayed for quick access to
recently used VORs. If no VOR frequencies have
been tuned, this menu option is grayed out.
Figure 3-24 WPT – VOR Information Menu
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
3-13
NAV/COM
NRST – NEAREST AIRPORTS WINDOW
The Nearest Airports Window displays a list of the
nearest airports with runway, frequency, and approach
information. In this window, any frequency associated
with the selected airport can be loaded into the NAV or
COM Frequency window.
To display the entire list of frequencies for
a nearby airport and load a frequency from
that list:
3-14
1.
On the Nearest Airports Window, press the
FMS knob to activate the cursor in the Nearest
Airports Window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list
of nearest airport identifiers until the desired
airport is highlighted.
3.
Press the FREQ softkey to activate the selection
cursor in the Frequencies box.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list of
frequencies for the selected airport.
5.
When the desired frequency is highlighted,
press the ENT key to load this frequency into
the tuning box of the NAV or COM Frequency
window.
Figure 3-25 NRST – Nearest Airport Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NAV/COM
NRST – NEAREST VOR WINDOW
The Nearest VOR window displays a list of VORs
together with related information, including the VOR
frequency.
To load a VOR frequency into the NAV
window:
1.
On the Nearest VOR Window, press the FMS
knob to activate the Nearest VOR window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list
of nearest VORs until the desired VOR is
highlighted.
3.
Press the FREQ softkey to activate the selection
cursor in the Frequency box and press the ENT
key to load the frequency into the tuning box
of the NAV Frequency window.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Figure 3-26 NRST – Nearest VOR Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
3-15
NAV/COM
NRST – Nearest Frequencies Windows
The Nearest Frequencies window displays a list of
nearest ARTCC, FSS, and WX frequencies. For frequency
selection, the cursor can be activated on the ARTCC, FSS,
or WX windows by using the ARTCC, FSS, and WX
softkeys.
The Nearest ARTCC and FSS frequency windows
contain a numbered list of names as well as bearing and
distance information from the transmitting antenna.
To view a nearest WX frequency and load it
into the standby frequency field:
1.
Press the WX softkey to activate the selection
cursor in the Nearest WX window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight the desired
frequency.
3.
Press the ENT key to load the desired frequency
into the tuning box.
To view a nearest ARTCC or FSS frequency
and load it into the standby frequency
field:
1.
Press the ARTCC or the FSS softkey to activate
the selection cursor in the Nearest window.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to scroll through
the list of names, then the large FMS knob to
highlight the desired frequency.
3.
Press the ENT key to load the desired frequency
into the COM tuning box.
Figure 3-27 NRST – Nearest Frequencies Windows
3-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
NAV/COM
AUTO-TUNING ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
(NAV FREQUENCIES)
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV
Frequency window on approach activation, regardless of
the display unit being used.
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency becomes
auto-tuned upon loading an approach.
To auto-tune a NAV frequency if the desired
approach is not already loaded:
1.
Press the PROC key to open the Procedures
window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘SELECT APPROACH’ menu option and press
the ENT key.
3.
Use both the FMS knob and the ENT key as
needed to select the desired airport, VOR/ILS
approach and transition.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight either the
‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’ prompt and press the
ENT key. The primary NAV frequency for the
activated approach is loaded into the standby
field of the selected NAV radio.
Figure 3-28 Selecting an Approach
Figure 3-29 Loading an Approach
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
3-17
NAV/COM
To auto-tune a NAV frequency if the desired
approach is already loaded:
1.
Press the PROC key to open the Procedures
window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ menu option and
press the ENT key. The approach primary NAV
frequency becomes automatically loaded into
the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
When loading or activating an approach, the primary
NAV frequency may be loaded into the NAV tuning box by
highlighting the frequency in the Select Approach window
using the FMS knob, then pressing the ENT key.
If the system is in GPS mode when a VOR/ILS
approach is loaded or activated, the approach primary
NAV frequency is automatically loaded into the active
field of NAV1.
The NAV frequency is also automatically loaded
upon vector-to-final activation. An approach can also
be activated with the MENU key when the Flight Plan
window is open.
3-18
Figure 3-30 Activating an Approach
NOTE: When a VOR/ILS approach has been
activated in GPS mode, and the ILS CDI Capture
option is set to AUTO, the system switches to NAV
mode as the final approach course is intercepted
(within 15 nm from the FAF). See the Multi
Function Display Pilot’s Guide for details.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Transponder
TRANSPONDER
4.1 TRANSPONDER DESCRIPTION
The GTX 33 transponder is integrated into the
G1000 system, offering Mode A, Mode C and Mode S
interrogation and reply capabilities. This pilot’s guide
provides a description of the transponder operation and
information on Mode S capability.
The transponder controls are located on the G1000
Primary Flight Display (PFD) on the lower portion of the
screen (see figures below).
TRANSPONDER SOFTKEYS
The transponder function spans three levels of softkeys;
the Top-level, the Mode Selection and the Code Selection
softkeys.
When the Top-level XPDR softkey is pressed, the
following softkeys appear in the softkey bar (Figure 4-2):
STBY, ON, ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
When the CODE softkey is pressed, the number
softkeys appear in the softkey bar (Figure 4-3): 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP, BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are
not used for code entry. Pressing the BKSP softkey backs
up code selection to the previous digit.
Pressing the BACK softkey during code selection
reverts to the MODE Selection softkeys (Figure 4-2).
Pressing the BACK softkey during Mode Selection reverts
to the Top-level softkeys (Figure 4-1).
After 45 seconds of transponder softkey inactivity,
the system reverts back to the Top-level softkeys (Figure
4-1).
TRANSPONDER STATUS BAR
The Transponder Status bar is located to the left of the
System Time box and contains a four-digit code field, a
mode field, and a reply status indicator. In Standby mode,
both the code field and the mode field appear in white. In
all other modes, these fields appear in green.
Transponder Status Bar
Figure 4-1 Top-level Softkeys
Pressing XPDR
displays the Mode
Selection softkeys
Pressing BACK
displays the Toplevel softkeys
Figure 4-2 Mode Selection Softkeys
Pressing CODE
displays the Code
Selection softkeys
Pressing BACK
displays the Mode
Selection softkeys
Figure 4-3 Code Selection Softkeys
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
4-1
TRANSPONDER
MODE S FEATURES
The GTX 33 transponder is equipped with selective
addressing or Mode Select (Mode S), capability. Mode S
functions include the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to
exchange information between aircraft and
various ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID reporting
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS)
requirements
• Acquisition squitter
Flight ID Reporting – The G1000 transponder reports
aircraft identification as either the aircraft registration or a
FLT ID (Flight Identification). The system is configured
for either option by an authorized Garmin service center.
If configured for Flight ID entry, the pilot must enter
the appropriate flight ID on the PFD. After the correct
Flight ID is entered, the aircraft identification reported in
response to ATC radar interrogations is properly correlated
with the associated call sign for voice communication.
The flight ID is not to exceed seven (7) characters. No
space is needed when entering Flight ID. When a Flight
ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it
upon completion of Flight ID entry. (See ICAO documents
8168, 4444 and 8585 for further details).
Acquisition Squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short
squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the
presence of interrogations.
The purpose of acquisition squitter is to enable Mode S
ground stations and Traffic Collision Avoidance System
(TCAS) equipped aircraft to recognize the presence of
Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
Mode S provides a data link for Traffic Information
Service (TIS). TIS is a ground-based service that sends
out location, direction, altitude and climb/descent
information relative to all transponder-equipped aircraft
within a radius of 55 miles from select sites.
For aircraft not equipped with TCAS or TAS, TIS
provides a graphic display of traffic information. TIS
displays up to eight (8) traffic targets within 7.5 nautical
miles from 3,000 feet below to 3,500 feet above your
aircraft. TIS data is updated approximately once every
five (5) seconds.
NOTE: TIS is intended only to assist in
visual acquisition of other aircraft in Visual
Meteorological Conditions (VMC).
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder
are invisible to TIS.
If the Flight ID is set to ‘SAME AS TAIL’ no entry is
required. In this configuration, the transponder then
reports the aircraft registration number to ATC.
4-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
TRANSPONDER
4.2 OPERATION
MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude
modes) or manual (Standby, ON and Altitude modes).
The STBY, ON and ALT softkeys can be accessed by
pressing the XPDR softkey.
Standby Mode (Manual)
The Standby mode can be selected at any time by
pressing the STBY softkey. In Standby mode, the
transponder does not reply to interrogations, but new
codes can be entered. If the Standby mode is selected,
a white STBY indication appears in the mode field of the
Transponder Status bar.
Ground Mode (Automatic)
Ground mode is automatically selected when the
aircraft is on the ground. A green GND indication
appears in the mode field of the Transponder Status bar.
In Ground mode, the transponder does not allow Mode
A and Mode C replies, but it does permit acquisition
squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
interrogations.
Figure 4-4 Ground Mode
Figure 4-5 Standby Mode
NOTE: In Standby mode, the IDENT function is
inhibited.
Manual ON Mode
The ON mode can be selected at any time by pressing
the ON softkey. ON mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON
mode, a green ON indication appears in the mode field of
the Transponder Status bar.
NOTE: Ground mode can be overridden
by pressing any one of the Mode Selection
softkeys.
Figure 4-6 ON Mode
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
4-3
TRANSPONDER
Altitude Mode (Automatic or Manual)
CODE SELECTION
Altitude mode is automatically selected when the
aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the ALT softkey.
Entering a Code
If Altitude mode is selected, a green ALT indication is
displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Status bar,
and all transponder replies requesting altitude information
are provided with pressure altitude information.
Figure 4-7 Altitude Mode
Reply Status
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations,
an R indication appears momentarily in the reply status
field of the Transponder Status bar.
Figure 4-8 Reply Indication
A total of 4,096 discrete identification codes can be
selected with the Code Selection softkeys.
To enter a transponder code:
1.
Press the XPDR softkey to display the transponder
Mode Selection softkeys.
2.
Press the CODE softkey to display the
transponder Code Selection softkeys, for digit
entry.
3.
Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the
code field. When entering the code, the next
key in sequence must be pressed within 10
seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored
to the previous code. Five seconds after the
fourth digit has been entered, the transponder
code becomes active.
Figure 4-9 Entering a Code
NOTE: When entering a code, press the BKSP
(backspace) softkey to back up and change code
digits.
4-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
TRANSPONDER
VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
The VFR code can be entered either manually, each
digit at a time, or by pressing the XPDR softkey, then the
VFR softkey. When the VFR softkey is pressed, the preprogrammed VFR code is automatically displayed in the
code field of the Transponder Status bar.
Pressing the IDENT softkey sends an ID indication to
Air Traffic Control (ATC). The ID return distinguishes your
transponder from all others on the air traffic controller’s
radar screen.
Pressing the VFR softkey again restores the previous
identification code.
NOTE: The pre-programmed VFR code is set at
the factory to 1200.
The IDENT softkey appears in all levels of transponder
softkeys. When the IDENT softkey is pressed, a green
IDENT indication is displayed in the mode field of the
Transponder Status bar for a duration of 18 seconds.
Important Codes
Following is a list of important codes:
• 1200 – VFR code in the U.S. (refer to ICAO
standards for VFR codes in other countries)
• 7000 – VFR code commonly used in Europe (refer
to ICAO standards)
• 7500 – Hijack code
• 7600 – Loss of communication code
• 7700 – Emergency code
• 7777 – Military interceptor operations code
(NEVER SQUAWK THIS CODE)
• 0000 – Code for military use in the U.S.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Figure 4-10 IDENT Indication
When the IDENT softkey is pressed while in Mode
or Code Selection, the system reverts to the Top-level
softkeys.
NOTE: In Standby mode, the IDENT softkey is
inoperative.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
4-5
TRANSPONDER
This page intentionally left blank.
4-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Audio Panel
AUDIO PANEL
5.1 AUDIO PANEL DESCRIPTION
The GMA 1347 is an audio control panel and marker
beacon system. Pressing the audio panel keys controls
audio selection of COM, NAV, and intercom. LED
annunciators indicate when a key function is selected.
The audio panel includes a six-position intercom
system (ICS) with electronic cabin noise de-emphasis
and two stereo music inputs. Separate knobs control
intercom audio level for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The intercom provides four selectable modes of isolation
(All, Crew, Pilot, Copilot).
A cabin speaker is available for listening to selected
aircraft radios. MASQ (Master Avionics Squelch) processing
reduces ambient noise from the avionics inputs.
Each microphone input has an automatic squelch
threshold. Manual squelch is available by pressing the
MAN SQ key.
The audio panel provides a digital recorder that can
play back up to two and a half minutes of COM audio.
Recording is automatic when a COM signal is received.
Playback is controlled by pressing the PLAY key. Playback
can be stopped by pressing the MKR/MUTE key.
The unit controls marker beacon receiver audio and
features marker beacon audio muting.
As part of the G1000 Integrated Cockpit System, the
GMA 1347 also controls the display reversionary mode.
WARNING: When the GMA 1347 Audio panel is
turned OFF or is inoperative, certain autopilots
are affected. No warning tone is supplied when
the autopilot disengages and the middle marker
sense signal is not supplied.
The audio panel features controls for three (3) major
function groups:
• Communication
• Navigation
• Intercom system (ICS)
The controls are labeled to indicate the name of the
function. The triangular annunciator above each key
indicates when the key function is selected.
The knobs at the bottom of the unit control ICS volume
and squelch threshold levels. The small knob adjusts the
volume/squelch level for the pilot. The large knob adjusts
the volume/squelch level for the copilot/passenger. The
red DISPLAY BACKUP button below the dual volume/
squelch knob controls reversionary mode selection.
TRANSCEIVERS
NOTE: A push-to-talk (PTT) switch must be
pressed to transmit on the selected radio.
The audio panel handles two separate transceivers:
• COM1 MIC
• COM2 MIC
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
5-1
AUDIO PANEL
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this
aircraft.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the
right headset channel output to ground. While this
does not damage the audio panel, a person listening on
a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both
ears. If a monaural headset is used at any of the passenger
positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset
hears audio in the left ear only, unless their headset has a
mono/stereo switch that is set to mono.
UNMUTED/UNSWITCHED INPUTS
The audio panel provides four (4) unmuted/unswitched
inputs that are always present on the headsets or speaker.
These inputs are the following aural warnings:
•
•
•
•
5-2
ALTITUDE WARNING
UNSWITCHED 1
UNSWITCHED 2
UNSWITCHED 3
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
• Transceiver audio selector keys
(COM1, COM2)
• Transmitter (audio/mic) selection keys
(COM1 MIC, COM2 MIC)
• Passenger address key
(PA)
• Speaker key
(SPKR)
• Marker beacon receiver audio select/mute key
(MKR/MUTE)
• Marker beacon receiver high sensitivity key
(HI SENS)
• Aircraft radio audio selector keys
(NAV1, NAV2, DME)
• Intercom manual squelch key
(MAN SQ)
• Digital recording playback key
(PLAY)
• Intercom system (ICS) isolation keys
(PILOT, COPLT)
• Volume/squelch knob
(VOL/SQ)
• Reversionary mode button
(DISPLAY BACKUP)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL
Transmitters
Transceiver Audio
Disabled on Beechcraft
58/G58 Aircraft
Split Com
Speaker
Passenger Address
Marker Beacon Signal Sensitivity
Marker Beacon/Mute
DME Audio
Navigation Radio Audio
Disabled on
Beechcraft 58/G58 Aircraft
Manual Squelch
Digital Recording Playback
ICS Isolation
VOL/SQ
VOL Annunciation
SQ Annunciation
Reversionary Mode Control
Figure 5-1 Front Panel Controls
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
5-3
AUDIO PANEL
5.2 OPERATION
POWER-UP AND FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
Power-up
The audio panel performs a self-test during power-up.
All panel annunciator lights illuminate for approximately
two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, settings are
restored to the ones in use before the unit was last turned
off.
Annunciator
Disabled on Beechcraft
58/G58 Aircraft
Figure 5-2 Transceiver Keys
Fail-safe Operation
A fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and
microphone directly to COM1 in case power is interrupted
or the unit is turned off. In this case, audio is not available
on the speaker.
KEY ANNUNCIATORS
Pressing any key on the audio panel activates and
deactivates the function. Triangular annunciators above
each key illuminate to show when the function is on or
off (Figure 5-2). Annunciators do not illuminate on a
disabled function.
LIGHTING
Key annunciators and backlighting are controlled
automatically by the PFD.
TRANSCEIVER KEYS
The following four (4) transceiver keys appear at the
top of the audio panel front panel: COM1 MIC, COM2
MIC, COM1, and COM2 (Figure 5-2). COM audio can
be selected by pressing either the desired COM key or by
pressing a COM MIC key.
5-4
COM MIC Keys
Pressing the COM1 MIC key selects the COM1 radio
as the active transceiver. Pressing the COM2 MIC key
selects the COM2 radio as the active transceiver. The
receiver audio key, COM1, or COM2 is also selected.
The COM frequency is highlighted in green in the active
frequency field of the PFD and MFD.
Only one transceiver can be selected at a time. If
COM2 MIC is pressed when COM1 MIC is active, the
unit switches to COM2.
COM Keys
Pressing the COM1 receiver key selects the COM1
radio as an active receiver. Pressing the COM2 receiver
key selects the COM2 radio as an active receiver. Any
combination of radios can be selected separately or
simultaneously regardless of the active transceiver
selection. The active COM radio is always heard on the
headsets.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL
PA FUNCTION
Transmitting
NOTE: Audio level of the COM radio(s) is
controlled by the COM volume controls located
on both the PFD and MFD (see the NAV/COM
section).
When a transmitter is keyed, the active transceiver
MIC key annunciator blinks approximately once per
second. A white TX indication appears next to the active
COM frequency on both the PFD and the MFD during
transmission.
SPLIT COM FUNCTION
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by
the distance between the antennas and the
separation of the tuned frequencies.
A passenger address function is provided by pressing
the PA key to deliver messages. Push-to-talk (PTT) must
be used to deliver PA announcements over the speaker.
When PA is selected on the audio panel, the annunciator
blinks about once per second, the COM MIC annunciator
is no longer lit, and the active COM frequency changes to
white, indicating that there is no COM selected.
SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker.
Pressing the SPKR key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT switch
is keyed.
The speaker volume is adjustable above and below
a nominal value. Contact a Garmin-authorized service
center for details.
Pressing the COM 1/2 key selects the split COM
function. During split COM operation, the COM1,
COM1 MIC, COM2, and COM2 MIC keys are active.
When the COM 1/2 key is selected, COM1 is used by
the pilot for transmission and COM2 is used by the copilot.
The COM1 MIC annunciator blinks when the pilot’s
microphone is keyed and the COM2 MIC annunciator
blinks when the copilot’s microphone is keyed.
In this mode, both the pilot and the copilot can
transmit simultaneously over separate radios. The pilot
can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, DME, and MKR audio as
selected, but the copilot is only able to monitor COM2.
Split COM mode is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2
key again.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
5-5
AUDIO PANEL
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
Description and Operation
The audio panel marker beacon is used as part of the
ILS system. The marker beacon receiver is always ON and
receives at 75 MHz. The audio panel provides a marker
audio muting capability.
The receiver detects the three (3) marker tones, outer,
middle, and inner, and illuminates the appropriate marker
beacon indicators. The marker indicators are located to
the left of the Altimeter on the PFD (Figure 5-4). The
outer marker frequency is 400 Hz with a blue indicator,
the middle marker frequency is 1300 Hz with an amber
indicator, and the inner marker frequency is 3000 Hz with
a white indicator. Refer to Table 5-1 for a summary of the
marker beacon signal characteristics.
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate
When the MKR/MUTE key is selected, the annunciator
light illuminates and the audio signal can be heard over
the speaker or headsets during marker reception.
When the MKR/MUTE key is annunciated and a
marker beacon tone is received, pressing the MKR/MUTE
key mutes the audio but does not affect the annunciators.
The audio returns when the next marker signal is received.
If the MKR/MUTE key is pressed during signal reception,
while marker beacon audio is muted, marker audio and
the MKR/MUTE key annunciator light are turned off.
The marker beacon audio volume level can be adjusted
by a Garmin-authorized service center.
Marker Beacon Signal Sensitivity
Press the HI SENS key (Figure 5-3) for increased
marker beacon signal sensitivity. The HI SENS function
is used to receive an earlier indication of nearing a marker
during an approach.
independently of the marker beacon audio
and cannot be turned off.
Figure 5-3 Marker Beacon Keys
5-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL
Beacon
Outer Marker
Audio Frequency
400 Hz
Audio Keying
———
Middle Marker
1300 Hz
•—•—
Airway/Inner Marker
3000 Hz
••••
Rate
2 dashes per second
95 dot-dash combinations
per minute
6 dots per second
Lamp Color
Blue
Amber
White
Table 5-1 Marker Beacon Signal Characteristics
Inner Marker
Middle Marker
Outer Marker
Figure 5-4 Marker Beacon Signal Indicator Lights on the PFD
NAVIGATION RADIOS
Pressing NAV1, NAV2 or optional DME selects and
deselects the radio source and the annunciator (Figure 5-5).
Selected audio can be heard over the headset and the
speakers. All radio keys can be selected independently.
When no further navigation radio audio is heard, the
amount of background noise is reduced by the Master
Avionics Squelch (MASQ) feature.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Disabled on Beechcraft
58/G58 Aircraft
Figure 5-5 Navigation Radio Keys
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
5-7
AUDIO PANEL
INTERCOM SYSTEM (ICS) ISOLATION
CREW Mode
The intercom system (ICS) provides four (4) isolation
modes: ALL, PILOT, COPILOT, and CREW. The desired
mode can be selected or deselected using the PILOT and
COPLT keys. The four (4) possible ICS isolation states
are summarized in the table below.
CREW mode is selected when both the PILOT and
COPLT key annunciators are lit. In CREW mode, both
the pilot and copilot can hear the selected radios and
communicate with each other, while the passengers are
isolated but can communicate with each other.
PILOT Mode
ALL Mode
PILOT isolation is selected when only the PILOT
key annunciator is lit. In PILOT mode, the pilot can
hear the selected radios. The copilot and passengers can
communicate with each other.
ALL mode is selected when the PILOT and the COPLT
key annunciators are not lit. In ALL mode, everyone
hears the selected radios and is able to communicate with
everyone else.
COPILOT Mode
COPILOT isolation is selected when only the COPLT
key annunciator is lit. In COPILOT mode, the copilot is
isolated from the selected radios and everyone else. The
pilot and passengers can hear the selected radios and
communicate with each other.
Figure 5-6 ICS Isolation Keys
Mode
PILOT KEY
ANNUNCIATOR
COPLT KEY
ANNUNCIATOR
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
Passenger Hears
ALL
OFF
OFF
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot;
passengers; MUSIC 1
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot;
passengers; MUSIC 1
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot;
passengers; MUSIC 2
PILOT
ON
OFF
Selected radios;
pilot
Copilot;
passengers; MUSIC 1
Copilot;
passengers;
MUSIC 2
COPILOT
OFF
ON
Selected radios;
pilot; passengers;
MUSIC 1
Copilot
Selected radios;
pilot; passengers;
MUSIC 2
CREW
ON
ON
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot
Selected radios;
pilot; copilot
Passengers;
MUSIC 2
Table 5-2 ICS Isolation Modes
5-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
The MAN SQ key and VOL/SQ knob control the
volume and squelch of the intercom. The MAN SQ key
allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch
setting. The VOL/SQ knob controls volume or manual
squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
When the MAN SQ annunciator is not lit (auto-squelch
is on), the VOL/SQ knob controls only the volume.
When the MAN SQ annunciator is lit (manual squelch),
the VOL/SQ knob controls both volume and squelch.
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
NOTE: When the MAN SQ key is not lit (autosquelch is active), pressing the VOL/SQ knob has
no effect on the VOL/SQ selection.
Intercom Manual Squelch Control
The intercom squelch function has the ability to quiet
the ambient cockpit noise when no person is talking. Each
microphone input has an automatic squelch threshold.
Manual squelch adjustment is also available if desired.
Pressing the MAN SQ key toggles between the
automatic and manual squelch mode. When in manual
squelch, the MAN SQ annunciator is lit.
In manual squelch mode the VOL/SQ knob adjusts
either the volume or squelch threshold level.
Pressing the VOL/SQ knob toggles between volume
and squelch adjustment. The annunciator at the bottom of
the unit indicates which function the knob is controlling.
Pilot
Copilot
Volume
Squelch
Figure 5-7 Volume/Squelch Control
Intercom Volume Control
The intercom volume is controlled with the VOL/
SQ knob. The small knob controls the pilot volume.
The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning
counterclockwise decreases volume. When squelch is
automatic (MAN SQ annunciator is not lit) and the VOL
annunciator at the bottom of the unit is lit, intercom
volume may be adjusted.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
In manual squelch mode, the small VOL/SQ knob
controls pilot squelch threshold. The large VOL/SQ
knob controls copilot/passenger squelch threshold.
Turning either knob clockwise increases squelch level,
counterclockwise decreases squelch level.
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
The GMA 1347 provides two stereo auxiliary
entertainment inputs; MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2. These
inputs are compatible with popular portable entertainment
devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5 mm stereo
phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio
connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment
devices are plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks.
The current ICS isolation mode affects the distribution
of the entertainment inputs MUSIC 1.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
5-9
AUDIO PANEL
NOTE: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2 cannot be
completely turned off. Audio level for these
inputs can be set above and below a nominal
value. Contact a Garmin-authorized service
center for adjustment.
MUSIC 1
MUSIC 1 can be heard by the pilot in COPILOT mode
and in ALL mode, and can be heard by the copilot in
PILOT mode and in ALL mode.
MUSIC 1 Muting
MUSIC 1 muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker
beacon activity is heard. MUSIC 1 is always soft-muted
when an interruption occurs from an aircraft radio. Soft
muting is the gradual return of MUSIC 1 to its original
volume level. The time required for MUSIC 1 volume to
return at the headset outputs is between one-half and four
seconds.
MUSIC 1 Muting Enable/Disable
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE key for three (3)
seconds toggles MUSIC 1 muting ON and OFF. When
toggling, either one (1) or two (2) beeps can be heard; one
(1) beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two (2)
beeps indicate music muting is disabled.
5-10
MUSIC 2
MUSIC 2 can be heard only by the passengers and is
never muted.
GDL 69A XM RADIO SYSTEM
When no external entertainment music is connected
to the audio panel through MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2
jacks, audio from the GDL 69A is heard by the pilot and
passengers simultaneously.
Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC 1 or
MUSIC 2 removes the GDL 69A audio from that input.
For example, if passengers prefer music while the pilot
listens to the GDL 69A, the entertainment audio would be
connected to the MUSIC 2 jack.
Refer to the Optional Equipment Section for more
details on the GDL 69A.
MASTER AVIONICS SQUELCH (MASQ)
MASQ (Master Avionics Squelch) reduces ambient
noise from the aircraft radios. When no audio is
detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUDIO PANEL
DIGITAL CLEARANCE RECORDER WITH
PLAYBACK
The audio panel contains a digital clearance recorder
that plays back up to 2.5 minutes of COM signal recording.
Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks.
Audio from all of the selected COM radios are recorded
and can be played back. Anyone able to hear the selected
COM radios is able to hear the COM audio playback.
Once the 2.5 minutes of recording time have been
reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored
memory blocks, starting from the oldest block. Powering
off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
During playback, the PLAY annunciator light blinks
approximately once per second. If a COM input signal is
detected during playback, playback is halted and the new
COM audio is recorded as the latest block.
REVERSIONARY MODE
The red DISPLAY BACKUP button selects the
reversionary mode for the displays. Reversionary mode
operation displays important flight and engine information
on both the PFD and MFD, in case of display failure.
Figure 5-9 Reversionary Mode Button
Figure 5-8 Playback Key
The PLAY key controls the playback function.
• Pressing PLAY once plays back the latest recorded
memory block, then returns to normal operation.
• Pressing PLAY during playback of a memory block
halts the playback of this block and plays back the
preceding recorded block. The PLAY key can be
used to backtrack through the recorded memory
blocks to reach and play back any desired block.
NOTE: Pressing the MKR/MUTE key during
playback halts playback and returns the
recorder/playback to normal operation.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
5-11
AUDIO PANEL
This page intentionally left blank.
5-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Engine Indication System
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.1 INTRODUCTION
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) provides
the flight crew with gauges, bar graphs, and numeric
readouts of engine parameters. The EIS is displayed on
the left side of the MFD during normal operations. In
reversionary mode, the GDUs are re-configured to present
PFD symbology together with the EIS (the EIS is displayed
on the left side).
NOTE: Refer to the System Overview for
information regarding reversionary mode.
EIS PAGES
The following colors are used to indicate operating
conditions:
• White (or absence of a color band) – Outside
normal flight operating range (safe)
• Green – Normal flight operating range (safe)
• Yellow – Caution
• Red – Warning (readouts and indicator titles flash)
Round Dial Gauges
The dial gauges are split to have a color-coded arc and
white pointer for each engine. Digital readouts appear
beneath each half of the gauge.
Left
Engine
The EIS has information on three pages, which are
accessed using the ENGINE softkey:
• Engine Page – This is the default page; it displays
all critical engine, fuel, and electrical information.
• Lean Page – This page provides engine leaning
information and a user interface to perform engine
leaning.
• System Page – This page displays a numeric
readout for the critical engine, fuel, and electrical
indicators.
EIS INDICATORS
Manifold
Pressure Gauge
Tachometer
Propeller Sync
Indicator
Figure 6-1 Round Dial Gauges:
Manifold Pressure Gauge and Tachometer
Manifold Pressure Gauge (MAN IN HG)
NOTE: When both engines are operating at less
than 500 rpm, no warnings will occur for oil
temperatures and pressures and bus voltages
outside their normal operating ranges.
The EIS Pages display engine information using round
dial gauges, horizontal bar indicators, bar graphs (see
Lean Page), and digital readouts. All EIS pages show the
Manifold Pressure Gauge and Tachometer.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Right
Engine
Engine power is displayed in terms of inches of
mercury (in Hg).
Tachometer (RPM)
Propeller speed is shown in revolutions per minute
(rpm). The Tachometer is equipped with a Propeller
Sync Indicator, which points towards the lower-speed
propeller with a sensitivity of 2 rpm. The propellers are
synchronized when the needle is straight up.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
6-1
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Horizontal Bar Indicators
EIS PAGE REVERSION
These indicators are color-coded and have
pointers for both engines, right (R) and left
(L). Pointers appear in white to indicate
operation within the acceptable range. Pointer
color changes to yellow or red when operating
outside the normal range.
The EIS automatically defaults back to the Engine Page
from the Lean or System Page when any of the following
parameters are exceeded:
Normal
Caution
Warning
Parameter
Fuel Flow
Cylinder Head Temperature
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Alternator Load (L or R)
Fuel Quantity (L or R)
Criterion
> 27.4 gph
> 238 ºC
> 116 ºC
< 30 psi OR > 100 psi
> 100% (100 A)
< 13 gal
Table 6-1 Engine Page Default Criteria
The pilot may use the LEAN and SYSTEM softkeys
to return to the Lean and System Pages after the system
automatically switches back to the default EIS page.
Figure 6-2 Horizontal Bar Indicator:
Oil Temperature
Digital Readouts
These readouts appear as white text on a black
background, representing areas of normal operation. The color changes to yellow (caution)
or flashes red (warning) upon exceeding areas
of normal operation.
Normal
Warning
Caution
Figure 6-3 Digital Readout:
Oil Temperature and Pressure
6-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.2 ENGINE PAGE
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)
The Engine Page is the default page for the EIS page
group. The Engine Page can be displayed after viewing
other EIS pages by pressing the ENGINE softkey.
At the top of the page are the dial gauges. Beneath are
horizontal bar indicators and readouts for critical engine
and electrical parameters.
Manifold
Pressure Gauge
The Fuel Flow Indicator displays current fuel flow
along with a readout for each engine from 0 to 30 gallons
per hour (gph).
Fuel Flow Leaning Marks appear as cyan pointers on
the Fuel Flow Indicator. These provide references for
the pilot during cruise and max power (MPC) climbs. A
pointer is displayed after the engine exceeds 2530 rpm
or the fuel flow exceeds a value specified for the altitude
during a climb. If both pointers are displayed, they both
indicate the higher of the two leaning fuel flows.
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine
manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures
in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
Tachometer
Propeller Sync
Indicator
The CHT Indicator displays the relative temperature of
the hottest cylinder for each engine.
Oil Temperature (OIL TEMP) and Pressure (OIL PRES)
Fuel Flow
Indicator
Fuel Flow
Leaning Marks
Cylinder Head
Temperature
Oil Temperature
Indicator
The Oil Temperature Indicator displays the engines’
relative oil temperatures. The Oil Pressure Indicator
displays the relative pressure of the oil supplied to each
engine.
Alternator Load (ALT LOAD)
Oil Pressure
Indicator
Alternator
Load
Fuel Quantity
Indicator
Figure 6-4 Engine Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
The Alternator Load Indicator displays each alternator’s
relative current. The green bar signifies 100% of the
alternator capacity (100 A).
Fuel Quantity (FUEL QTY GAL)
The Fuel Quantity Indicator displays the quantity of
fuel in each tank in gallons (gal). When full, the indicator
displays to the maximum of 75 gal for each tank.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
6-3
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.3 LEAN PAGE
The Lean Page is accessed by pressing the LEAN
softkey and provides information and a user interface
for performing engine leaning. The dial gauges and Fuel
Flow Indicator remain on the Lean Page.
Manifold
Pressure Gauge
Tachometer
Propeller Sync
Indicator
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine
manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures
in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
Temperature Bar Graphs
The EGT and CHT Bar Graphs display the relative
exhaust gas and head temperature for all cylinders of each
engine and give numeric readouts in degrees Celsius for
the selected cylinders.
By default, the hottest cylinders are selected, as
indicated by cyan (light blue) highlighting. Bars appear
in white for both graphs to indicate temperatures in the
normal range. A CHT above 238 °C (indicated by the
red line at the top of the graph) causes the bar for that
cylinder to become red.
Lean Page Softkeys
Fuel Flow
Indicator
Fuel Flow
Leaning Marks
The pilot can utilize the CYL SLCT and ASSIST
softkeys to obtain information about specific cylinders
while on the Lean Page.
Cylinder Select
Exhaust Gas
Temperature
Bar Graph
EGT Readout
(Selected Cylinders)
Cylinder Head
Temperature
Bar Graph
CHT Readout
(Selected Cylinders)
NOTE: The CYL SLCT softkey is disabled while
Lean Assist Mode is active (the ASSIST softkey
is pressed).
The CYL SLCT softkey is available from the Lean Page
and can be utilized to obtain EGT and CHT information
about a particular cylinder. Pressing the softkey cycles
through the cylinders of both engines simultaneously.
Figure 6-5 Lean Page
6-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Lean Assist
The ASSIST softkey activates Lean Assist Mode. This
pilot aid identifies for each engine the peak EGT of the
first cylinder whose temperature falls.
The peaked cylinder is selected and a cyan line appears
above the cylinder’s bar to indicate the reference EGT
peak. A readout showing the temperature deviation from
peak (∆PEAK °C) is displayed above the EGT Bar Graph.
If the temperature of the peaked cylinder exceeds the peak
value, the peak value is not updated while in Lean Assist
Mode.
Monitoring of a cylinder continues until the ASSIST
softkey is pressed again, which disables Lean Assist Mode
and remove the cyan peak line from the bar graph and the
∆PEAK Readout.
Temperature
Deviation
From Peak
EGT Peaks
(Selected Cylinders)
Exhaust Gas
Temperature
Bar Graph
Cylinder Head
Temperature
Bar Graph
EGT Readout
(Selected Cylinders)
CHT Readout
(Selected Cylinders)
Figure 6-6 Lean Assist Mode
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
6-5
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.4 SYSTEM PAGE
System Readouts
The System Page is accessed by pressing the SYSTEM
softkey. Underneath the dial gauges, critical readouts are
separated into three categories: System, Fuel Calculation,
and Electrical.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for limitations.
Manifold
Pressure Gauge
Tachometer
Propeller Sync
Indicator
Oil
Temperature
Oil
Pressure
Fuel
Remaining
Fuel Used
Oil temperature and pressure for both engines are
displayed in degrees Celsius and pounds per square inch
(psi), respectively.
Fuel Calculations
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft
Fuel Quantity Indicator and are calculated from
the last time the fuel used was reset.
The fuel calculation portion of the System Page is
based on the fuel flow totalizer. The totalizer amount of
fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the quantity of fuel used
(GAL USED) are both displayed. The pilot may adjust the
fuel remaining amount for totalizer calculations using the
following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel
remaining in 1-gal increments
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel
remaining in 1-gal increments
• 166 GAL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining
to 166 gal and fuel used display to zero
• 194 GAL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining
to 194 gal and fuel used display to zero
Once set by the pilot, the amount of fuel remaining is
adjusted for fuel burn.
Electrical Readouts
Alternator
Load
Bus Voltage
The load (current) for each alternator is shown as a
percentage of the capacity (100 A). Bus voltages are also
displayed.
Figure 6-7 System Page
6-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Multi Function Display
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This G1000 Pilot’s Guide describes the operation
of the Multi Function Display (MFD) installed in
Beechcraft 58/G58 aircraft.
DESCRIPTION
The display portion of the G1000 Integrated Cockpit
System installed in the Beechcraft 58/G58 aircraft consists
of two, 10.4-inch liquid crystal displays (LCDs). During
normal operation, the right display is configured as the
Multi Function Display (MFD).
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
This MFD Pilot’s Guide only covers the baseline
configuration of the G1000. Descriptions and procedures
relating to the following options for the 58/G58 are
covered in the G1000 Optional Equipment section:
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather
Mapping Sensor
• L-3 SKYWATCH® Traffic Advisory System (Model
SKY497)
• L-3 SKYWATCH® HP Traffic Advisory System
(Model SKY899)
• GWX 68 Weather Radar
• GDL 69/69A XM® Radio System
Figure 7-1 G1000 MFD Splash Screen
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-1
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
MFD POWER-UP
Powering up the MFD is part of the system power up
procedure. See the G1000 System Overview Pilot’s Guide
for details.
Splash Screen Information
The MFD splash screen (Figure 7-1) displays general
system information such as software version and database
versions to the pilot when the G1000 system powers
up. To acknowledge the splash screen information and
proceed to the Navigation Map Page press the ENT key or
the right most softkey twice.
NOTE: Screen images in this pilot’s guide are
subject to change and may not reflect current
G1000 system software.
MFD BACKLIGHTING
See the Primary Flight Display Pilot’s Guide for
instructions on adjusting MFD backlighting.
MFD SOFTKEYS
The MFD softkeys are located below the display screen
and provide control over flight management functions
including GPS Navigation and flight planning. Figure 7-3
shows an MFD flowchart identifying what functions are
available via the softkey labels.
TRAFFIC – pressing the TRAFFIC softkey
displays/removes Mode S Traffic on the
Navigation Map.
TOPO – pressing the TOPO softkey displays
or removes topographic information on the
Navigation Map.
TERRAIN – pressing the TERRAIN softkey
displays/removes terrain information on
the Navigation Map.
BACK – pressing the BACK softkey displays
the ENGINE and MAP top level softkeys.
DCLTR (declutter) – pressing the DCLTR softkey
removes map information in three levels.
CHKLIST (checklist) – pressing the CHKLIST
softkey displays the Checklist Page.
REVERSIONARY MODE
Should a failure occur in either display, the G1000
automatically enters reversionary mode. In reversionary
mode, critical flight instrumentation is combined with
engine instrumentation on the remaining display.
Minimal navigation capability is also available on the
reversionary mode display. See the G1000 System
Overview Pilot’s Guide for a detailed explanation of the
reversionary mode.
The MFD softkeys perform the following functions:
ENGINE – Pressing the ENGINE softkey makes
available the LEAN and SYSTEM softkeys which
in turn access the Lean Page and the System Page,
respectively.
MAP – pressing the MAP softkey enables the following softkeys:
7-2
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS (OPTIONAL)
Selecting a Procedure Group
The G1000 Multi Function Display provides optional
checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper
procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight.
Depending on the specific airframe, there are a certain
number of groups of procedures with their respective
checklists available to the pilot.
NOTE: The checklist information described in this
section is not intended to replace the checklist
information described in the Beechcraft 58/G58
Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) and the Pilot
Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content
of the checklists. User-defined checklists are
created by the aircraft manufacturer. Additionally,
modifications or updates to the checklists are
coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit the checklists.
Displaying the Checklist Page
The Splash Screen displays the current checklist file
that is installed for the Beechcraft 58/G58 aircraft. If no
checklist is present, then the Spalsh Sceen displays the text
“CHECKLIST FILE NOT PRESENT” and the CHKLIST
softkey is greyed out.
To select the Checklist Page:
1. From any page, press the CHKLIST softkey.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
To select a procedure group:
1. Press the CHKLIST softkey.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘GROUP’
field.
3. Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
procedure and press the ENT key.
Selecting a Checklist within the Procedure
Group
1. Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘Checklist’
field.
2. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired checklist
and press the ENT key.
Selecting a Checklist Item
Two methods are available to select a checklist item: (1)
pressing the ENT key; or (2) pressing the DONE softkey.
(1) Pressing the ENT key:
With the desired checklist displayed, turn the FMS
knob to move up and down the checklist and highlight
an item with a hollow white rectangle. The default color
for non-selected checklist items is blue and once the item
is highlighted, the color turns white. To select a checklist
item that is highlighted, press the ENT key. The selected
item turns green in color again for ease of identification,
and then a check mark is placed in the box next to the
item. As an item is selected, the next item is automatically
highlighted for selection.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-3
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
(2) Pressing the DONE Softkey: Pressing the DONE
softkey produces the same results as pressing the ENT
key.
NOTE: All warnings are displayed in yellow for
ease of identification.
One-Button Access to Emergency Procedures
The EMERGENCY softkey is available at all times when
the checklist page is displayed. Press the EMERGENCY
softkey at any time to immediately access the emergency
procedures.
Removing the check mark from a checklist item
Press the CLR key to remove a check mark from an
item.
Advancing to the Next Checklist
Once the last item in a checklist is selected, the ‘GO
TO THE NEXT CHECKLIST?’ text is highlighted. Press
the ENT key to advance to the next checklist displayed.
7-4
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Exiting the Checklist Page
The EXIT softkey is available as long as the Checklist
Page is displayed. Press the EXIT softkey or momentarily
hold down the CLR key at anytime to exit the Checklist
Page and return to the last page that was displayed before
the Checklist Page was selected.
Checklist Group
Checklist Number
Checklist Page
Indicator
Checklist Page
Softkeys
Figure 7-2 Checklist Page (typical)
Emergency
Softkey
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-5
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
ENGINE
DCLTR
MAP
CHKLIST
(optional)
Press the BACK softkey on this level to
return to the top softkey level
ENGINE
LEAN
DCLTR-1
BACK
SYSTEM
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
Press to return to the
top softkey level
TRAFFIC
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL INC FUEL
166 GAL
194 GAL
TOPO
TERRAIN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
ASSIST
(optional)
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
BACK
The DONE softkey changes to UNDO when the checklist
item is already checked
ENGINE
LEAN
(optional)
BACK
Press the ENGINE or BACK softkey on any level to
return to the default page level
ENGINE
(optional)
STRMSCP
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
BACK
CLR
ENGINE
MAP
DCLTR
CHKLIST
Figure 7-3 MFD Softkeys
7-6
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
MFD PAGE GROUPS
To select a specific page group:
1.
The MFD displays GPS/Navigation flight information
in four main page groups:
• Map (MAP):
Navigation Map Page
Traffic Map Page
Weather Datalink Page (optional)
Terrain Proximity Page
TAWS Page (optional)
• Waypoint (WPT) :
Airport Information Page
Intersection Information Page
NDB Information Page
VOR Information Page
User Waypoint Information Page
• Auxiliary (AUX):
Trip Planning Page
Utility Page
GPS Status Page
System Setup Page
System Status Page
• Nearest (NRST):
Nearest Airports Page
Nearest Intersections Page
Nearest NDB Page
Nearest VOR Page
Nearest User Waypoints Page
Nearest Frequencies Page
Neatest Airspaces Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Turn the large FMS knob until the desired page
group is selected.
Active Page group is
highlighted
Currently
selected page is
highlighted
Figure 7-4 Page Group Window
To select a different page within the group:
1.
Turn the small right FMS knob. As the knob is
turned, the bottom right corner of each page
indicates the page group that is currently being
displayed (e.g., MAP or NRST, etc.), the number
of pages available within that group (indicated
by rectangle icons) and the placement of the
current page within that group (indicated by a
solid cyan rectangle icon). The page group and
active page title window are displayed below
the status bar.
Page Group
Active Page Title
Figure 7-5 Page Title Window
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-7
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
WORKING WITH MENUS
Much of the operation of the G1000 MFD is
accomplished using a menu interface. The G1000 has
a bezel-mounted dedicated menu key (MENU) when
pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the pilot to access additional features
or make settings changes which specifically relate to the
currently displayed page. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select,
and review options. Some menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’
when there are no options for the page selected.
The main keys which are used in association with all
page group operations are listed below:
• CLR – erases information or cancels an entry.
Press and hold CLR to immediately display the
Navigation Map Page, regardless of the page
currently displayed.
• ENT – accepts a menu selection or data entry.
Approves an operation or completes data entry.
Also confirms information.
• BACK – resets the MFD softkeys to their default
settings (ENGINE, MAP, DCLTR, MODE, VIEW,
etc).
• DCLTR – removes information from the moving
map in a progressive manner with each key-press.
• MENU – displays a context-sensitive list of
options that allows access to additional features or
that allows the pilot to change the settings which
relate to the currently displayed page.
NOTE: Data is entered using the large and small
FMS knob. Practice with them to become efficient at entering data. This will greatly reduce
the amount time spent operating the MFD in
flight.
If there are more options than can be displayed turn
the FMS knob to scroll through the list to identify them.
In all cases, once the menu is displayed the FMS knob is
turned to highlight an item and the ENT key is pressed
to select that item or the CLR key removes the menu and
cancels the operation. Pressing the softkeys does not
display a menu or submenu.
Figure 7-6 Menu with Options
Figure 7-7 Menu with No Options
7-8
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.2 NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
WARNING: Use of the Navigation Map Page for
pilotage navigation is prohibited. The Navigation
Map is intended only to enhance situational
awareness. Navigation is to be conducted
using only current charts, data, and authorized
navigation facilities.
The Navigation Map Page is the first page in the map
page group and provides the following GPS/Navigation
display capability (display items in the list will differ
depending on the optional equipment that is installed):
• Map display showing airports, navaids, airspaces,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders,
etc.) with names (labels)
• Map pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name and other
pertinent information)
• TIS Traffic Display
• Obstacle Display
• Map Zoom Range Legend
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Heading Indication
• Aircraft icon representing present position
• Icons for enabled map features
• Track Vector
• Topography Scale
• Fuel Range Ring
• Topography Data
• Terrain Proximity Data
Map Orientation
Airspace Boundries
Interstate
Highways
Own Aircraft
Course Line
Terrain Scale
Map Scale
Legend
Page Groups
Figure 7-8 Navigation Map Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-9
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To select the Navigation Map Page:
7-10
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the Map Page
group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Navigation Map Page. The page group name and page
title is displayed below the navigation status
bar; MAP – NAVIGATION MAP. In addition to
turning the large and small FMS knobs, the
Navigation Map Page can be selected from any
page by pressing and momentarily holding the
CLR (DFLT MAP) key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE OPERATIONS
Selecting a Map Range
The following Navigation Map Page operations can be
performed:
The Navigation Map Page can be set to 23 different
range settings from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles. The
current range is indicated in the lower right corner of the
Navigation Map Page and represents the top-to-bottom
distance covered by the map. To change the map range
turn the joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in, turn it
clockwise to zoom out.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changing the Map Orientation
Selecting a Map Range
Using the Auto Zoom Feature
Identifying Aviation Map Data
Decluttering the Map
Panning the Map
Displaying Topographic Information on the Navigation Map Page
Displaying Terrain Information on the Navigation
Map Page
Displaying Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
MFD Navigation Status Window
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Using the Auto Zoom Feature
The autozoom feature automatically adjusts the map
from an enroute range of 2000 nm through each lower
range, stopping at a range of 1.5 nm as the aircraft
approaches the destination waypoint. See the Map Setup
section in this MFD Pilot’s Guide for instructions on
enabling/disabling the autozoom feature.
Changing the Map Orientation
Map Range
Indicator
See the map setup section of this MFD Pilot’s Guide for
instructions on how to change the map orientation.
Figure 7-9 Map Range
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-11
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Identifying Aviation Map Data
The following aviation data is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page:
Airport Symbols:
• Non-towered airports (purple in color).
• Towered airports (blue in color).
• Non-serviced airports (displayed as solid circle
icons). See Appendix F for symbology definitions.
• Serviced airports (displayed as circles with protruding tick marks pointing to the top, bottom,
left, and right portions of the screen).
Classification:
• Unclassified airports (displayed with a question
mark “?” character centered within the airport
symbol).
• Restricted airports (displayed with the letter “R”
centered within the airport symbol).
• Hard surface public airports (displayed with the
airports longest runway oriented according to
the direction in which it runs centered within the
airport symbol).
• Heliports (displayed with the letter “H” centered
within the heliport symbol).
• Soft surface public airports (displayed with a
hollow circle in the center of the airport symbol).
Airspace:
The Navigation Map Page displays airspace as one of
the following colors:
• Blue:
ICAO control area
Class B, Alert area
Caution area, Danger area, Prohibited area
Restricted area, Training area
Unknown area, Warning area
Terminal Zone Airspace (ATZ), Class D
7-12
• Purple:
Class C
ICAO terminal control area
Terminal radar service area (TRSA)
Mode C area
Military operations area (MOA)
Mode C
Class A
Class E
Line Style:
The Navigation Map Page displays airspace as one of
the following line styles:
• Solid line:
Class C
ICAO control area
ICAO terminal control area
Class B, Terminal radar service area
Mode C, Class A
• Dashed line:
Mode C tower area
Class D, Class E
• Consecutive parallel lines forming a
boundary defining the airspace:
Military operations area (MOA)
Warning area, Alert area, Caution area
Danger area, Prohibited area
Restricted area, Training area
Unknown area, Terminal Zone Airspace (ATZ)
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for a complete
description of the aviation map symbology used
on the Navigation Map Page.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Decluttering the Map
The Navigation Map Page can be quickly decluttered
by repeatedly pressing the DCLTR softkey until the desired
detail is displayed. The declutter level label is displayed
above the DCLTR softkey. Note that during an instrument
approach, automatic decluttering takes place. Table
7-1 lists the features that are turned off at each declutter
level.
Map Features always
displayed
Flight plan route lines
Flight plan route waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography data
Terrain Proximity data
Map Borders
Bearing Line
Lightning Strike data (when
Stormscope installed)
Nexrad data
Traffic Symbols
Traffic Labels
NOTE: Some of the map features are automatically removed at certain zoom ranges due to the
map setup configuration for each map item.
NOTE: “SUA” listed in the table below stands
for Special Use Airspace. These are controlled
airspaces, military zones, etc.
No Declutter
Declutter ( –1)
Declutter (-2)
Declutter (-3)
All Map features
are visible
River/Lakes Names Only
User waypoints
Large Airports
Land/Country Text
Large City
Medium City
Small City
----------Freeways
National Highways
Latitude/Longitude Grid
VORs
NDBs
Intersections
SUA Group 0
SUA Group 1
SUA Group 2
Medium Airports
Small Airports
SUA Group 3
SUA Group 4
Runway Labels
Local Highways
Local Roads
Local Road Labels
Railroads
Major Political Boundaries
SUA Group 5
SUA Group 6
SUA Group 7
Obstacles
Table 7-1 Map Declutter Levels
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-13
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Map Panning
To pan the map:
Map panning moves the map beyond its current
limits without adjusting the map range. When the
panning function is selected by pushing in the joystick,
a panning arrow flashes on the map display. A window
also appears at the top of the map display showing the
latitude/longitude position of the pointer, the bearing and
distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position,
and the elevation of the land at the position of the pointer.
When the panning arrow crosses an airspace boundary,
the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is displayed at the top of the display. The information
includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
expressed in Mean Seal Level (MSL), and the floor in feet
MSL.
1.
Push in the joystick to display the panning
arrow.
2.
Move the joystick in the general direction of
the desired destination to place the panning
arrow at the destination location. When the
panning arrow is placed on an object, the
name of the object is highlighted (even if the
name wasn’t originally displayed on the map).
This feature applies to everything displayed
on the map except route lines. When any
map feature or object is selected on the map
display, features or objects are displayed in
the box located at the top of the display. From
here, the pilot can designate the waypoint
as the Direct-to destination. When the
panning arrow crosses an airspace boundary,
the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is displayed at the top of the display.
3.
To remove the panning arrow and return to
the present position, push in the joystick.
NOTE: The airspace boundary stays highlighted
for approximately four seconds before returning
to normal shading.
7-14
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Distance,
bearing
and elevation
Latitude and longitude
position of pointer
Panning
Arrow
Figure 7-10 Map Panning
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-15
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Displaying Topo Data on the Nav Map Page
The Navigation Map Page displays various shades of
topography land colors representing the rise and fall of
land elevation similar to aviation sectional charts. The
Navigation Map Page can display a topographic scale
representing various key points of terrain elevation colors
with their associated elevation value labeled.
To display topographic data on the Navigation Map Page:
1.
Press the MAP softkey.
2.
Press the TOPO softkey. Topo data can also
be displayed on the Navigation Map Page by
using the ‘On/Off’ topo data map setup feature.
See the Navigation Map Page setup menu section.
On-screen map
maximum
elevation
On-screen map
minimum
elevation
Aircraft altitude
Maximum
Ground elevation
Minimum
Figure 7-11 Topography Range
7-16
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NOTE: Press the TOPO softkey again to remove
topo data from the Navigation Map Page.
When topo data is removed from the page,
the Jeppesen Nav data is presented on a black
background.
Displaying Terrain on the Navigation Map
Terrain data can be displayed on the Navigation
Map Page by pressing the TERRAIN softkey. Terrain
symbology (mountain icons) appear next to the map
range in the bottom right corner of the page indicating
the presence of terrain data on the map. See the
Terrain Proximity Page section for a terrain color
interpretation chart.
To display terrain data on the Navigation
Map Page:
Displaying Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
Pressing the TRAFFIC softkey displays Traffic
Information Service (TIS) traffic on the Navigation Map
Page. TIS is a ground-based service providing relative
location of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C transponder
equipped aircraft within a specified service volume.
The TIS ground sensor uses real time track reports to
generate traffic notification. Surveillance data includes
all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage
volume. The G1000 displays up to eight traffic targets
within a 7.5 nautical mile radius, from 3,000 feet below to
3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft. See Appendix E
for a full description of TIS. A traffic symbol appears next
to the map range in the bottom right corner of the display
indicating the presence of traffic data on the map.
To display traffic on the Navigation Map
Page:
1.
Press the MAP softkey.
1.
Press the MAP softkey.
2.
Press the TERRAIN softkey. Press the TERRAIN
softkey again to remove terrain data from the
Navigation Map Page.
2.
Press the TRAFFIC softkey. Press the
TRAFFIC softkey again to remove traffic from the
Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: Traffic and terrain data can also be
displayed by using the ‘On/Off’ Navigation Map
Page option. See the Navigation Map Page setup
section for details.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-17
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
MFD Data Bar
Map Setup
The MFD Navigation Status Window displays four,
user-configurable fields which can display the following
data:
The first option is ‘Map Setup’ which is used to configure
the Navigation Map Page including map orientation,
land data enable/disable, Jeppesen data enable/disable,
automatic zoom, airspace boundaries, and text size.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bearing to next waypoint (BRG)
Distance to next waypoint (DIS)
Desired track to next waypoint (DTK)
En-route safe altitude (ESA)
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Ground Speed (GS)
Maximum Safe Altitude (MSA)
Track angle error (TKE)
Track angle (TRK)
Vertical speed required (VSR)
Cross track error (XTK)
Currently selected MFD page title
Map Group Options
Figure 7-12 MFD Data Bar (default)
NOTE: Instructions on changing a data field on
the MFD Data Bar is given in the System Setup
Section.
Figure 7-13 Map Group Setup Options
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
The Navigation Map Page can be customized using
options listed in the Navigation Map Page menu. To display
the menu, press the MENU key (with the Navigation Map
Page displayed). Two options are available: Map Setup,
and Measure Bearing/Distance.
7-18
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Orientation
To change the map orientation:
There are four map orientation selections: North up,
Track up, DTK up, and HDG up.
• North up fixes the top of the map to a north heading.
• Track up adjusts the top of the map display to the
current ground track.
• Desired Track Up (DTK up) fixes the top of the
map display to the desired course.
• Heading Up (HDG up) fixes the top of the map
display to the current aircraft heading.
NOTE: The Navigation Map Page orientation
default setting is ‘North Up’.
NOTE: The Active Flight Plan Page and the
Nearest Pages use the same orientation that is
configured for the Navigation Map Page.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘ORIENTATION’ field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
orientation and press the ENT key.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-19
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Auto Zoom
Land Data
The automatic zoom feature automatically adjusts
the map range from 2000 nm through each lower
range, stopping at 1.5 nm as the aircraft approaches the
destination waypoint.
To enable/disable automatic zoom:
To enable/disable land data:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘AUTO
ZOOM’ field.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘LAND
DATA’ field.
5.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’
and press the ENT key.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off.’
and press the ENT key.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
1.
6.
7-20
The Navigation Map Page can display background land
data (roads, lakes, borders, etc). The background land
data can also be removed from the display (turned off).
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Track Vector
Wind Vector
The Navigation Map Page can display a track vector as
a dashed cyan line segment with an arrowhead attached
to the end, extended to a predicted location in 60 seconds
along the current aircraft track. The track vector is useful
in minimizing track angle error.
To enable/disable the track vector:
The wind vector box is displayed in the upper right
corner of the Navigation Map Page and displays wind
direction and speed (in knots). Wind direction is
indicated by a 360 degree pointing arrow.
To enable/disable the wind vector box:
1.
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘WIND
VECTOR’ field.
5.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’. Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’. Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
3.
6.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-21
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Nav Range Ring
Topo Data
The Nav range ring shows the direction of travel
(ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range of
the Nav compass is determined by the map range, 125 feet
(500 feet map range) to 500 nm (2000 nm map range).
To enable/disable the Nav range ring:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
Topographic data can be enabled or disabled on the
Navigation Map Page using the ‘TOPO DATA’ setting. The
topo data range is the maximum map range that topo data
is displayed.
To enable/disable topo data and to select a
topo data range:
1.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘NAV
RANGE RING’ field.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TOPO
DATA’ field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected option.
The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
TOPO ranges are from Off to 2000 nm.
7.
To change the TOPO range setting, turn the
small FMS knob to display the range list.
8.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range and press the ENT key.
9.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’. Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
NOTE: When topographic data is removed from
the Navigation Map Page, all cartographic data
is automatically removed and the Jeppesen Nav
data is presented on a black background.
7-22
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Topo Range
Terrain Data
The topo range setting enables or disables the
topography range box located in the lower right corner of
the Navigation Map Page.
To enable/disable the topo range box:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
Terrain data can be enabled or disabled on the
Navigation Map Page using the ‘TERRAIN DATA’ setting.
A data range can also be selected. The data range is the
maximum map range that terrain data is displayed.
To enable/disable terrain data and to select
a terrain data range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TOPO
Range’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TERRAIN DATA’ field.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected option.
The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
TERRAIN ranges are from Off to 2000 nm.
7.
To change the TERRAIN range setting, turn the
small FMS knob to display the range list.
8.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range and press the ENT key.
9.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-23
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Obstacle Data
Fuel Range Ring (Fuel RNG) (RSV)
Obstacle data can be enabled or disabled on the
Navigation Map Page using the ‘OBSTACLE DATA’ setting.
A data range can also be selected. The data range is the
maximum map range that terrain data is displayed.
To enable/disable obstacle data and to
select a terrain data range:
1.
7-24
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
The Navigation Map Page can display a fuel range
ring which shows the flight distance that the aircraft has
remaining. A dashed green circle indicates the transition
range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the
range of all fuel, including the reserve fuel. If only reserve
fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow
circle.
To enable/disable the fuel range ring and to
select a fuel range time:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
2.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘OBSTACLE DATA’ field.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected option.
The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
OBSTACLE ranges are from Off to 50 nm.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘FUEL
RNG (RSV)’ field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
7.
To change the OBSTACLE range setting, turn
the small FMS knob to display the range list.
6.
8.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range and press the ENT key.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected option.
The flashing cursor highlights the fuel reserve
time field. The time indicated is the time the
aircraft can fly with remaining fuel on board.
9.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page
7.
To change the reserve fuel time, turn either the
FMS knob to enter a time (00:00 to 23:59;
hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes. Press the ENT key.
8.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Traffic Group
The display of traffic information on the Navigation
Map Page closely resembles TCAS display symbology.
Traffic is only displayed on the Navigation Map Page if
aircraft heading data is available. If heading is not
available, traffic advisories are displayed as non-bearing
banners on the Navigation Map Page.
To enable/disable traffic data on the Navigation Map Page:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Traffic’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
5.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
The ‘Traffic’ mode selects which traffic is displayed (all
traffic, traffic and proximity advisories, or traffic advisories
only). The traffic symbol is the symbol used to depict the
type of traffic:
• Traffic Advisories (TA) – Yellow
• Proximity Advisories (PA) – White
• Other – White
Figure 7-14 Traffic Group Options
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Proximity Advisories (PAs) are displayed as solid white
Beechcrafts. PAs are defined as traffic within the 4.0 nm
range, within ± 1200 ft. of altitude separation, and are not
traffic advisories (TAs).
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-25
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To select a traffic mode:
To select a traffic symbol zoom range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Traffic’
group Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Traffic’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TRAFFIC MODE’ field.
4.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
option.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘TRAFFIC SMBL’ field. Traffic symbol zoom
ranges are from Off to 300 nm.
5.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
option.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
6.
7.
7-26
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
The traffic label displays the altitude separation above
or below the symbol and the vertical speed sense arrow to
the right of the symbol.
To select a traffic label zoom range:
1.
2.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Traffic’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘TRAFFIC LBL’ field. Traffic label zoom ranges
are from Off to 300 nm.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
option.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
• Large, Medium, and Small Airports (LARGE APT,
MEDIUM APT, SMALL APT) - The airport label size sets
the size at which the large, medium, or small airport
names size appear on the display. The zoom range sets
the maximum range at which the airports appear on the
display:
• Large: off - 500 nm
• Medium: off - 300 nm
• Small: off - 100 nm
• Intersection, Non-Directional Beacon, and VOR
Waypoints (INT WAYPOINT, NDB WAYPOINT, VOR
WAYPOINT) - The INT, NDB, and VOR label size sets the
maximum range at which the navaids names appear on
the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at
which the navaids appear on the display:
• INT: off - 30 nm
• NDB: off - 30 nm
• VOR: off - 300 nm
Aviation Group Options
• Active Flight Plan (ACTIVE FPL)- the active flight
plan zoom range sets the maximum range at which the
active flight plan magenta line is displayed on the display
(off - 2000 nm).
• Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)the active flight plan waypoint label size sets the size at
which the active flight plan names appear on the display
(none, small, medium, and large). The zoom range sets
the maximum range at which active flight plan waypoints
appear on the display (off - 2000 nm).
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-27
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
• Airspace Boundaries (CLASS B/TMA, CLASS C/TCA,
and CLASS D) - The airspace zoom range sets the maximum
range at which the three classes of airspace appear on the
display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which
the airspace boundaries appear on the display:
• CLASS B: off - 500 nm
• CLASS C: off - 500 nm
• CLASS D: off - 300 nm
• “Other” Airspace Boundaries (RESTRICTED, MOA
(Military), OTHER AIRSPACE, nad TFR (temporary flight
restrictions)- the other airspace boundary zoom range
sets the maximum range at which restricted, MOA, and
other (training, caution, danger, warning and alert areas)
airspace boundaries are displayed
•
•
•
•
RESTRICTED: off - 500 nm
MOA (MILITARY): off - 500 nm
OTHER AIRSPACE: off - 500 nm
TFR; (only present when GDL 69 is installed): off
- 2000 nm
To select an aviation group item range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Aviation’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Figure 7-15 Aviation Group Options
7-28
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To select an aviation group item text size:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Aviation’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
text size.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected text
size.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
• Cities and Towns (LARGE CITY, MEDIUM CITY,
SMALL CITY) - The cities and town label size sets the
maximum range at which city and town names appear on
the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at
which cities and towns appear on the display:
• LARGE CITY (approximate populations greater
than 200,000): off - 1500 nm
• MEDIUM CITY (approximate populations greater
than 50,000): off - 200 nm
• SMALL CITY (approximate populations greater
than 5,000): off - 50 nm
Land Group Options
• Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON) - the LAT/LON label
size sets the size at which latitude/longitude labels appear
on the display (none, small, medium, and large). The
zoom range sets the maximum range at which LAT/LON
waypoints appear on the display (off - 2000 nm).
• Highways, Roads, and Railroads (FREEWAY, LOCAL
HWY, LOCAL ROAD, RAILROAD) - The highway and
road zoom range sets the maximum range at which
highways, roads, and railroads appear on the display:
•
•
•
•
•
FREEWAY: off - 800 nm
NATIONAL HWY: off - 80 nm
LOCAL HWY: off - 30 nm
LOCAL ROAD: off - 15 nm
RAILROAD: off - 30 nm
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-29
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
• States and Provinces, Rivers and Lakes, and
User Waypoints (STATE/PROV, RIVER/LAKE, USER
WAYPOINT) - the label range sets the maximum range
at which the three categories appear on the display. The
zoom range sets the maximum range at which the three
categories appear on the display:
• STATE/PROV: off - 1500 nm
• RIVER/LAKE off - 500 nm
• USER WAYPOINT: off - 300 nm
To select a land group item range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Land’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range. Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
To select a land group item text size:
Figure 7-16 Land Group Options
7-30
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Land’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
text size. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected option
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Measure Bearing/Distance
The second map setup option is ‘Measure Bearing/
Distance’ which provides a quick and easy method for
determining the bearing and distance between any two
points on the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: Pressing the ENT key at any location with
the ‘Measure’ option enabled allows bearing and
distance from the newly selected position to be
acquired.
To measure bearing and distance between
two points:
1.
Press the MENU key (with the Navigation Map
Page displayed).
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the
‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field and press
the ENT key. An on-screen reference pointer
is displayed on the map display at the aircraft’s
present position.
3.
Move the joystick to place the reference
pointer at the desired location. The bearing
and distance is displayed at the top of the map
display. Elevation at the current position is also
displayed.
4.
To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option,
push in the joystick or select ‘Stop Measuring’
from the page menu options.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-31
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Bearing,
Distance, and
Elevation
Information
Pointer
Latitude and
Longitude
Reference
Pointer
Figure 7-17 Measuring Bearing and Distance
7-32
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.3 TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
CAUTION: Use of the Traffic Map to maneuver
the airplane to avoid traffic is prohibited. The
Traffic Information System (TIS) is intended
for advisory use only. TIS is intended only to
help the pilot to visually locate traffic. It is the
responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver
to avoid traffic.
The Traffic Map Page is the second page in the Map
Group and displays the following information:
• Current aircraft location, surrounding Traffic
Information System (TIS) traffic, and range marking rings.
• The current traffic mode (OPERATE, STANDBY).
• A traffic alert message (FAILED, DATA FAILED,
NO DATA, UNAVAILABLE)
• Traffic display banner (AGE 00:, TRFC COAST,
TA OFF Range, TRFC RMVD, TRFC FAIL, NO
TRFC DATA, TRFC UNAVAIL, TRAFFIC)
To select the Traffic Map Page:
1.
Select the MAP group of pages. Turn the small
FMS knob to the right to select the Traffic Map
Page.
Traffic Mode
Map Range
Traffic, Out of
Range
Own Aircraft
Proximate,
Known Altitude
Traffic
Figure 7-18 Traffic Map Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-33
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
TIS SYMBOLOGY
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE OPERATIONS
TIS traffic is displayed on the Traffic Map Page
according to TCAS symbology. A Traffic Advisory (TA)
symbol is displayed as a solid yellow circle (or half circle
on the outer range ring if the traffic is outside the range
of the Traffic Map Page). All other traffic is displayed
as a solid or hollow white diamond. Altitude deviation
from the user’s aircraft altitude is displayed above the
target symbol if they are above own aircraft altitude, and
below the symbol if they are below own aircraft altitude.
Altitude trend is displayed as an up arrow (+500 ft/min),
down arrow (-500 ft/min), or no symbol if less than 500
ft/min rate in either direction. Other symbols:
• Other Traffic – this symbol represents traffic
detected within the selected display range that
does not generate a TA.
• Traffic Advisory (TA) – this symbol is generated
when traffic meets the advisory criteria described
previously.
• Traffic Ground Track is indicated on the Traffic
Map Page by a “target track vector”. The track
vector line is projected from the traffic advisory
symbol and is drawn at any angle necessary to
represent the current track of the traffic advisory
data.
NOTE: Traffic Information Service (TIS) is not
available in all areas.
Power-Up Test
The TIS interface performs an automatic test during
power-up. If the system passes the power-up test, the
standby screen is displayed on the Traffic Map Page. If the
system passes the power-up test, and the aircraft is
airborne, traffic is displayed on the Traffic Page in the
operating mode.
If the system fails the power up test, the ‘NO DATA’,
‘DATA FAILED’, or ‘FAILED’ message is displayed.
Contact your Beechcraft service center or Garmin dealer
for corrective action if the ‘DATA FAILED’, or ‘FAILED’
message is displayed. The ‘FAILED’ message indicates
the GTX 33 transponder has failed. The ‘DATA FAILED’
message indicates data is being received from the GTX 33
but a failure was detected in the data stream. The ‘NO
DATA’ message indicates that data is not being received
from the GTX 33.
Changing the Map Range
To change the map range:
1.
Turn the joystick clockwise to zoom out, or
turn the joystick counter-clockwise to zoom
in. Map ranges are 2 nm, 6 nm, and 12 nm.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for traffic symbol
descriptions.
7-34
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Operating Mode
OR:
Once the aircraft is airborne (determined by system
configuration at the time of installation) the system
switches from standby mode to operating mode. The
G1000 displays ‘TIS OPERATING’ in the upper left
hand corner of the display and begins to display traffic
on the Traffic or Map Page. The TIS Traffic Advisory
(TA) should alert the crew to use additional vigilance
to identify the intruding aircraft. Any time the traffic
symbol becomes a yellow circle or a voice warning is
announced, conduct a visual search for the intruder.
Maintain visual contact to ensure safe operation.
Once the aircraft is on the ground (determined by
system configuration at the time of installation) the
system switches from operating mode to standby mode. The
Traffic Map Page displays ‘STANDBY’.
• STANDBY – when the Traffic Map Page displays
‘TIS STANDBY’ in the status box located in the
upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page, the TIS
system is in standby mode and cannot display
traffic data.
• OPERATE – when the Traffic Map Page displays
‘TIS OPERATING’ in the status box located in the
left corner of the Traffic Map Page, the TIS system
is in operational mode and available to display
traffic on the Traffic or Map Page.
2.
Press the MENU key. The page menu is
displayed with ‘Standby Mode’ or ‘Operate
Mode’ highlighted. Press the ENT key on the
desired selection.
TIS Audio Alert
A TIS audio alert is generated whenever the number
of TAs on the Traffic Map Page display increases from one
scan to the next. The limiting to TAs only reduces the
amount of “nuisance” alerting due to proximate aircraft.
For example, when the first TA is displayed, the pilot is
alerted audibly. So long as a single TA aircraft remains on
the TIS display, no further audio alert is generated. If a
second (or more) TA aircraft appear on the display, a new
audio alert is sounded. If the number of TAs on the TIS
display decreases and then increases, a new audio alert is
sounded. The TIS audio alert is also generated whenever
TIS service becomes unavailable. The volume of the audio
alert (including the choice between a male or female voice)
is configured during installation. The following TIS audio
alerts are available:
• “Traffic” - TIS traffic alert is received.
• “Traffic Not Available” - TIS service is not available
or out of range.
The pilot can switch between the standby (STBY)
and operate (OPERATE) modes of operation to manually
override automatic operation using the page menu or
softkeys.
To switch between operating modes:
1.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Press the STANDBY or OPERATE softkey to
switch between modes. ‘STANDBY’ or ‘OPERATE’ is displayed in the status box located in
the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-35
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
TIS Traffic Status
The MFD indicates the following TIS traffic status to
the pilot.
Traffic Banner
• AGE - if traffic data is not refreshed within 6
seconds, an age indicator (i.e., ‘AGE 00:06’) is
displayed in the lower left corner of the display
(when displaying traffic). After another 6
seconds, if data is still not received, the traffic
is removed from the display. The pilot should
be aware that the quality of displayed traffic is
reduced in this condition.
• TRFC COAST - the ‘TRFC COAST’ (traffic
coasting) banner located above the AGE timer
indicates that displayed traffic is held even though
the data is stale. The pilot should be aware that
the quality of displayed traffic is reduced in this
condition.
7-36
• TRFC RMVD - the ‘TRFC RMVD’ banner indicates
that traffic has been removed from the display due
to the age of the data being too old to “coast” (for
the time period of 12-60 seconds from the last
receipt of a TIS message). The pilot should be
aware that traffic may be present but not shown.
• TA OFF - the ‘TA OFF’ scale banner displayed in
the lower left corner of the display indicates that
a traffic advisory is outside the selected display
range. The traffic advisory off range banner is
removed when the traffic advisory is within the
selected display range.
• TRAFFIC - on the PFD, when the system receives
a traffic advisory a flashing ‘TRAFFIC’ alert is
displayed in the upper left hand portion of the
display. The PFD inset map also automatically
displays traffic data.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.4 TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
CAUTION: Use of Terrain Proximity information
for primary terrain avoidance is prohibited.
The Terrain Proximity Map is intended only to
enhance situational awareness. It is the pilot’s
responsibility to provide terrain avoidance at all
times.
• Terrain
• Terrain Range - Indicates the terrain elevation in
colors relative to the aircraft altitude (Figure 7-11)
• Obstacles
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the
aircraft latitude is greater than 75 degrees north
or 60 degrees south.
The Terrain Proximity Page displays the following:
• Current aircraft location
• Range marking rings (25 nm, 25/50 nm, 50/100
nm, and 100/200 nm)
• Heading Box (North Up, Track Up, DTK Up,
HDG Up). Heading on the Terrain Proximity Page
displays ‘HDG Up’ map data unless there is no
valid heading
Page Orientation
Obstacles
Range Marking Ring
Current Aircraft
Location
Terrain Range
View Selection
Figure 7-19 Terrain Proximity Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-37
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE OPERATIONS
There are two terrain/obstacle viewing options available
(relative to the position of the aircraft), a radar-like ARC
(120°) display and a 360° default display.
To change the map range on the Terrain
Proximity Page:
1.
To change the viewing mode between 360°
and ARC:
1.
Select the Terrain Proximity Page
2.
Press the VIEW softkey. Press the ARC
softkey.
3.
To return to the 360 degree viewing display
press the 360 softkey OR:
4.
Press the MENU key. The page menu is
displayed with ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’
highlighted. Press the ENT key on the desired
selection.
Turn the joystick clockwise zoom out or turn
the joystick counter-clockwise zoom in. Map
ranges are 25 nm, 25/50 nm, 50/100 nm, and
100/200 nm.
Aircraft Altitude
100' Threshold
1000' AGL
Figure 7-20 Terrain Scale
7-38
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
DISPLAYING OBSTACLE DATA
The Terrain Proximity Page displays obstacle data
with heights greater than 200 feet Above Ground Level
(AGL) located at their geographical position location throughout the world. Obstacles are displayed
in three levels. The G1000 will adjust colors on the
Terrain Proximity Page automatically as the aircraft
altitude changes. The display color patterns are as
follows:
• SAFE
• CAUTION
• WARNING
GRAY-Safe
Obstacle data is displayed in gray when the
obstacle height (MSL) is greater than 1000 feet below
the current aircraft altitude.
Navigation Map Display Conditions
The Map Setup Page Menu has ‘OBSTACLE’ and
‘TERRAIN feature On/Off options. The Terrain Proximity
Page displays or does not display obstacles on the
Navigation Map Page based on the selection of each as
summarized in the table below:
TERRAIN
FEATURE
OBSTACLE
FEATURE
TERRAIN
PROXIMITY PAGE
OFF
OFF
NO OBSTACLES
DISPLAYED
OFF
ON
SAFE, CAUTION, AND
WARNING OBSTACLES
DISPLAYED
ON
OFF
CAUTION AND
WARNING OBSTACLES
DISPLAYED
ON
ON
SAFE, CAUTION, AND
WARNING OBSTACLES
DISPLAYED
YELLOW-Caution
Obstacle data is displayed in yellow when the
obstacle height is 100 feet below MSL the current
aircraft altitude to 1000 feet below the current aircraft
altitude.
RED-Critical
Obstacle data is displayed in red when the obstacle
height is at or above 100 feet Mean Sea Level (MSL)
below the current aircraft altitude.
Note: Obstacles are only displayed at certain
map zoom ranges, on certain map fields, and
will only be displayed if an obstacle database is
loaded on the SD card.
Note: The table above is only for the Navigation
Map Page. The Terrain Proximity Page always
shows ONLY caution and warning obstacles.
Obstacle Shapes
Obstacle shapes and defining criteria are found in
Appendix F.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-39
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.5 TAWS (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the
aircraft latitude is greater than 75 degrees north
or 60 degrees south.
NOTE: TAWS operation is only available when the
G1000 is configured for a TAWS-B installation.
Figure 7-21 TAWS Page Menu
Displaying Terrain on the TAWS Page
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the Map Page
Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the TAWS
Page.
3.
If desired, press the VIEW softkey to access the
ARC and 360 softkeys. When the ARC softkey
is pressed, a radar-like 120° view is displayed.
Press the 360 softkey to return to the 360°
default display.
4.
Rotate the JOYSTICK clockwise to display a
larger area or rotate counter-clockwise to
display a smaller area.
Figure 7-22 TAWS Page (360˚ View)
Enable/Disable Aviation Data
1.
While the TAWS Page is displayed, press the
MENU key.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select “Show (or
Hide) Aviation Data”.
3.
Press the ENT key.
Figure 7-23 TAWS Page (ARC View)
7-40
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Color
Alert Level
Suggested Pilot Response
Terrain/Obstacle at or within 100’
below current aircraft altitude.
WARNING
Initiate climb and/or turn away from
terrain/obstacle.
Yellow
Terrain/Obstacle between 100’ and
1000’ below current aircraft altitude.
CAUTION
Be aware of surroundings.
Be prepared to take action.
Black
Terrain/Obstacle is more than 1000’
below aircraft altitude.
NO DANGER
No action required.
Red
Terrain/Obstacle Location
Potential Impact Point
Projected Flight Path
100' Threshold
Unlighted Obstacle
1000' AGL
Manual System Test
TAWS Inhibit
Flying VFR into an area where unique terrain exists
could cause the system to annunciate a nuisance alert.
Only FLTA and PDA alerts are disabled.
To Inhibit TAWS:
1. While the TAWS Page is displayed, press the
MENU key.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to select‘Inhibit
TAWS’.
3. Press the ENT key.
To Enable TAWS:
1. While the TAWS Page is displayed, press the
MENU key.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Enable
TAWS’.
3. Press the ENT key.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
A system test is automatically performed at power-up.
After sucessful completion of the test, “TAWS System
Test, OK” will be heard.
The system test may also be initiated manually, but
only when the aircraft is on the ground. To manually verify
proper operation of the aural and visual annunciations
of the system, perform the following steps.
1. While the TAWS Page is displayed, press the
MENU key.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test
TAWS’.
3
Press the ENT key. During the test ‘TAWS TEST’
is displayed in the center of the TAWS Page.
When all is in working order, “TAWS System
Test, OK” will be heard.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-41
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
Premature Descent Alert (PDA)
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance alert is
composed of two sub-functions:
A Premature Descent Alert is issued when the system
detects that the aircraft is significantly below the normal
approach path to a runway. The PDA alert mode functions
only during descent to land. There are three different
scenarios to consider with PDA:
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and
Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
This provides alerts when the aircraft flight path
is above terrain and/or obstacles, yet is projected to
come within minimum clearance values outlined in the
following table. When an RTC or ROC alert is issued, a
potential impact point is displayed on the TAWS Page as
a yellow or red ‘X’.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent
Obstacle Impact (IOI)
This provides alerts when the aircraft is below the
elevation of terrain in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and
IOI alerts are accompanied by a potential impact point
displayed on the TAWS Page as a yellow or red ‘X’. The
alert is given when the projected vertical flight path is
calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes
in the following table.
Phase of Flight
Level Flight
Descending
Enroute
700 ft.
500 ft.
Terminal
350 ft.
300 ft.
Approach
150 ft.
100 ft.
Departure
100 ft.
100 ft.
During the final approach phase of flight, RTC/ROC/
ITI/IOI alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft
is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 nm of the approach
runway or is below 125 feet AGL while within 1 nm of the
runway.
• No Approach Loaded - PDA alerting begins when
the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport
and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 nm from the
runway threshold OR is at an altitude of 125 feet
AGL while within 1 nm of the threshold. During
the final descent, algorithms will set a threshold
for alerting based on speed, distance, and other
parameters.
• Non-Precision Approach Loaded - PDA alerting
begins when the FAF is the active waypoint AND the
aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport.
Again, algorithms are used to set a threshold for
alerting based upon various parameters. PDA
alerting ends at 0.5 nm from the runway threshold
OR at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1
nm of the threshold.
• ILS Approach Loaded—PDA alerting begins when
the FAF is the active waypoint AND the aircraft is
within 15 nm of the destination airport. Once the
aircraft intercepts the glideslope, PDA will alert the
pilot if the aircraft descends 0.7 degrees below the
glideslope. PDA alerting ends 0.5 nm from the
runway threshold OR at an altitude of 125 feet AGL
while within 1 nm of the threshold.
Glideslope Intercept
Final Approach Fix
200' below FAF Altitude
Runway Threshold
CAUTION
0.5 nm
PDA Alert is
0.7 Below Glideslope
15 nm
Figure 7-24 ILS Approach PDA Alert Threshold
7-42
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff
Alert (NCR)
Final Approach Fix
200' below FAF Altitude
Runway Threshold
CAUTION
0. 5 n m
15 nm
Figure 7-25 Non-Precision Approach PDA Alert Threshold
Excessive Descent Rate Alert (EDR)
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate alert is to
provide suitable alerts when the aircraft is determined to
be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed.
Figure 7-27 displays the correlation between height above
terrain and descent rate, resulting in the two EDR alerts.
EDR alerts have two levels of severity, caution (sink rate)
and warning (pull-up).
5000
"
K
RA
TE
4000
IN
3500
"S
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
The purpose of the Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff
alert is to provide suitable alerts to the pilot when the
system determines that the aircraft is losing altitude
(closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message
“Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an
annunciation and a pop-up terrain alert on the display.
NCR is only activated during the departure phase of
flight under the following conditions:
A) height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
B) the aircraft is less than 2 nm from the departure
airport
C) heading change from the departure heading is less
than 110 degrees.
“Five-Hundred” Aural Alert
The purpose of the aural alert message “Five-hundred”
is to provide an advisory alert to the aircrew that the
aircraft is five-hundred feet above terrain. When the
aircraft descends within 500 feet of terrain, the aural
message “Five-hundred” is heard. There are no display
annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the aural
message.
This function is enabled when the aircraft’s height
above the terrain is more than 675 feet. It is disabled
when the aircraft’s height above the terrain becomes less
than 500 feet.
3000
2500
2000
1500
UP"
PULL UP"
""PULL
1000
500
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
12000
Descent Rate (FPM)
Figure 7-26 Excessive Descent Rate
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-43
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Displaying Terrain and Obstacles on the Nav
Map
1.
2.
With the Navigation Map displayed, press the
MAP softkey.
Press the TERRAIN softkey. Terrain and obstacle
proximity will now be displayed on the map.
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000’ AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000’ AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000’ AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000’ AGL)
Potential Impact Points
Figure 7-28 TAWS Symbols
Maximum
elevation of
topography presently
displayed on-screen
Minimum
elevation of
topography presently
displayed on-screen
Pop-up Alerts
When the Navigation Map Page is displayed, and a
terrain or obstacle alert is issured, a pop-up window is
displayed with the appropriate alert.
Press the ENT key to display the TAWS Page, or press
the CLR key to remain on the Navigation Map Page.
Aircraft altitude
Range of
topography elevation presently displayed on-screen
Ground elevation
at present aircraft
position
Figure 7-27 Topography Scale
Figure 7-28 Alert Pop-Up
7-44
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
TAWS Alerts Summary
The following table shows the possible TAWS alert types
with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
PFD/MFD TAWS
Page
Annunciation
Alert Type
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
“Sink Rate”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
or
190-00629-00 Rev. B
“Five-Hundred”
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
7-45
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
The following system status annunciations may also be
issued.
PFD/MFD TAWS
Page
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
TAWS System Test Fail
None
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
No GPS position or excessively degraded
GPS signal
None
“TAWS Not Available”
System Test in progress
None
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
Alert Type
System Test pass
None
Alert Annunciations
Alert Annunciation
Figure 7-30 Alert Annunciation on the PFD
Alert Annuciation
Figure 7-29 Alert Annunciation on the TAWS Page
7-46
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.5 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
The “Direct-to” function provides a quick method
of setting a course to a destination waypoint. Once a
Direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-topoint course line from the present position to the selected
Direct-to destination. If the course change is greater than
30 degrees, a course extension is offset from the present
position to allow a standard rate turn to intercept the
Direct-to course line. Note that the CDI (HSI) needle will
not be immediately centered in this case. Direct-to course
guidance is provided until the Direct-to is cancelled or
replaced by a new destination, and the navigation data is
displayed on the Navigation Map Page
Identifier
Facility Name
City
Symbol
Flight Plan Field
Nearest Airport
Map Orientation
To select a Direct-to destination:
1.
Press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to page
is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to enter the first letter
of the destination waypoint identifier. The
destination waypoint may be an airport, VOR,
NDB, intersection or user waypoint, as long as
it is in the database or stored in memory as a
user waypoint. Turn the large FMS knob to the
right to move the cursor to the next character
position.
3.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to spell out the rest of
the waypoint identifier.
4.
Press the ENT key to confirm the identifier. The
‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
5.
Press the ENT key to activate a Direct-to course
to the selected destination.
If navigating to a waypoint and the aircraft moves off
course, the Direct-to feature can be used to re-center the
CDI (HSI) needle and proceed to the same waypoint.
To re-center the CDI (HSI) needle to the
same destination waypoint:
Map of the
Selected
Waypoint
1.
Map Range
Bearing
Distance
Region
Latitude/
Longitude
Direct-to
Course
Activate Field
Press the Direct-to key, followed by pressing the ENT key twice. NOTE: If navigating
an approach with the missed approach point
(MAP) as the current destination, re-centering
the CDI (HSI) needle with the Direct-to key
cancels the approach.
Figure 7-31 Direct-to Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-47
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION OPERATIONS
To select a Direct-to destination by facility
name or city:
Selecting a Direct-to Waypoint
1.
Press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to Page is
displayed with the waypoint identifier field
highlighted.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the facility
or city name field.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knob to enter
the facility or city location of the desired
waypoint.
In addition to selecting a Direct-to waypoint using
an identifier, a Direct-to waypoint can be selected in the
following ways:
• by facility or city name
• from the active flight plan
• from the nearest airports list
• from a waypoint field, waypoint page, or map
highlight shortcut
NOTE: the “Spell N Find” feature selects the first
entry in the database based on the characters
that have been entered to that point.
Selecting a Direct-to Destination by Facility or City
Name
In addition to selecting a destination by identifier, the
Direct-to Page also allows the selection of airports, VORs
and NDBs by facility or city name. If duplicate entries
exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries
can be viewed by continuing to turn the small FMS knob
during the selection process.
7-48
4.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to scroll
through any additional database listings for
the selected facility name or city. The small
FMS knob can be used to scroll backwards if
the desired waypoint was passed up.
5.
Press the ENT key to confirm the selected
waypoint, and ENT again to activate a Directto.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Selecting a Direct-to Destination from the Active
Flight Plan
Any waypoint contained in the flight plan may be
selected as a Direct-to destination from the Direct-to
Waypoint Page when navigating an active flight plan.
To select a Direct-to destination from the
active flight plan:
1.
Press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to Waypoint
Page is displayed with the waypoint identifier
field highlighted.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the flight
plan ‘FPL’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
showing all waypoints in the active flight
plan.
4.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to scroll
through the list and highlight the desired
waypoint.
5.
Press the ENT key to confirm the selected
waypoint, and ENT again to activate a Directto.
Figure 7-32 Flight Plan Waypoint Direct-to
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-49
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct-to
Destination
The Direct-to Page always displays the nearest airports
(from the present position) on the NRST field.
To select a nearby airport as a Direct-to
destination:
1.
Press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to Page is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the nearest airport field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
showing up to ten nearby airports.
4.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to scroll
through the list and highlight the desired airport.
5.
Press the ENT key to confirm the selected
waypoint, and ENT again to activate a Directto.
• The waypoint displayed on the VOR waypoint
page.
• The waypoint displayed on the NDB waypoint
page.
• The waypoint displayed on the intersection
waypoint page.
• The waypoint displayed on the user waypoint
page.
Shortcuts
Shortcuts are available when using the Direct-to key,
allowing the pilot to bypass the use of the FMS knobs.
Any time a waypoint field is highlighted and then the
Direct-to key is pressed, the highlighted waypoint will be
the direct-to waypoint.
The following are “candidates” for Direct-to
waypoints:
Figure 7-33 Nearest Airport Direct-to
• The highlighted waypoint when map panning
with the MFD map panning pointer.
• The highlighted waypoint identifier field on any
page.
• The airport waypoint page airport when on
the airport information, arrival, departure, or
approach pages.
7-50
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
Specifying a Course to a Waypoint
Once a Direct-to is activated, the G1000 provides
navigation guidance to the selected destination until the
Direct-to is either replaced with a new Direct-to or flight
plan, or cancelled, or if the unit is turned off.
During a Direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle
course to the selected destination. The course to the
destination, using the course field on the Direct-to Page
can be manually defined.
To cancel a Direct-to:
To manually define the Direct-to course:
1.
Press the Direct-to key to display the Direct-to
Page.
2.
Press the MENU key to display the Direct-to
options menu.
3.
With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press
the ENT key. If a flight plan is still active, the
G1000 resumes navigating the flight plan
along the closest leg.
1.
Press the Direct-to key.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
the destination waypoint.
3.
Press the ENT key to confirm the selected
waypoint, then turn the large FMS knob to
highlight the course field.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
the desired course and press the ENT key.
5.
Press the ENT key again to begin navigation
using the selected destination and course.
Figure 7-34 Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
Figure 7-35 Manual Course Direct-to
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-51
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
This page intentionally left blank.
7-52
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.6 FLIGHT PLANS
The G1000 can create up to 99 different flight plans
with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan. The flight
plan (FPL) page group consists of three pages:
• Active Flight Plan
• Flight Plan Catalog
• Vertical Navigation
The Flight Plan Pages are used to create, edit and copy
flight plans. The Vertical Navigation Page is used to create
a three-dimensional profile which guides the aircraft to a
final (target) altitude at a specified location.
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE
The Active Flight Plan Page provides information
and editing functions for the flight plan currently in
use for navigation. Once a Direct-to or flight plan has
been activated, the Active Flight Plan Page shows the
following:
• Each waypoint for the flight plan (or a single
waypoint for a Direct-to), along with the desired
track (DTK) and distance of each leg (DIS).
• Active leg information with enroute safe altitude
(ESA) for the specified leg.
• Active FPL information with enroute safe altitude
(ESA)
• Flight plan information showing remaining leg
and remaining total distance, and enroute safe
altitude for the entire route.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
The data fields are user-selectable and can be changed
to display the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cumulative Distance (CUM)
Distance (DIS)
Desired Track (DTK)
Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE OPTIONS
The following options are available for the Flight Plan
Page:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Activate Leg
Store Flight Plan
Invert Flight Plan
Delete Flight Plan
Load Departure
Load Arrival
Load Approach
Remove Arrival
Remove Departure
Remove Approach
Closest Point of FPL
Change Fields
Restore Defaults
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-53
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Departure Airport
Identifier
Destination
Airport
Identifier
Active Leg
Active Leg
Information
Estimated Safe
Altitude
Create a New Flight Plan
‘Create New Flight Plan’ creates a new flight plan.
To create a new flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan
Catalog Page options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Create
New Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
4.
A blank flight plan page appears for the first
empty storage location. Turn the small and
large FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the
departure waypoint and press the ENT key.
5.
Repeat step number 4 to enter the identifier
for each additional flight plan waypoint.
6.
Once all waypoints have been entered, press
the FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan
Catalog Page.
Flight Plan
Information
Flight Plan
Page Group
Figure 7-36 Active Flight Plan Page
Active Flight
Plan Page
Figure 7-37 New Flight Plan
7-54
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Activate Leg
To edit a flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the ENT key.
To activate a flight plan along a specific
leg:
4.
To add a waypoint to the flight plan: Turn the
large FMS knob to select the point where the
new waypoint is to be added. (If an existing
waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is
placed directly in front of this waypoint.) Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the new waypoint and press the
ENT key.
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the FMS
knob to activate the cursor and turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the desired destination
waypoint.
2.
Press the MENU key, select the ‘Activate Leg’
option from the page menu and press the ENT
key.
3.
A confirmation window is displayed. With
‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
5.
6.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
To delete a waypoint from the flight plan: Turn
the large FMS knob to select the waypoint
to delete and press the CLR key to display a
remove waypoint confirmation window. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to remove
the waypoint. To cancel, turn the large FMS
knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
key.
Once all changes have been made, press the
FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog
Page.
Activate Leg selects the highlighted leg as the “active
leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used for
navigation guidance).
NOTE: The leg can also be activated by pressing
the ACT LEG softkey.
Figure 7-38 Activate Flight Plan Leg Confirmation
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-55
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Store Flight Plan
To store an existing flight plan:
Whenever an approach, departure or arrival is loaded
into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along
with a header line describing the instrument procedure
the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the
flight plan remains active (unless an instrument procedure
is activated) which may be done when the procedure is
loaded or at a later time. Flight plans can also be stored
with an approach, departure or arrival. The active
flight plan is erased when the system is turned off and
overwritten when another flight plan is activated.
1.
From the Flight Plan Page, press the FMS knob
to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Page options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Store
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key. The flight
plan is stored in the next available position in
the flight plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog
Page.
4.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to
store the flight plan.
When storing flight plans with an approach, departure
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information
from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically
updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure or arrival procedure
is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
flight plan and an alert is displayed.
7-56
Figure 7-39 Store Flight Plan Confirmation
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Invert Flight Plan
Delete a Waypoint
‘Invert Fight Plan’ reverses the active flight plan. After
traveling along a flight plan, the route can be reversed for
navigation guidance back to the original departure point.
To invert and (activate) an existing flight
plan:
1.
From the Flight Plan Page, press the FMS knob
to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Page options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Invert
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key. The original flight plan remains intact in its flight plan
catalog storage location.
4.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to
invert the flight plan.
To delete a waypoint from an existing flight
plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the waypoint
to delete and press the CLR key to display a
‘REMOVE WAYPOINT’ confirmation window.
5.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to
remove the waypoint. To cancel the delete
request, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
6.
Once all changes have been made, press the
FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan Page.
Figure 7-42 Remove Waypoint Confirmation
Figure 7-40 Invert Flight Plan
Figure 7-41 Invert Flight Plan Confirmation
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-57
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Load a Departure
‘Load Departure’ allows a published departure
procedure for the departure airport to be loaded into a
flight plan. It also replaces the current departure with a
new selection. When using a Direct-to, the G1000 uses
the nearest airport as a reference when displaying available
departures. A departure can also loaded using the PROC
key or by pressing the LD DP softkey.
Figure 7-43 Loading Departure Options
7-58
To select a departure procedure for the
departure airport:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
2.
Highlight ‘Load Departure’ from the list and
press the ENT key.
3.
A window is displayed listing the available
departures for the departure airport. Turn the
FMS knob to select the desired departure and
press the ENT key.
4.
A window may appear listing runways for the
departure. Turn the FMS knob to select the
desired runway and press the ENT key. This
window is not displayed for every departure.
5.
A second window is displayed listing available transitions for the departure. Turn the
FMS knob to highlight the desired transition
waypoint and press the ENT key.
6.
With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
The departure flight plan is displayed as part
of the overall flight plan and is placed in front
of the enroute flight plan.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Load an Arrival
‘Load Arrival’ allows a published standard terminal
arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport to be
loaded into a flight plan. It also replaces the current arrival
with a new selection. An arrival can also be loaded using
the PROC key or by pressing the LD STAR softkey.
To select an arrival for a Direct-to or flight
plan destination airport:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
2.
Highlight the ‘Load Arrival’ option and press
the ENT key.
3.
A window is displayed listing the available
arrivals for the destination airport. Turn the
FMS knob to select the desired arrival and
press the ENT key.
4.
A second window is displayed listing available
transitions for the arrival. Turn the FMS knob to
highlight the desired transition waypoint and
press the ENT key.
5.
A third window is displayed listing available
arrival runways. Turn the FMS knob to highlight
the desired runway and press the ENT key.
6.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Figure 7-44 Selecting an Arrival
With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
The arrival flight plan is displayed as part of
the overall flight plan and is placed after the
enroute flight plan.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-59
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Load an Approach
‘Load Approach’ allows for the selection of a published
instrument approach for the destination airport. It also
replaces the current approach with a new selection. In
many cases, it is more convenient to select approaches
using the PROC key, or by pressing the LD APR softkey.
This allows for the original flight plan to continue
navigating until cleared for the approach, but keeps the
approach available for quick activation when needed.
‘Activate’ adds the approach to the flight plan and begins
navigating the approach course.
To select an approach for a Direct-to or
flight plan destination airport:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
2.
Highlight the ‘Load Approach’ option and press
the ENT key.
3.
A window is displayed listing the available
approaches for the destination airport. Turn the
FMS knob to highlight the desired approach
and press the ENT key.
4.
A second window is displayed listing available transitions for the approach. Turn the
FMS knob to highlight the desired transition
waypoint and press the ENT key. (The vectors
option assumes the pilot will receive vectors to
the final course segment of the approach and
will provide navigation guidance to intercept
this final course.)
5.
7-60
Figure 7-45 Flight Plan with Loaded Approach
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Load?
or Activate?’ and press the ENT key. ‘Load’
adds the approach to the flight plan without
immediately using the approach for navigation
guidance.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Remove a Departure, Arrival, or Approach
• ‘Remove Departure’ deletes the current DP from
the active flight plan.
• ‘Remove Arrival’ deletes the current STAR from
the active flight plan.
• ‘Remove Approach’ deletes the currently selected
approach from the active flight plan.
To remove an approach, arrival or departure from the active flight plan:
Closest Point of Flight Plan Feature
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and
closest distance at which a flight plan passes from a
reference waypoint. It can also be used to create a new
user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest
to a chosen reference waypoint.
To determine the closest point along the
active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
2.
2.
Select the ‘Remove Approach’, ‘Remove Arrival’
or ‘Remove Departure’ option and press the
ENT key.
Select the ‘Closest Point of FPL’ option from
the Active Flight Plan Page options and press
the ENT key.
3.
3.
A confirmation window is displayed listing the
procedure the pilot is about to remove. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key. To cancel
the remove request, turn the large FMS knob
to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
A window is displayed with the reference
waypoint field highlighted. Turn the small and
large FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the
reference waypoint and press the ENT key.
4.
The G1000 displays the location, lat/lon, bearing (BRG), and distance (DIST) to the closest
point along the flight plan from the selected
reference waypoint. To create a user waypoint
at this location and add it to the flight plan,
highlight ‘LOAD’ and press the ENT key. The
name for the new user waypoint is derived from
the identifier of the reference waypoint.
Figure 7-46 Removing an Approach
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-61
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Change Fields
Shortcuts
‘Change Fields’ allows for the default fields of DTK
(distance) and DIS (distance) to be changed to one of the
following:
A number of shortcuts are available to save time when
using the Active Flight Plan Page. These shortcuts speed
the process of removing approaches, departures and
arrivals, and aid in selecting a specific flight plan leg for
navigation guidance.
On the preceding page, options to remove approaches,
departures and arrivals were introduced. This process
may also be completed using the CLR key, as described
below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
CUM (cumulative distance)
DIS (distance)
DTK (desired track)
ESA (estimated safe altitude)
ETA (estimated time of arrival)
ETE (estimated time enroute)
To change either the DTK or the DIS field:
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the MENU key to display the Active Flight
Plan Page options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Change
Fields’ and press the ENT key.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘DIS’
or the ‘DTK’ field.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to display a list of
options.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired item
and press the ENT key. Press the FMS knob to
remove the cursor.
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the small FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the title
for the approach, departure or arrival you wish
to delete. Titles appear in white directly above
the procedure’s waypoints.
Press the CLR key to display a confirmation
window. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT
key to remove the selected procedure.
This same process may also be used to remove
individual waypoints from the active flight plan.
3.
Restore Defaults
To remove a waypoint using the CLR key:
Restore Defaults returns the ‘DTK’ and ‘DIS’ fields to
‘DTK’ and ‘DIS’.
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the small FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the identifier for the waypoint you wish to delete.
3.
Press the CLR key to display a confirmation
window.
4.
With “OK” highlighted, press ENT to remove
the selected waypoint.
To restore the DTK and DIS fields on the
Active Flight Plan Page:
1.
2.
7-62
To remove an approach, departure or
arrival using the CLR key:
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the MENU key to display the Active Flight
Plan Page options window.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Restore
Defaults’ and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG PAGE
FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG PAGE OPERATIONS
The Flight Plan Catalog Page is the second flight planning
page and provides flight planning information and editing
capability. Once a Direct-to or flight plan has been
activated, the Active Flight Plan catalog Page displays the
following:
The following operations can be performed from the
Flight Plan Catalog Page:
• Number of flight plans in memory.
• Flight Plan List.
• Flight Plan information box containing departure,
destination, total distance, and estimated safe
altitude information.
To display the Flight Plan Catalog Page:
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
1.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Activate a Flight Plan
Stop Navigating a Flight Plan
Invert and Activate a FPL
Create a New Flight Plan
Copy a Flight Plan
Delete a Flight Plan
Delete All Flight Plans
Sort Flight Plans by Comment
Flight Plan Catalog Page Options
Edit a Flight Plan
Flight Plans
in Memory
Flight Plan List
Figure 7-48 Flight Plan Catalog Page Options
Flight Plan
Information
Figure 7-47 Flight Plan Catalog Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-63
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Activate a Flight Plan
Stop Navigating a Flight Plan
Once a flight plan is defined using the Flight Plan
Catalog Page it can be activated for navigation. Activating
the flight plan overwrites any previous information at that
location.
To activate (begin to navigate) an existing
flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Page options.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Activate
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
5.
An ‘Activate stored flight plan?’ confirmation
window is displayed. With OK highlighted,
press the ENT key to activate the flight plan. To
cancel the flight plan activation, turn the large
FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT key.
Figure 7-49 Activate Stored Flight Plan Confirmation
7-64
To stop navigating a flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Page options.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight
Plan’ and press the ENT key. A ‘Delete Flight
Plan’ confirmation window is displayed. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to delete
the flight plan. To cancel the flight plan deletion, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
Figure 7-50 Delete Flight Plan Confirmation
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Invert and Activate a Flight Plan
‘Invert & Activate FPL’ allows the active flight plan to
be inverted and activated for navigation.
To invert and activate a flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Page options.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL’ and press the ENT key.
5.
An ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to invert and activate
the flight plan. To cancel the operation, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT key.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Create a New Flight Plan
‘Create New Flight Plan’ creates a new flight plan.
To create a new flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan
Catalog Page options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Create
New Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
4.
A blank flight plan page is displayed for the
first empty storage location. Turn the small
and large FMS knobs to enter the identifier
of the departure waypoint and press the ENT
key.
5.
Repeat step number 4 to enter the identifier
for each additional flight plan waypoint.
6.
Once all waypoints have been entered, press
the FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan
Catalog Page.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-65
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Copy a Flight Plan
Delete a Flight Plan
‘Copy Flight Plan’ copies the active flight plan to a
Flight Plan Catalog location. The copy function is useful
for duplicating the active flight plan before making
changes.
‘Delete Flight Plan’ removes all waypoints from the
active flight plan. (Deleting a flight plan does not delete the
waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database
or user waypoint memory.) Once the pilot is finished with
a flight plan, it can easily be deleted from the Flight Plan
Catalog Page or the Active Flight Plan Page.
To copy a flight plan to another flight plan
catalog location:
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog press the FMS
knob to activate the cursor, turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the flight plan the pilot
wishes to copy, then press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Options.
To delete a flight plan from the Active
Flight Plan Page:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan
options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Copy
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
3.
A ‘Copy to flight plan?’ confirmation window
is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the
ENT key to copy the flight plan. To cancel, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT key
3.
A ‘Delete all waypoints in flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to delete the active
flight plan. To cancel, turn the large FMS knob
to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
To delete a flight plan from the Flight Plan
Catalog Page:
7-66
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the
FMS knob to activate the cursor, turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the flight plan to
delete.
2.
Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan
Catalog options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
4.
A ‘Delete flight plan?’ confirmation window
is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the
ENT key to delete the flight plan. To cancel,
turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Delete All Flight Plans
3.
‘Delete All’ removes all flight plans from memory at
one time.
To delete all flight plans:
1.
2.
From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the
MENU key to display the Flight Plan Catalog
Page options.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete
All’ and press the ENT key. A ‘Delete all flight
plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to
delete all flight plans. To cancel, turn the large
FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT key.
To edit a flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the ENT key.
4.
To add a waypoint to the flight plan: Turn the
large FMS knob to select the point where the
new waypoint is to be added. (If an existing
waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is
placed directly in front of this waypoint.) Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the new waypoint and press the
ENT key.
5.
To delete a waypoint from the flight plan: Turn
the large FMS knob to select the waypoint
to delete and press the CLR key to display a
remove waypoint confirmation window. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to remove
the waypoint. To cancel, turn the large FMS
knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
key.
6.
Once all changes have been made, press the
FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog
Page.
Sort By Comment/Number
‘Sort List By Number/Sort List by Comment’ selects
between a Flight Plan Catalog Page sorted numerically by
the flight plan number or sorted alphanumerically based
upon the comment assigned to each flight plan. When
one option is selected, the other option is displayed on
the Flight Plan Catalog options window.
To sort the catalog listing by number or
comment:
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the
MENU key to display the Flight Plan Catalog
Page options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Sort List
By Number’ or ‘Sort List By Comment’ and
press the ENT key. This will change flight plan
ordering.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
A ‘Proceed?’ confirmation window is displayed.
With OK highlighted, press the ENT key to
change flight plan ordering. To cancel, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-67
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Graphical Flight Planning Feature
4.
If the selected waypoint is not a Jeppesen
waypoint (Airport or Navaid) or user waypoint,
the G1000 creates a user waypoint (beginning
with ‘USR000’) at the point and inserts it into
the flight plan.
5.
The pilot can also create and insert a user
waypoint by pointing at a blank spot on the
nav map and pressing ‘LD WPT’. This creates
a user waypoint at the map cursor and inserts
it into the flight plan.
The graphical flight planning feature is activated using
the Navigation Map Page and the Active Flight Plan Page.
To create a Point-n-Shoot flight plan:
7-68
1.
Push the Joystick to turn the map cursor on.
2.
Select the Active Flight Plan Page and press
the FMS knob to highlight the list of waypoints.
Waypoints are inserted ABOVE the highlighted
row if the cursor is on. Waypoints are inserted
at the END of the flight plan if the cursor is
off.
3.
To insert waypoints, use the map cursor to
point at the desired waypoint (it will become
visually enhanced when it is properly pointed
to), and press the LD WPT softkey. Existing user
waypoints are inserted in the same manner.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) PAGE
The Vertical Navigation Page allows the creation of a
three-dimensional profile which guides the aircraft from
it’s present position and altitude to a final (target) altitude
at a specified location. This is helpful when you would
like to descend to a certain altitude near an airport or
climb to an altitude before reaching a route or Direct-to
waypoint. Once the profile is defined, message alerts and
additional data on the Navigation Map Page keep the pilot
informed of progress.
NOTE: An active flight plan or Direct-to must be
entered in order to utilize VNAV.
NOTE: To display terrain or topo data on the Vertical Navigation Map Page, press the MAP softkey.
Press the TOPO, TERRAIN, or LTNG softkey. Press
the same softkey to remove the displayed data
from the Vertical Navigation Page.
To create a vertical navigation profile:
1.
Select the Vertical Navigation Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
Figure 7-51 Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-69
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7-70
3.
With the ‘TARGET ALTITUDE’ field highlighted,
turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
the target altitude and press the ENT key.
With the profile set, the vertical speed required (VSR)
is displayed. Expect the following to occur when using the
vertical navigation feature:
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Above
Wpt’ (AGL) or ‘MSL’, and press the ENT key.
‘Above Wpt’ uses the altitude of a destination
airport. ‘MSL’ lets you set a specific target altitude for any waypoint category: airport, VOR,
NDB, intersection or user waypoint.
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
a distance from the target reference waypoint
and press the ENT key. If the target altitude
should occur at the target reference waypoint,
enter a distance of zero.
At one minute prior to reaching the initial descent
point, the message ‘APPR VPROF - Approaching VNAV
Profile’ is displayed as a PFD alert. The descent (or climb)
angle also locks to prevent changes in speed from altering
the profile. If selected, the vertical speed required (VSR)
readout on the default NAV and map pages shows the
desired vertical speed to maintain the proper descent (or
climb) angle. At 500 feet above (or below, for a climb) the
target altitude, an ‘APPR TRG ALT’ - Approaching Target
Altitude” message is provided. The VSR readout on the
Navigation Map Page is blanked out at this point.
6.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Before’ or
‘After’, and press the ENT key. This setting
designates whether the offset distance defines
a point before you reach the target reference
waypoint or after you reach the waypoint.
7.
When using a flight plan, the target reference waypoint itself can be specified from the
waypoints contained in the flight plan. By
default, the last waypoint in the flight plan
is selected. To select a different waypoint,
turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
waypoint and press the ENT key.
8.
The default profile utilizes a 400 foot-perminute descent rate. To change the rate, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘Target
Vertical Speed’ field and use the small and
large FMS knobs to enter a new rate. Press the
ENT key when finished.
Figure 7-52 Approaching VNAV Profile Message (PFD)
Figure 7-53 Approaching Target Altitude Message (PFD)
VNAV Page Menu Options
The VNAV messages are not enabled until the ‘VNAV
Messages On?’ option is enabled from the VNAV Page
Menu Options. To display the page menu, press the
MENU key (with the VNAV Page displayed). The VNAV
Page Options Menu also allows the pilot to restore VNAV
page defaults.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.7 PROCEDURES
To select a departure:
1.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘Select Departure’ and press the ENT key.
2.
The ‘Departure Loading’ page is displayed with
the list of departure options for the departure
airport. Turn the FMS knobs to enter the
desired departure. Press the ENT key.
3.
‘Load?’ is highlighted. Press the ENT key. The
departure becomes part of the flight plan.
ARRIVALS AND DEPARTURES
Based upon the active flight plan or Direct-to
destination, the Procedures Page provides direct access to
approaches, departures and arrivals. In either case, the
departure and destination airports must have associated
published procedures. The Procedures Page is displayed
by pressing the PROC key.
To select an arrival:
Figure 7-54 Procedures Page
1.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘Select Arrival’ and press the ENT key.
2.
The procedures page is displayed. Turn the
small and large FMS knobs to enter the desired
arrival.
3.
The cursor moves to the ‘TRANSITION’ field.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired transition waypoint and press the ENT
key. The approach vectors option assumes you
will receive vectors to the final course segment
of the approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach
course.
NOTE: Vector departures are not part of the
aviation database.
NOTE: The approach vectors option assumes
the pilot will receive vectors to the final course
segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance on the final approach segment
and extension only.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-71
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
APPROACHES
The G1000 allows you to fly non-precision and
precision approaches to airports with published instrument
approach procedures. All available approaches are part of
the Jeppesen database stored internally in each PFD and
MFD.
The G1000 provides both lateral and vertical guidance
for ILS precision approaches on the PFD, and lateral
guidance for non-precision Localizer, GPS, and VOR and
ADF overlay approaches. GPS position information is
also provided on the mapping portion of the MFD and the
inset map window on the PFD for pilot reference only.
G1000 NAVIGATIONAL GUIDANCE FOR
APPROACHES
The G1000 supports all ARINC 424 leg types that have
associated waypoint fixes. The G1000 uses the following
leg types as part of the Jeppesen database:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-72
AF - DME arc to a fix
CF – Course to a fix
DF – Direct to a fix
FA – Course from fix to an altitude
FC – Course from fix to distance
FD – Course from fix to DME distance
FM – Course from fix to manual termination
HA – Hold terminating at altitude
HF – Hold terminating at a fix
HM – Hold with manual termination
IF – Initial fix
PI – Procedure turn to course intercept
RF – Constant radius turn to fix
TF – Track between two fixes
Each of these legs is displayed on the active flight plan.
The G1000 does not support the following legs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CA – Course to an altitude
CD – Course to a DME distance
CI – Course to an intercept
CR – Course to a radial
VA – Heading vector to an altitude
VD – Heading vector to DME distance
VI – Heading vector to an intercept
VM – Heading vector to manual termination
VR – Heading vector to a radial
NOTE: The G1000 does not provide steering guidance for hold legs and procedure turns (HA, HF,
HM and PI leg types). However, these legs are
drawn on the map and are shown in the flight
plan.
NOTE: The pilot is responsible for determining
database currency for approaches.
.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
SELECTING APPROACHES
In order to select an approach, there must be an active
flight plan or direct-to which terminates at an airport with
a published approach.
To select an approach:
1.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘Select Approach’ and press the ENT key. The
approach procedure window appears.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
approach and press the ENT key. The transition
window appears.
NOTE: ‘LOAD?’ will add the procedure to the
flight plan without immediately using it for
navigation guidance. This allows you to continue
navigating the original flight plan, but keeps the
procedure available on the Active Flight Plan
Page for quick activation when needed. ‘Activate?’ overrides the enroute portion of the active
flight plan, proceeding directly to the approach
portion.
NOTE: You can also load an approach by pressing
the APR softkey.
NOTE: The approach vectors option assumes
the pilot will receive vectors to the final course
segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance on the final approach segment
and extension only.
3.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition and press the ENT key. ‘LOAD?’ is now
highlighted. Press the ENT key. Activate the
approach once the approach clearance is
received.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-73
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Not all approaches in the database are approved for
GPS use. As you select an approach, a ‘GPS’ designation
to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures
will not have this designation, meaning the GPS receiver
can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only.
If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance,
you must use the appropriate receiver for the selected
approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course segment of
ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the
Nav receiver to the proper frequency and selecting that
Nav receiver on the CDI.
Figure 7-55 Selecting an Approach Procedure
A selected approach can be activated or loaded.
Activating the approach also initiates automatic CDI
scaling transition as the approach progresses. In many
cases, it can be easiest to “Load” the full approach while
still some distance away, enroute to the destination airport.
Later, if vectored to final, use the following steps to select
‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ – which makes the inbound
course to the FAF waypoint active. Otherwise, activate
the full approach using the ‘Activate Approach?’ option.
Figure 7-56 Selecting an Approach Transition
7-74
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To activate an approach procedure:
1.
With an approach loaded in the active flight
plan, press the PROC key to display the Procedures Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Activate
Approach’.
3.
Press the ENT key.
Figure 7-57 Activating an Approach Procedure
CAUTION: The G1000 is designed to only
complement printed approach plates and vastly
improve situational awareness throughout the
approach. The approach must be flown as it
appears on the approach chart.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-75
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
This page intentionally left blank.
7-76
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.8 WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
The Waypoint Page Group (WPT) provides information
for thousands of airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections,
runways, frequencies and procedures. In addition, a user
waypoint information page displays information for up
to 1,000 user-created waypoints. The Waypoint Group
consists of the following pages:
• Airport Information Page (INFO)
• Departure Information Page (DP)
• Arrival Information Page (STAR)
• Approach Information Page (APR)
• Intersection Information Page
• NDB Information Page
• VOR Information Page
• User Waypoint Information Page
Page Selection
The Airport Information Page can be selected by
pressing the INFO softkey or by the procedure given
below. The Departure, Arrival, and Approach pages must
be selected from the Airport Information Page using their
corresponding softkeys (DP, STAR, APR). To select any
remaining page:
1. From any page, press and hold the CLR key to select
the Navigation Map Page.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’ page
group. ‘WPT’ appears in the page group icon
located in the lower right corner of the display.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
‘WPT’ page.
Waypoint
Identifier
Airport
Runway
Information
Field
Airport
Frequency
Information
Field
Figure 7-58 Airport Information Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-77
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
AIRPORT INFORMATION PAGE (INFO)
The Airport Information page shows the following
detailed information for the selected airport:
• Airport Information
• Runways
• Frequencies
Airport Information Page Operations
To enter a waypoint identifier:
7-78
Airports may be selected by identifier, facility name or
city location.
To enter a waypoint facility name or city
location:
1.
Select the Airport Information Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the facility
name or location (city) field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
character.
1.
Select the desired ‘WPT’ page and press the
FMS knob to activate the cursor.
5.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the first
character of the waypoint’s identifier.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the next
character field.
6.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the next
character field.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the facility name or
location is selected, then press the ENT key.
7.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
character.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the identifier is
selected, then press the ENT key.
6.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
Once the identifier, facility name or location is entered,
the airport information page displays information for the
selected airport. As you enter an identifier, facility name
or location, the “SpellNFind”™ feature scrolls through
the database, displaying those waypoints matching the
characters you have entered to that point. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility name or location,
additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn
the small FMS knob during the selection process. If
duplicate entries exist for an entered identifier, a duplicate
waypoint page is displayed once you select the identifier
(by pressing the ENT key).
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
3.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to scroll
through any additional database listings for the
selected facility name or location. You can scroll
backwards with the small FMS knob if you scroll
past the desired facility name or location.
4.
Press the ENT key to select the desired facility
name or location.
5.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
Facility Field
Location Field
To select a waypoint identifier from a list
of duplicates:
1.
Select the desired airport or navaid identifier.
2.
A duplicate waypoints window is displayed.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
waypoint and press the ENT key.
3.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
Figure 7-59 Waypoint Facility or City Location
To select a facility name or city location,
where duplicate entries exist:
1.
Select the desired facility name or location.
2.
As you spell the facility name or location, using
the small and large FMS knobs, the SpellNFind
feature selects the first entry in the database
based upon the characters you have entered
up to that point.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-79
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Airport Runway Information Field
The Airport Runway Information field displays runway
designations, length, surface type and lighting for the
selected airport. A map image of the runway layout and
surrounding area is also displayed on the Airport Runway
Information Page. The map image range is displayed in
the lower left corner and is adjustable using the joystick.
For airports with multiple runways, information for each
runway is available.
To display information for each additional
runway:
7-80
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor on
the Runway designation field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the next
runways for the selected airport.
4.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to select
the desired runway.
5.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
Rotate the joystick counterclockwise to select a lower
range and rotate it clockwise to select a higher range.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used
on the Airport Runway Information field:
• Type – Usage type: Public, Military or Private
• Surface – Runway surface types include: Hard,
Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown or Water
• Lighting – Runway lighting types include: No
Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown or Frequency (for pilot-controlled lighting)
Figure 7-60 Runway Information Field
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
AIRPORT FREQUENCY INFORMATION FIELD
The Airport Frequency Information Field displays radio
frequencies and frequency types for the selected airport, as
well as sector and altitude restrictions (where applicable).
If the selected airport has a localizer-based approach, the
localizer frequency is also listed on the Airport Frequency
Information Field. The Airport Frequency Information
Field may be used to quickly select and tune a COM or
NAV frequency.
To scroll through the frequency list and
tune to a desired frequency on the list:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list,
placing the cursor on the desired frequency. If
there are more frequencies in the list than can
be displayed on the screen, a scroll bar along
the right-hand side of the screen indicates
where you are within the list.
3.
Press the ENT key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the ‘COM’ or
‘NAV’ window.
4.
If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions,
the frequency is preceded by an info designation.
To view usage restrictions for a frequency:
1.
Turn the FMS knob to place the cursor on the
info designated frequency.
2.
Press the ENT key to display the restriction
information.
3.
To return to the Airport Frequency field, press
the ENT key.
Figure 7-61 Frequency Information Field
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
Some listed frequencies may include designations for
limited usage, as follows:
• ‘TX’ – transmit only RX - receive only
• ‘PT’ – part time frequency
• ‘i’ – additional information exists, press the ENT
key
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-81
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Airport Frequency Descriptions
AIRPORT INFORMATION PAGE OPTIONS
The Airport Frequency Information field uses the
following descriptions and abbreviations:
The following Airport Information Page
options are available by pressing the MENU key (with the
Airport Information Page displayed):
• Frequency — Communication frequencies which
may include restrictions:
• Approach
• Arrival
• Class B
• Class C
• CAT
• Departure
• TMA
• Terminal
• TRSA
Communication frequencies without restrictions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ATIS
ASOS
AWOS
Center
Clearance
Gate
Control
Ground
Helicopter
Multicom
Pre-taxi
Radar
Ramp
Other
Tower
Unicom
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Load Approach
View Departure Airport
View Destination Airport
View Recent Airport List
View Info
View Departure
View Arrival
View Approach
To select an option:
1.
Press the MENU key while on the Airport Information Page.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
option.
3.
Press the ENT key to perform the selected option
operation.
Navigation Frequencies:
• ILS
• LOC
7-82
Figure 7-62 Airport Information Page Menu
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
DEPARTURE INFORMATION PAGE (DP)
The Departure Information Page shows the available
Departure Procedures (DPs; also referred to as SIDs)
for the selected airport. Where multiple runways or
transitions are associated with the departure procedure,
that information can also be displayed. A map image
provides a layout diagram for each departure, runway
and transition. To display the Departure Information Page
press the DP softkey.
To scroll through the available departures:
NOTE: ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway field,
indicating the departure procedure applies to all
runways. For airports with parallel runways, ‘B’
may appear at the end of the runway designation
to indicate the departure procedure applies to
both runways.
A departure can be loaded from the Departure
Information Page.
To load a departure procedure from the
Departure Information Page:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
1.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor on
the Departure procedure name field.
Select the desired departure, runway and transition using the steps described previously.
2.
Press MENU to display the Airport Departure
Page Options.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘LOAD DEPARTURE’ and press the ENT key.
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. Press
the FPL key to return to the Airport Departure
Information Page.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to display a window of
available departures for the selected airport.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to select
the desired departure.
4.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
runway field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window of
available runways. Continue turning the small
FMS knob to select the desired runway.
6.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
Transitions field.
7.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning the
FMS knob to select the desired transition.
8.
Press the ENT key. To remove the flashing
cursor, press the FMS knob.
Figure 7-63 Departure Page Menu
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-83
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
ARRIVAL INFORMATION PAGE (STAR)
The Arrival Information Page shows the available
Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) procedures for the
selected airport. Where multiple transitions or runways
are associated with the arrival procedure, that information
may also be displayed. A map image provides a layout
diagram for each arrival, transition and runway. To
display the Airport Arrival Information Page press the
STAR softkey.
NOTE: ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway field,
indicating the arrival procedure applies to all
runways. For airports with parallel runways, ‘B’
may appear at the end of the runway designation
to indicate the arrival procedure applies to both
runways.
To scroll through the available arrivals:
7-84
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor on
the ‘ARRIVAL’ procedure name field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available arrivals for the selected airport.
Continue turning the FMS knob to select the
desired arrival.
4.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
‘TRANSITION’ field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning the
FMS knob to select the desired transition.
6.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
runway field.
7.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window of
available runways. Continue turning the FMS
knob to select the desired runway.
8.
Press the ENT key. To remove the flashing
cursor, press the FMS knob.
Figure 7-64 Arrival Page Menu
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
An arrival can be loaded from the Arrival Information
Page.
To load an arrival procedure from the
Arrival Information Page:
1.
Select the desired arrival, transition and runway
using the steps described previously.
2.
Press MENU to display the Arrival Information
Page Options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘LOAD
ARRIVAL’ and press the ENT key.
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. Press
FPL to return to the Airport Arrival information
Page.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Loading an arrival procedure into the active flight plan
does NOT automatically alter the active flight plan leg or
Direct-to navigation. Once loaded, the arrival is simply
placed at the end of the flight plan. To manually transition
to a loaded arrival, see the procedure below (an alternative
method would be to remove the first occurrence of the
destination airport identifier).
To manually transition to a loaded arrival
procedure:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the FMS
knob to activate the cursor and scroll down
through the list of loaded arrival waypoints.
2.
When the desired loaded arrival waypoint
is highlighted, press the Direct-to key, then
press ENT to highlight the ‘Activate’ prompt
(note that any loaded arrival waypoint may be
selected).
3.
Press ENT again to confirm activate
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-85
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
APPROACH INFORMATION PAGE
The Approach Information page shows the available
approach procedures for a selected airport. Where
multiple initial approach fixes (IAFs) and feeder routes are
available, that information may also be displayed. A map
image provides a layout diagram for each approach and
transition. To display the Airport Approach Information
Page press the APR softkey.
To scroll through the available approaches
and transitions:
7-86
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor on
the ‘APPROACH’ procedure name field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available approaches for the selected airport.
Continue turning the FMS knob to select the
desired approach.
4.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
transitions (TRANS) field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning the
FMS knob to select the desired transition or
select ‘VECTORS’ for guidance only along the
final course segment of the approach. Press the
ENT key. NOTE: the cursor moves through the
remaining fields but they are not selectable.
6.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
NOTE: Not all approaches in the database are
approved for GPS use. As you select an approach,
a GPS designation to the right of the procedure
name indicates the procedure can be flown using
the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have
this designation, meaning the GPS receiver may
be used for supplemental navigation guidance
only. VOR approaches, for example, must be
flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper
frequency and coupling the NAV receiver to the
HSI located on the PFD.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
An approach can be loaded from the Airport
Information Page.
To load an approach from the Airport
Approach Information Page:
1.
Select the desired approach and transition.
2.
Press MENU to display the Approach Information Page Options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘LOAD
APPROACH’ and press the ENT key.
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. Press
the FPL key to return to the Airport Information
Approach Page.
5.
‘Load and Activate’ allows you to load the
selected approach into the active flight plan
and activate navigation guidance to the
approach transition.
Figure 7-65 Approach Page Menu
NOTE: To load and activate an approach from
the Approach Information page, follow the steps
above, but select ‘Load and Activate’ in step
#3.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-87
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
INTERSECTION INFORMATION PAGE
The Intersection Information Page displays the
following information for a selected intersection:
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection
Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection.
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Intersection Identifier and Symbol
Name
General location
Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
• Nearest VOR/VORTAC/VOR/DME (identifier,
symbol, bearing, distance)
Intersection Name and
Symbol
General Location
Intersection
Lat/Lon
Nearest VOR;
identifier, symbol,
bearing,distance
Selected
Intersection
Figure 7-66 Intersection Information Page
7-88
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Intersection Information Page Operations
To change the map range, turn the joystick to the
left to select a lower range, turn it to the right to select
a higher range. NOTE: Intersections can only be selected
by identifier.
To select the Intersection Information Page:
1.
From any page, press and momentarily hold
CLR to select the Navigation Map Page. You
may skip this step if you are already viewing
any of the Map Group pages.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’
page group. ‘WPT’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Intersection Information Page.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
To select an Intersection by using an Identifier:
1.
With the Intersection Information Page displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the identifier and press the ENT
key.
3.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-89
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NDB INFORMATION PAGE
The NDB Information Page displays the following
information for a selected Non-directional beacon:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
NDB Identifier and Symbol
Name
Closest city
General location
Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
• Magnetic Variation in degrees
• Frequency in kilohertz (kHz)
• Nearest airport (identifier, symbol, bearing, distance)
NDB Identifier
NDB Symbol
Name
Closest City
General Location
Magnetic
Variation
NDB Frequency
NDB Symbol
Nearest Airport;
identifier, symbol,
bearing,distance
Map of
Surrounding Area
Figure 7-67 NDB Information Page
7-90
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NDB Information Page Operations
To select a NDB by using a Name:
The NDB Information Page allows the following
operations:
1.
With the NDB Information Page displayed,
press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knobs to highlight the name
field
3.
Turn the large and small FMS knobs to enter
a name and press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
• NDB selection by identifier
• NDB selection by name
• NDB selection by closest city
To change the map range, turn the joystick to the left to
select a lower range, turn it to the right to select a higher
range.
To select the NDB Information Page:
1.
2.
3.
To select a NDB by using the closest city:
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page. You may skip
this step if you are already viewing any of the
Map Group pages.
1.
With the NDB Information Page displayed,
press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knobs to highlight the closest city field
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’
page group. ‘WPT’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the large and small FMS knobs to enter
a city and press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the NDB
Information Page.
To select a NDB by using an Identifier:
1.
With the NDB Information Page displayed,
press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the identifier and press the ENT
key.
3.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-91
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NDB Information Page Options
The following NDB Information Page Options are
available by pressing the MENU key (with the NDB
Information Page displayed):
• ‘View Recent NDB List’ which allows you to view
the most recent NDB list.
To view the most recent NDB list:
7-92
1.
Select the NDB Information Page and press
MENU to display the NDB Information Page
Options. ‘View Recent NDB List’ is highlighted.
2.
Press the ENT key. Turn the small FMS knob
to select an NDB from the list and press the
ENTER key. The selected NDB is now the active
user NDB.
Figure 7-68 NDB Page Menu
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
VOR INFORMATION PAGE
The VOR Information Page displays the following
information for a selected VOR:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Identifier and Symbol
Name
Closest city
General location
Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
• Magnetic Variation in degrees
• Frequency in megahertz (MHz)
• Nearest airport (identifier, symbol, bearing, distance)
VOR Identifier
VOR Symbol
Name
Closest City
Magnetic
Variation
General Location
VOR Type
Latitude/Longitude
VOR Frequency
VOR Symbol
Nearest Airport;
identifier, symbol,
bearing,distance
Map of
Surrounding Area
Figure 7-69 VOR Information Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-93
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
VOR Information Page Operations
To select a VOR by using a Name:
The VOR information page allows the following
operations:
1.
With the VOR Information Page displayed, press
the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knobs to highlight the name
field.
3.
Turn the large and small FMS knobs to enter a
name and press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
• VOR selection by identifier
• VOR selection by name
• VOR selection by closest city
The map range is adjustable by rotating the joystick.
To change the map range, rotate the joystick counterclockwise to select a lower range and rotate it clockwise to
select a higher range.
To select the VOR Information Page:
1.
2.
3.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page. You may skip
this step if you are already viewing any of the
Map Group pages.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’
page group. ‘WPT’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
To select a VOR by using the closest city:
1.
With the VOR Information Page displayed, press
the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knobs to highlight the closest city field
3.
Turn the large and small FMS knobs to enter
a city and press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the VOR
Information Page.
To select a VOR by using an Identifier:
7-94
1.
With the VOR Information Page displayed, press
the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the identifier and press the ENT
key.
3.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
VOR Information Page Options
The following VOR Information Page Options are
available by pressing the MENU key (with the VOR
Information Page displayed):
• ‘View Recent VOR List’ which allows you to view
the most recent VOR list.
To view the most recent VOR list:
1.
Select the VOR Information Page and press
MENU to display the VOR Information Page
Options. ‘View Recent VOR List is highlighted’.
2.
Press the ENT key. Turn the small FMS knob to
select a VOR from the list and press the ENT
key. The selected VOR is now the active user
VOR.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Figure 7-70 VOR Page Menu
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-95
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
USER WAYPOINT INFORMATION PAGE
The G1000 allows the storage of up to 1,000 userdefined waypoints. The User Waypoint Information
Page displays the waypoint name (up to six characters
long), identifier and radial from two reference waypoints,
distance from one reference waypoint, along with the user
waypoints latitude/longitude position.
User Waypoint Name
User Waypoint Symbol
User Comment
General Location
Latitude/Longitude
User Waypoint Name
and Symbol
Reference Waypoints
User Waypoint List
Waypoint Statistics
Figure 7-71 User WPT Information Page
7-96
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
The following data is displayed on the User Waypoint
Information Page:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Identifier
Comment
General location
Latitude/longitude
A reference waypoint with identifier, radial, and
distance
• A second reference waypoint with identifier and
radial
• A list of all user waypoints
• Statistics of the number of user waypoint slots
used and available
User Waypoint Information Page Operations
The following operations can be performed from the
User Waypoint Information Page:
• Creating user waypoints (by current location,
entered latitude/longitude position, reference
waypoint specifications, or map pointer location).
• Modifying user waypoint information (by comment, latitude/longitude position, or reference
waypoint information)
• Renaming user waypoints
• Deleting user waypoints
To select the User Waypoint Information
Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’
page group. ‘WPT’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the User
Waypoint Information Page.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-97
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints may be created from the User Waypoint
Information Page or the Navigation Map Page. To create a
new user waypoint from the User Waypoint Information
Page, enter its name (identifier) and position, or reference
another waypoint by radial and distance.
To create a new user waypoint by entering
its latitude/longitude position:
7-98
1.
With the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The
present position is displayed in the information
box. The comment in the comment box is autogenerated based on the reference waypoint
usage. If the waypoint was defined with two
reference waypoints, then this comment would
be generated based on the radials (i.e. OJC354
/ ICT057).
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the position field in the information box.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
position coordinates for the new waypoint.
5.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected position.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
NOTE: The number of waypoints that are stored
in memory (USED WPTS) is shown at the bottom
of the User Waypoint Information Page.
To create a new user waypoint by referencing an existing waypoint:
1.
With the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The first
reference waypoint (REFERENCE WAYPOINT)
field is highlighted.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the identifier of the reference waypoint. The
reference waypoint can be an airport, VOR,
NDB, intersection or another user waypoint.
Press ENT to accept the selected identifier.
4.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
radial from the reference waypoint to the new
user waypoint. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected radial.
5.
The cursor moves to the distance (DIS) field.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the distance from the reference waypoint to
the new user waypoint. Press the ENT key to
accept the selected distance.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Creating User Waypoints from the Nav Map
Page
The Navigation Map Page and panning target pointer
provide a quick means of saving your present position as
a user-defined waypoint.
To capture and save your present position
as a user waypoint:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, push
the joystick to activate the panning function.
The target pointer is displayed at your present
position.
2.
Press the ENT key to capture the pointers position and display the User Waypoint Information Page (only true when the pointer is not
currently highlighting a waypoint).
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select a
waypoint name.
4.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
name. The first reference waypoint field is
highlighted.
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the reference waypoint. The reference waypoint can be an airport, VOR, NDB,
intersection or another user waypoint. Press
the ENT key to accept the selected identifier.
6.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
radial from the reference waypoint to the new
user waypoint. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected radial.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
7.
The cursor moves to the distance (DIS) field.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the distance from the reference waypoint to
the new user waypoint. Press the ENT key to
accept the selected distance.
8.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-99
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
MODIFYING USER WAYPOINTS
To modify an existing waypoint, select that waypoint
on the User Waypoint Information Page and enter the new
position information directly over the old information.
To modify a user waypoint by changing its
latitude/longitude position:
1.
With the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The first
reference waypoint (REFERENCE WAYPOINT)
field is highlighted.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the position field in the Information Box.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the new position coordinates and press the
ENT key to accept the selected position.
5.
7-100
To modify a user waypoint by changing
reference waypoint information:
1.
With the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The first
reference waypoint (REFERENCE WAYPOINT)
field is highlighted if you want to change the
reference waypoint. Otherwise, continue turning the large FMS knob to highlight the radial
(RAD) or distance (DIS) field, as desired.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to change
the identifier — if desired — of the reference
waypoint. The reference waypoint can be an
airport, VOR, NDB, intersection or another
user waypoint. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected identifier.
4.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Use
the small and large FMS knobs to change the
radial from the reference waypoint, if desired.
Press ENT to accept the selected radial.
5.
The cursor moves to the distance (DIS) field.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to change
the distance from the reference waypoint to
the new user waypoint, if desired. Press the
ENT key to accept the selected distance.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
USER WAYPOINT INFORMATION PAGE
OPTIONS
The following User Waypoint Information Page
Options are available by pressing the MENU key (with the
User Waypoint Information Page displayed):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Delete All User Waypoints
View Recent User WPT List
Use Present Position
Auto Comment
Create New user Waypoint
Delete User Waypoint
Rename User Waypoint
‘Delete All User Waypoints’ allows you to delete all
user waypoints from memory.
To delete all user waypoints:
1.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press MENU to display the User Waypoint
Information Page Options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Delete All
User Waypoints’ and press the ENT key. A confirmation windows is displayed. Press the ENT
key to accept ‘YES’ or turn the large FMS knob
to highlight ‘NO’ and press the ENT key.
‘View Recent User WPT List’ allows you to view the
most recent user waypoint list.
To view the most recent user waypoint list:
1.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press MENU to display the User Waypoint
Information Page Options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘View Recent
User WPT List’ and press the ENT key. Turn
the small FMS knob to select a waypoint from
the list and press the ENT key. The selected
waypoint is now the active user waypoint.
Figure 7-72 User WPT Page Menu
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-101
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Use ‘Present Position’ when selected will move the
currently selected user waypoint to the present position
of the aircraft.
NOTE: The user waypoint is set to the airplane’s
position at the time when this option was
selected.
To move the currently selected user
waypoint to the present position of the
aircraft:
1.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press the MENU key to display the User
Waypoint Information Page options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Use Present
Position’ and press the ENT key.
3.
Highlight the position and press the ENT key.
To overwrite the currently selected user
waypoints comment with an automatically
generated comment:
1.
Select the desired waypoint on the User
Waypoint Information Page and press MENU
to display the User Waypoint Information Page
options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Auto Comment’ and press the ENT key.
‘Auto Comment’ when selected will overwrite the
currently selected user waypoints comment with an
automatically generated comment. The auto comment is
in the same format as comments that are generated for user
waypoints that have not specified a unique user waypoint
comment. The auto comment can be one of three styles:
• REF1BRG1 / DIS1 - if the user waypoint position
is defined by a reference 1 waypoint radial and
distance (this is generally the default case, but
the default case could also be the BLANK (c) case
if there are no reference waypoints near the user
waypoints position)
• REF1BRG1 / REF2BRG2 - if the user waypoint
position is defined by a reference 1 waypoint
radial and a reference 2 waypoint radial
• BLANK - if no reference waypoints are near the
user waypoints position
7-102
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Create New Waypoint allows the pilot to create a new
user waypoint.
Delete User Waypoint allows the pilot to delete a user
waypoint.
To create a new waypoint:
To delete a user waypoint:
1.
From the User Waypoint Information Page,
press the MENU key to display the User
Waypoint Information Page Options or press
the NEW softkey.
1.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press MENU to display the User Waypoint
Information Page Options or press the DELETE
softkey.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight Create
New Waypoint and press the ENT key.
2.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The
present position is displayed in the information box. The first reference waypoint field is
highlighted
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Delete User
Waypoint’ and press the ENT key. The message
‘Would you like to delete the user waypoint’ is
displayed. Press ‘YES’ to delete the waypoint.
4.
5.
6.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Rename User Waypoint allows the pilot to rename a
user waypoint.
To rename a user waypoint:
1.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the reference waypoint. The reference waypoint can be an airport, VOR, NDB,
intersection or another user waypoint. Press
the ENT key to accept the selected identifier.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press MENU to display the User Waypoint
Information Page Options or press the RENAME
softkey.
2.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
radial from the reference waypoint to the new
user waypoint. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected radial.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Rename
User Waypoint’ and press the ENT key. The user
waypoint field is highlighted. Turn the small and
large FMS knobs to rename the user waypoint.
Press the ENT key.
3.
The message ‘Would you like to rename the
user waypoint’ is displayed. Press ‘YES’ to
rename the new user waypoint.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-103
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
This page intentionally left blank.
7-104
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.9 AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
The Auxiliary Page Group (AUX) provides detailed trip
planning information, satellite status, RAIM prediction,
system settings, LRU status and database information.
The AUX Group page names are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
System Status
To quickly select an Aux page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘AUX’
page group.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
AUX Page.
TRIP PLANNING PAGE
The Trip Planning Page calculates trip statistics, fuel
statistics, and other statistics for a specified Direct-to,
point-to-point, or flight plan based on automatic or
manual input of data.
Figure 7-73 Trip Planning Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-105
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Figure 7-74 Trip Planning Page Menu
Trip Planning
Trip planning allows you to view desired track (DTK),
distance (DIS), estimated time enroute (ETE), estimated
time of arrival (ETA), and enroute safe altitude (ESA)
for a Direct-to, point-to-point between two specified
waypoints, or for any programmed flight plan. This option
also displays the sunrise/sunset times for your destination
waypoint (for the selected departure date).
To perform trip planning operations:
7-106
1.
Select the AUX-TRIP PLANNING page.
2.
The current page mode is displayed at the
top of the page: ‘AUTOMATIC’ or ‘MANUAL’.
To change the page mode, press the AUTO or
MANUAL softkey.
3.
For Direct-to planning, press the WPTS softkey
and verify that the from waypoint field indicates P.POS (present position). If necessary,
go to the Page Menu and select ‘Set WPT to
Present Position’ to display P.POS. Press the
ENT key and the flashing cursor moves to the
‘to’ waypoint field. Turn the small and large
FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the ‘to’
waypoint and press the ENT key to accept the
waypoint. OR,
4.
For point-to-point planning, turn the
small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the from waypoint. Once
the waypoints identifier is entered, press
the ENT key to accept the waypoint. The
flashing cursor moves to the ‘to’ waypoint.
Again, turn the small and large FMS knobs to
enter the identifier of the ‘to’ waypoint and
press the ENT key to accept the waypoint.
OR,
5.
For flight plan leg planning, press the FPL
softkey and turn the small FMS knob to select
the desired flight plan (already stored in
memory), by number. Turn the large FMS knob
to highlight the ‘LEG’ field and turn the small
FMS knob to select the desired leg of the flight
plan, or select ‘CUM’ to apply trip planning
calculations to the entire flight plan.
6.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the departure time (DEP TIME) field.
7.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the departure time. Press the ENT key when
finished. (Departure time may be entered in
local or UTC time, depending upon unit settings).
With all variables entered, the following information is
provided (not available at all times):
•
•
•
•
•
•
DTK — Desired track, or desired course
DIS — Distance
ETE — Estimated time en route
ESA — En-route safe altitude
ETA — Estimated time of arrival
Sunrise/Sunset times at the destination
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Fuel Planning
5.
Using fuel flow (FF) and/or fuel totalizer data, the AUX
trip planning page displays current fuel conditions along
the active Direct-to or flight plan. You may also manually
enter fuel flow, ground speed (GS) and fuel on board
figures for planning purposes. Fuel planning figures can
be displayed for the currently active flight plan and Directto, or point-to-point navigation between two specified
waypoints and for any stored flight plan.
For flight plan leg fuel planning, press the
FPL softkey and turn the small FMS knob to
select the desired flight plan (already stored in
memory), by number. Turn the large FMS knob
to highlight the ‘LEG’ field and turn the small
FMS knob to select the desired leg of the flight
plan, or select ‘CUM’ to apply fuel planning
calculations to the entire flight plan.
6.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the fuel flow. Press the ENT key when finished.
Note that in automatic page mode, fuel flow is
provided by the system.
7.
The flashing cursor moves to the fuel on board
field. Turn the small and large FMS knobs to
modify the fuel on board. Press the ENT key
when finished. Note that in automatic mode
this is provided by the system.
8.
The flashing cursor moves to the calibrated
airspeed field. Turn the small and large FMS
knobs to enter an calibrated airspeed. Press
the ENT key when finished.
To perform fuel planning operations:
1.
Select the AUX-TRIP PLANNING page.
2.
The current page mode is displayed at the
top of the page: ‘AUTOMATIC’ or ‘MANUAL’.
To change the page mode, press the AUTO or
MANUAL softkey.
3.
For Direct-to planning, press the WPTS softkey
and verify that the from waypoint field indicates P.POS (present position). Press the
ENT key and the flashing cursor moves to the
‘to’ waypoint field. Turn the small and large
FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the ‘to’
waypoint and press the ENT key to accept the
waypoint. OR,
4.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
For point-to-point fuel planning, turn the small
and large FMS knobs to enter the identifier
of the ‘from’ waypoint. Once the waypoints
identifier is entered, press the ENT key to accept
the waypoint. The flashing cursor moves to the
to waypoint. Again, turn the small and large
FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the ‘to’
waypoint and press the ENT key to accept the
waypoint. OR,
With all variables entered, the following information is
provided (all of the items are not available at all times):
•
•
•
•
•
•
Efficiency
Total Endurance
Remaining Fuel
Remaining Endurance
Fuel Required
Total Range
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-107
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Other Statistics
To calculate Density Altitude and True Airspeed
7-108
1.
Select ‘MANUAL’ page mode by pressing the
Manual softkey.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘IND
ALTITUDE’ field. Turn the small and large FMS
knobs to enter the altitude indicated on your
altimeter. Press the ENT key when finished.
3.
The flashing cursor moves to the ‘PRESSURE’
field. Turn the small and large FMS knobs to
enter the barometric pressure (altimeter setting). Press the ENT key when finished.
4.
The flashing cursor moves to the total air temperature (‘TAT’) field. ‘TAT’ is the temperature,
including the compressibility error heating of
speed, read on the outside air temperature
gauge located in the lower left corner of the
PFD. Turn the small and large FMS knobs to
enter the temperature. Press the ENT key when
finished.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Utility Page
The Utility Page displays timers, trip statistics, and
scheduler information for flight planning purposes.
Figure 7-75 Utility Page
Figure 7-76 Utility Page Menu
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-109
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Utility Page Operations
To set the generic timer direction (up,
down):
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. The ‘GENERIC’ timer field
is highlighted.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the ‘UP/
DOWN’ window.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select ‘UP’ or ‘DOWN’
and press the ENT key.
To start, stop, or reset the generic timer:
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the ‘START?’ Field.
3.
Press the ENT key to start, stop, or reset the
timer.
To set the generic timer value:
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the time field (hh/mm/ss).
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to set the
desired time and press the ENT key.
To set the departure timer starting criteria
(ground speed more then 30 knots, power
on):
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the ‘DEPARTURE TIME’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection
window.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select either PWR-ON or
GS>30KT and press the ENT key.
To reset the flight timer:
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the MENU key. Turn the FMS knob to
select ‘Reset Flight Timer’.
3.
Press the ENT key.
To reset the departure timer:
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the MENU key. Turn the FMS knob to
select ‘Reset Departure Time’.
3.
Press the ENT key.
To set the flight timer starting criteria
(ground speed more then 30 knots, power
on):
7-110
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the ‘FLIGHT’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection
window.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select either PWR-ON or
GS>30KT and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Trip Statistics
To enter a name:
To reset trip statistics readouts:
Press the MENU key to display an options
window with the following reset options:
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS – Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer – Resets odometer readout
only
• Reset Maximum Speed – Resets maximum
speed readout only
• Reset All – Resets all trip statistics readouts
1.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired reset
option and press the ENT key.
2.
Scheduler
Name
Type (event, one time, periodic)
Date
Time
REM (remainder)
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the flight scheduler name field.
3.
Turn the FMS knobs to enter the desired name
and press the ENT key.
To enter a type (event, one time, periodic)
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the scheduler type field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list. Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired
type and press the ENT key.
To enter a time:
The scheduler feature displays reminder messages
(such as “Change oil”, “Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”,
etc.). One-time, periodic, and event-based messages are
allowed. One-time messages appear once the timer expires
and reappear each time the G1000 is powered on, until
the message is deleted. Periodic messages automatically
reset to the original timer value, once the message is
displayed. Event-based messages do not use a timer, but
rather a specific date and time.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
1.
Select the AUX Utility Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the scheduler time field.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the desired time and press the ENT key.
To enter a date:
1.
Select the AUX Utility Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the scheduler date field.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the desired date and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-111
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
GPS STATUS PAGE
The GPS Status Page provides a visual reference of GPS
receiver functions:
Figure 7-77 GPS Status Page
Figure 7-78 GPS Status Page Menu
7-112
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Satellite Status Page
• Satellite constellation displaying the following for
each satellite being tracked:
Azimuth
Elevation
PRN number
Tracking status
• A receiver tracking status display that displays the
following GPS sub-system status situations:
‘2D NAV’, when only 2-dimensional position is
available
‘3D NAV’, when 3-dimensional position is available
• Estimated position error
• Dilution of precision
• Horizontal uncertainty level
• GPS calculated position
• GPS calculated time of day
• GPS calculated altitude
• Ground Speed
• Track
The sky view display at the top left corner of the page
shows the satellites currently in view as well as their
respective positions. The outer circle of the sky view
represents the horizon (with north at the top of the circle);
the inner circle represents 45° above the horizon and the
center point shows the position directly overhead. Each
satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be
collected (hollow signal strength bar) before the satellite
may be used for navigation (solid signal strength bar).
Once the GPS receiver has determined your position, the
G1000 indicates your position, altitude, track and ground
speed. The GPS receiver status field also displays the
following messages under the appropriate conditions:
• Acquiring Sat - The GPS receiver is acquiring
satellites for navigation. In this mode, the receiver
uses satellite orbital data (collected continuously
from the satellites) and last known position to
determine the satellites that should be in view.
• 2D Navigation - The GPS receiver is in 2D navigation mode.
• 3D Navigation - The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and computes altitude using satellite
data.
The Satellite Status Page also indicates the accuracy
of the position fix, using Estimated Position Error (EPE)
and Dilution of Precision (DOP) figures. DOP measures
satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites
received and where they are relative to each other) on a
range from 0.0 to 9.9. The lowest numbers are the best
accuracy and the highest numbers are the worst. EPE uses
DOP and other factors to calculate a horizontal position
error, in feet or meters.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-113
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
RAIM Prediction
“RAIM” is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous
Integrity Monitoring, a GPS receiver function that performs
a consistency check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures
that the available satellite geometry will allow the receiver
to calculate a position within a specified protection limit
(2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and en route, 1.0 NM for
terminal and 0.3 NM for non-precision approaches).
During oceanic, en-route, and terminal phases of flight,
RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches,
there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns you with
an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
available when crossing the FAF, the pilot must fly the
missed approach procedure.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether
RAIM will be available for a specified date and time.
If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final
approach course, the approach does not become active
— as indicated by an “Approach is not active” message,
and a “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message.
6.
Turn the small and large FMS knob to enter an
arrival date.
7.
The cursor highlights the ‘COMPUTE RAIM’
field. Press the ENT key to compute RAIM. The
following options are displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ if RAIM has not been
computed for the current waypoint, time, and
date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ if the RAIM
calculation is in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ if RAIM is predicted to
be available for the given combination of
waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ if RAIM is predicted
to be unavailable for the given combination of
waypoint, time, and date
NOTE: RAIM computations predict satellite
coverage within +/- 15 minutes of the specified
arrival date and time.
To predict RAIM availability:
1.
Select the GPS Status Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the small and large
FMS knobs to select the ‘WAYPOINT’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the
Waypoint Information Page.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the desired waypoint. Press the ENT key to
accept.
5.
7-114
Figure 7-79 RAIM
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
an arrival time and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
GPS Signal Strength
The Satellite Status Page can be helpful in
troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor
satellite coverage or installation problems. Refer to this
page occasionally to monitor GPS receiver performance
and establish a normal pattern for system operation.
Should problems occur at a later date, it may be helpful to
have an established baseline from which to compare.
To select the GPS receiver for which data is
displayed:
1.
Select the GPS Status Page.
2.
Press the GPS1 softkey for the display of information pertaining to GPS1 or press the GPS2
softkey for the display of information pertaining
to GPS2.
As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal
strength bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with
the appropriate satellite number (01-32) underneath each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three
stages:
• No signal strength bars - the receiver is looking
for the satellites indicated.
• Hollow signal strength bars - the receiver has
found the satellites and is collecting data.
• Solid signal strength bars - the receiver has
collected the necessary data and the satellites are
ready for use.
• Checkered signal strength bars - the receiver has
excluded the satellite (FDE).
Figure 7-80 GPS Signal Strength
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-115
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
SYSTEM SETUP PAGE
The System Setup Page is the fourth AUX Page and
provides access (via a list of menu options) to manage the
following system parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Local or UTC time display
Units of measure settings (display units)
Position Formats
Map Datums
Airspace Alerts
Arrival Alert
Audio Alerts
MFD Data Bar Fields
GPS CDI Range Adjustments
COM Transceiver Channel Spacing.
Nearest Airport Parameters
Figure 7-81 System Setup Page
7-116
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Pilot Profiles
Creating a Profile
The Pilot Profile section of the System Setup Page
allows the pilot to select, create, delete, and rename up
to a total of 25 profiles. Profiles can be created based on
Garmin Factory Defaults, Default Profile Settings, Current
System Settings, and Custom Profile Settings.
The Pilot Profile section of the system setup page
displays the following data:
To create a Profile:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
CREATE field in the Pilot Profile box.
• The current active profile
• Number of profiles slots used
• Number of profile slots available
4.
Press the ENT key.
5.
Selecting the Active Profile
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a profile name. Up to 16 letters and numbers
can be used.
6.
Once the profile name is entered, press the ENT
key.
7.
The cursor moves to the CURRENT SETTINGS
field. If you want the new pilot profile based
on the current system settings press the ENT
key.
8.
If you want the new pilot profile to be based
on other settings, turn the small FMS knob to
display the settings list.
9.
Turn the FMS knobs to highlight the desired
settings and press the ENT key.
To select an active profile:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
ACTIVE field in the Pilot Profile box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the pilot
profile list.
5.
Turn the FMS knobs to highlight the desired
pilot profile.
6.
Press the ENT key. The G1000 loads and
displays the system settings for the selected
profile.
NOTE: Pilot profile names cannot start with a
blank as the first letter in the name
190-00629-00 Rev. B
10. The cursor moves to the CREATE field. Press
the ENT key to create a profile. To cancel the
profile, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
the CANCEL field and press the ENT key. To
create and activate the profile turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the CREATE & ACTIVATE
field and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-117
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7-118
Deleting a Profile
Renaming a Profile
To delete a profile:
To rename a profile:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
DELETE field in the Pilot Profile box.
3.
4.
Press the ENT key.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
RENAME field in the Pilot Profile box. Press
the ENT key.
5.
Turn the FMS knobs to select the profile you
want to delete and press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the FMS knobs to select the profile you
want to rename. Press the ENT key.
6.
Turn the large FMS knob to select DELETE and
press the ENT key. You also have the option of
cancelling the delete request by highlighting
CANCEL and pressing the ENT key.
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the new profile name. Press the ENT key.
6.
Turn the large FMS knob to select RENAME and
press the ENT key. You also have the option of
cancelling the renaming request by highlighting CANCEL and pressing the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Date/Time
Display Units
The Date/Time box provides settings for time format
(local or UTC; 12- or 24-hour) and time offset. The time
offset is used to define current local time. UTC (also called
“GMT” or “Zulu”) date and time are calculated directly
from the GPS satellites signals and cannot be changed. If
you prefer to use local time, simply designate the offset by
adding or subtracting the correct number of hours.
The Display Units section of the System Setup Page
allows you to configure the displayed data to standard or
metric units of measure. The Display Units section also
provides two magnetic variation (heading) options: True
and Auto. If ‘Auto’ is selected, all track, course and heading
information is corrected to the computed magnetic
variation. The “True” setting references all information to
true north.
The Date/Time section of the System Setup page
displays the following data:
• The current date
• The current time
• The current time format (local 12hr, local 24hr,
UTC)
• The current time offset
To set the system time format:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TIME
FORMAT’ field in the Date/Time box.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired system
time format (local 12hr, local 24hr, UTC). Press
the ENT key.
To set the current time offset:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TIME
OFFSET’ field in the Date/Time box.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
the time offset. Press the ENT key.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
The Display Units section of the System Setup Page
displays the following data:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Nav Angle
Magnetic variation
Distance and speed units
Altitude and vertical speed units
Barometric pressure units
Temperature units
Fuel and fuel flow units
The aviation database contains over 100 map datums
to adjust your position reading, making it conform to
specific paper charts. The default datum setting is WGS
84. If you are using a chart based on another datum, you
should set the G1000 to use the same datum. Using a map
datum that does not match the charts you are using can
result in significant differences in position information.
If you are using the paper charts for reference only, the
G1000 still provides correct navigation guidance to the
waypoints contained in the database, regardless of the
datum selected.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-119
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
The Display Units section of the System Setup Page
allows the following operations:
• To select a Nav Angle (auto, true)
• To select Distance and speed units (metric or
nautical)
• To select Altitude and vertical speed units (feet,
meters)
• To select Barometric pressure units (inches of
mercury, hectopascals)
• To select Temperature units (Celsius, Fahrenheit)
• To select Fuel and fuel flow units (gallons, imperial gallons, kilograms, liters, pounds)
To change a Display Units setting:
7-120
Map Datums
The Map Datum section of the System Setup Page allows
selection of map datums to be used by the G1000 from a
list of datums available in the current aviation database
(See Appendix D for a list of available map datums).
NOTE: Per TSO C129a, the WGS-84 map datum should
be used in the United States. For use outside the U.S.,
select the geodetic datum required by that country.
To select a Map Datum:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ‘MAP DATUM’ field.
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
4.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ‘DISPLAY UNITS’ field.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the Map
Datum list.
5.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list for the selected item.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight the new
datum.
6.
Press the ENT key.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight the new selection.
6.
Press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Airspace Alerts
The Airspace Alerts fields allow the pilot to turn the
controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or
off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest
Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted
on the Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the
warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or
near an airspace. An altitude buffer is also provided which
“expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace.
For example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and you are
more than 500 feet above or below an airspace, you will
not be notified with an alert message; if you are less than
500 feet above or below an airspace and projected to enter
it, you will be notified with an alert message. The default
setting is 200 feet.
The Airspace Alerts section of the System Setup Page
allows for the following operations:
• Selecting class B TMA airspace alert setting (on,
off)
• Selecting class C TCA airspace alert setting (on,
off)
• Class D (on, off)
• Selecting restricted airspace alert setting (on, off)
• Selecting MOA (on, off)
• Other airspace alert settings (on, off)
• Selecting altitude buffer distance setting
The Airspace Alerts section of the System Setup Page
displays the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Class B TMA airspace alert setting
Class C TCA airspace alert setting
Class D
Restricted airspace alert setting
MOA
Other airspace alert settings
Altitude buffer distance setting
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-121
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To turn an Airspace Alert on or off:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to select ‘YES’ or ‘NO’ and
press the ENT key.
To change the altitude buffer distance setting:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘ALTITUDE BUFFER’ field.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select an
altitude buffer value and press the ENT key.
Arrival Alerts
An arrival alert, provided on the System Setup Page,
can be set to notify you with a message when you have
reached a user-defined distance to the final destination
(the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight
plan). Once you have reached the set distance (up to 99.9
units), an “Arrival at [waypoint]”message is displayed on
the PFD Navigation Status Bar.
7-122
The Arrival Alert section of the System Setup Page
displays the following information:
• Arrival alert setting
• Trigger distance for arrival alerts
The Arrival Alerts section of the System Setup Page
allows the following operations:
• Enabling and disabling of arrival alert
• Setting trigger distance for arrival alerts
To enable/disable an Arrival Alert:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ARRIVAL
ALERT On/Off field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired option
and press the ENT key.
To change the Arrival Alert trigger distance
setting:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ARRIVAL ALERT distance field.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter a
trigger distance and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Audio Alerts
MFD Data Bar Fields
The Audio Alert section of the System Setup Page gives
you the option of selecting a male or female voice for
audio alerts.
The MFD Nav Data Bar Fields section of the System
Setup Page displays the current configuration of the Nav
data (MFD) bar fields. The Nav Data Bar Fields section of
the System Setup Page allows you to configure the four
Nav data bar fields to the following values:
To change the audio alert voice:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ‘VOICE’ field in the ‘AUDIO ALERT’
box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list for the voice.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight male or
female.
6.
Press the ENT key.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bearing (BRG)
Distance (DIS)
Desired Track (DTK)
En Route Safe Altitude (ESA)
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Estimated Time En Route (ETE)
Ground Speed (GS)
Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
Track Angle Error (TKE)
Track (TRK)
Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
Crosstrack Error (XTK)
The default settings are:
•
•
•
•
Field 1: Ground speed (GS)
Field 2: Distance to next waypoint (DIS)
Field 3: Estimated Time enroute (ETE)
Field 4: Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
To change an MFD Data Bar Field:
190-00629-00 Rev. B
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired MFD data bar field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight the new selection.
6.
Press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-123
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
GPS CDI
To change the CDI range:
The CDI section of the System Setup Page allows you
to define the range for the on-screen course deviation
indicator. The range values represent full range deflection
for the CDI to either side. The default setting is ‘AUTO’.
At this setting, the CDI range is set to 5.0 nautical miles
during the “en-route” phase of flight. Within 30 nm of
your destination airport, the CDI range gradually ramps
down to 1.0 nm (terminal area). Likewise, leaving your
departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and
gradually ramps UP to 5 nm beyond 30 nm (from the
departure airport). During approach operations the CDI
range gradually ramps down even further, to 0.3 nm.
This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final
approach fix (FAF).
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘SELECTED’ field in the GPS CDI box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired value
and press the ENT key.
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3
nm), the higher range settings are not selected during
ANY phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected,
the G1000 uses this for en-route and terminal phases
and ramp down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that
the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)
protection limits listed below follow the selected CDI
range, and corresponding flight phases.
The CDI Section of the System Setup page displays the
following data:
• Selected CDI range (auto, 5 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
• The current system CDI range (5 nm, 1 nm, 0.3
nm)
• The ILS CDI capture mode setting (auto, manual)
To change the ILS CDI capture setting:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘ILS
CDI CAPTURE’ field in the GPS CDI box.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired value
and press the ENT key.
COM Configuration
COM Configuration allows you to select 8.33 kHz or
25.0 kHz COM frequency channel spacing.
NOTE: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency
channel spacing is not approved for use in the
United States. Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States.
The CDI Section of the System Setup page allows the
following operations:
• Setting the selected CDI range (auto, 5 nm, 1 nm,
0.3 nm)
• Setting the ILS CDI capture mode (auto, manual)
7-124
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To change COM channel spacing:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘CHANNEL SPACING’ field.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired spacing
and press the ENT key.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight the new selection (any, hard only, hard/soft, water). Press
the ENT key.
To select Nearest airport minimum runway
length matching criteria:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
Nearest APT
3.
Nearest Airport defines the minimum runway length
and surface type used when determining the nine nearest
airports to display on the Nearest Airport Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to
prevent airports with small runways, or runways that
are not of appropriate surface, from being displayed. The
default settings are ‘0 feet (or meters)’ for runway length
and “any” for runway surface type. The Nearest Airport
section of the System Setup page displays the following
data:
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘MIN
LENGTH’ field in the ‘NEAREST APT’ box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the length
field.
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter a
runway length (zero to 99,999 feet).
6.
Press the ENT key.
• Nearest airport surface matching criteria (any,
hard only, hard/soft, water)
• Nearest airport minimum length matching criteria
To select Nearest airport surface matching
criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘RNWY
SURFACE’ field in the ‘NEAREST APT’ box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list for the selected item.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-125
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
The System Status Page displays the status and
software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information of all databases in the system is also
displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by a green check
mark and failed LRUs are indicated by a red X. The Pilot
should note the failed LRU and inform a Beechcraft service
center or Garmin dealer.
Figure 7-82 System Status Page
7-126
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
7.10 NEAREST PAGE GROUP
The nearest (NRST) page group is the fourth page
group which consists of the following pages:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User WPTS
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
To quickly select a NRST page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
NRST Page.
Not all 25 nearest airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections
or user waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding
NRST page at one time. The Nearest Airports Page
displays detailed information for five nearest airports,
with a scroll bar along the right-hand side of the page
indicating the part of the list that is currently being viewed.
The Nearest Airspaces Page displays detailed information
for up to three special use or controlled airspace alerts.
The NRST pages for VORs, NDBs, intersections, and user
waypoints display nine waypoints at a time. The flashing
cursor and large FMS knob are used to scroll and view the
rest of the waypoints or airspaces in the list.
To scroll through the list of nearest airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections, user
waypoints or airspaces:
1.
Select the desired NRST page using the steps
outlined above.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to scroll through the
list. The scroll bar along the right-hand side of
the page indicates the part of the list that is
currently being viewed.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-127
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NAVIGATING TO A NEAREST WAYPOINT
The NRST pages can be used in conjunction with the
Direct-to function to quickly set a course to a nearby
facility. This feature can be a real time saver compared to
retrieving information from the database using the WPT
pages. More importantly, it instantly provides navigation
to the nearest airport in case of an in-flight emergency.
To select a nearby airport, VOR, NDB,
intersection or user waypoint as a Direct-to
destination:
1.
Use the flashing cursor to scroll through a NRST
page list and highlight the desired nearest
waypoint.
2.
Press the Direct-to key to display the Direct-to
Page.
3.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
waypoints identifier and press the ENT key a
second time (with ‘Activate?’ highlighted) to
begin navigating to the selected waypoint.
Airport Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance
Airport Name, Closest
City, Elevation
Runway Information
Airport COM
frequencies
Approaches
Nearest
Airport
Figure 7-83 Nearest Airports Page
7-128
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Direct To Page
Figure 7-84 Direct-to from Nearest Airports Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-129
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Nearest Airports Page
The Nearest Airports Page displays the following
information for a selected airport:
• Map of surrounding area
• Airport Identifier, Symbol, Bearing, Distance (up
to 25 airports within 200 nm of current position)
• Name
• Closest city
• Elevation
• Runway information
• Airport COM frequencies
• Approaches
To select the Nearest Airports Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
Airports Page.
To select a nearest airport from the Nearest
Airports Page:
1.
Press the APT softkey located at the bottom
of the display. The first airport in the nearest
airports list is highlighted.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired airport. The remaining information
on the Nearest Airports Page pertains to the
selected airport.
To select a runway from the Nearest
Airports Page:
1.
Press the RNWY softkey located at the bottom
of the display.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
runway.
Figure 7-85 APT, RNWY, FREQ, and APR Softkeys
7-130
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
The Nearest Airports Page can be used to quickly tune
the COM transceiver to a nearby airport. The selected
frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM
window and activated using the COM Frequency Toggle
Key.
To quickly tune the COM transceiver to a
nearby airport frequency:
1.
Press the FREQ softkey located at the bottom
of the display.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired frequency.
3.
Press the ENT key. The selected frequency is
placed in the standby frequency tuning box.
4.
Press the Com Frequency Toggle key to place
the frequency in the active field.
To select and load an approach from the
Nearest Airports Page:
1.
Select the desired nearest airport.
2.
Press the APR softkey located at the bottom
of the display. The ‘LD APR’ (load approach)
softkey becomes available.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
approach. Press the LD APR softkey.
4.
The Approach Loading Page is displayed with
the transitions field highlighted. Turn the FMS
knob to select the desired transition.
5.
Press the ENT key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is
highlighted. Press the ENT key to load the
approach.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
6.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘ACTIVATE’ field. Press the ENT key to activate
the approach. ‘Load’ adds the approach to
the flight plan without immediately using the
approach for navigation guidance. This allows
for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared for the approach, but keeps
the approach available for quick activation
when needed. ‘Activate’ adds the approach
to the flight plan and begins navigating the
approach course.
NOTE: If the approach is not approved for
GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is
displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted. Press the ENT
key to acknowledge the message. Turn the large
FMS knob to select ‘NO’ and press the ENT key
to return to the Approach Loading Page
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-131
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NEAREST INTERSECTIONS PAGE
The Nearest Intersections Page displays the following
information for a selected intersection:
• Map of surrounding area
• Intersection identifier, Symbol, Bearing, Distance
(within 200 nm of current position)
• Lat/Lon (latitiude/longitude)
• Reference VOR Information consisting of:
• VOR Name
• Symbol
• Frequency
• Bearing
• Distance
Intersection
Identifier, Symbol,
Bearing, Distance
Latitude and
Longitude
VOR Name,
Symbol, Frequency, Bearing,
Distance
Nearest
Intersection
Symbol
Figure 7-86 Nearest Intersections Page
7-132
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To select the Nearest Intersections Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
Intersections Page.
To select a nearest intersection from the
Nearest Intersections Page:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the FMS knob and press the ENT key to
select the desired intersection. The remaining
information on the Nearest intersection Page
pertains to the selected intersection
NEAREST NDB PAGE
The Nearest NDB Page displays the following
information for a selected NDB:
• Map of surrounding area
• NDB Identifier, Symbol, Bearing, Distance (within
200 nm of current position)
• NDB Name
• Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds)
• Frequency
Nearest
NDB Map
Symbology
NDB Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance
NDB Name
NDB Location
Latitude and
Longitude
Frequency
Figure 7-87 Nearest NDB Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-133
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NEAREST VOR PAGE
To select the Nearest NDB Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
NDB Page.
To select an NDB from the Nearest NDB
Page:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the FMS knob and press the ENT key to
select the desired NDB. The remaining information on the Nearest NDB Page pertains to the
selected NDB.
The VOR Information Page displays the following
information for a selected VOR:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Identifier, Symbol, Bearing, Distance
Name
Closest city
VOR Type
Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds)
• Magnetic Variation in degrees
• Frequency in megahertz (MHz)
VOR Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance
Nearest
VOR Map
Symbology
VOR Name
VOR Type and
Magnetic Deviation
VOR Location
Latitude and
Longitude
VOR Frequency
Figure 7-88 Nearest VOR Page
7-134
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To select the Nearest VOR Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
VOR Page.
The remaining information on the Nearest VOR Page
pertains to the selected VOR.
To select and load a VOR frequency from
the Nearest VOR Page:
1.
Select the Nearest VOR Page. There are two
methods that can be used to select and load
a VOR frequency:
•
Method 1: Press the FREQ softkey to highlight
the VOR frequency for the selected VOR. Press
the ENT key. The selected VOR frequency is
placed in the NAV standby frequency field.
•
Method 2: Press the MENU key. Select the
Select Frequency Window option and press
the ENT key. Press the ENT key again when
the frequency field is highlighted to place the
selected VOR frequency in the NAV standby
field.
To select a nearest VOR from the Nearest
VOR Page:
1.
Select the Nearest VOR Page. There are two
methods that can be used to select a VOR:
•
Method 1: Press the VOR softkey and turn the
FMS knob, or press the ENT key to select a
VOR.
•
Method 2: Press the MENU key. Select the Select
VOR Window option and press the ENT key.
Turn the FMS knob to select a VOR.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-135
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
NEAREST USER WAYPOINT PAGE
The Nearest User Waypoint Page displays the following
information for a selected User Waypoint:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Identifier
Symbol
Bearing and Distance
Latitude/longitude
A reference waypoint with identifier, bearing, and
distance
• Waypoint Comment
• A second reference waypoint with identifier and
bearing
To select the Nearest User Waypoint Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
User Waypoint Page.
Nearest User Waypoint
Identifier, Symbol,
Bearing, Distance
Nearest
User
Waypoint
Reference
Waypoint
Information
Reference
Waypoint,
Bearing, and
Distance
Figure 7-89 Nearest User Waypoints Page
7-136
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To select a Nearest User Waypoint from the
Nearest User Waypoint Page:
1.
Select the Nearest User Waypoint Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob and turn the FMS knob
and press the ENT key to select a Nearest User
Waypoint.
3.
The remaining information on the Nearest User
Waypoint Page pertains to the selected Nearest
User Waypoint.
NEAREST FREQUENCIES PAGE
The Nearest Frequencies Page displays the facility name,
bearing to and distance to the five nearest ARTCC and
FSS points of communication (within 200 nautical miles
of the present position). For each ARTCC and FSS listed,
the Nearest Frequencies Page also indicates the frequency
and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver
to the facility frequency. The selected frequency is placed
in the standby field of the COM window and activated
using the COM Frequency Toggle key. In addition to the
ARTCC and FSS information, the Nearest Frequencies
Page includes the weather frequencies for the selected
ARTCC or FSS.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
To select the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. NRST is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
Frequencies Page.
To select a Nearest ARTCC from the Nearest
Frequencies Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
2.
Press the ARTCC softkey and turn the small FMS
knob to select a Nearest ARTCC.
To select and load the Nearest ARTCC Frequency from the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
2.
Press the ARTCC softkey and turn the large FMS
knob to select the center frequency. Press the
ENT key to load the center frequency into the
COM frequency standby field.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-137
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To select a Nearest FSS from the Nearest
Frequencies Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
2.
Press the FSS softkey and turn the small FMS
knob to select a Nearest FSS.
To select and load the Nearest FSS Frequency from the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
2.
Press the FSS softkey and turn the large FMS
knob to select the ‘FSS’ frequency field. Press
the ENT key to load the ‘FSS’ frequency into
the ‘COM’ frequency standby field.
To select and load the Nearest Weather Frequency from the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1.
2.
Press the WX softkey and turn the FMS knob to
select a Weather Frequency. Press the ENT key
to load the weather frequency into the ‘COM’
frequency standby field.
NEAREST AIRSPACES PAGE
The Nearest Airspaces Page displays the following
information for a maximum of 20 controlled or special
use airspaces:
• Map of surrounding area
• Airspace Alerts Box displaying Airspace Name,
Status, and Time to Entry
• Airspace and Agency
• Vertical Limits (floor/ceiling)
• Airspace Frequencies
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
Airspace Alerts
Box
Airspace and
Agency
Vertical Limits
Airspace
Frequencies
Figure 7-90 Nearest Airspaces Page
7-138
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
To select the Nearest Airspaces Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘NRST’
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
Airspaces Page.
Airspace Alerts Box
The Airspace Alerts Box displays the Airspace Name,
Status, and Time to Entry. The status and time to entry (if
applicable) is based on the following conditions:
• If the projected course will take the aircraft inside
an airspace within the next ten minutes, the status
field shows the airspace as ‘Ahead’.
• If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an
airspace and the current course will take the
aircraft inside, the status field shows the airspace
as ‘Ahead < 2 nm’.
• If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an
airspace and the current course will not take the
aircraft inside, the status field shows ‘Within
2 nm’.
• If the aircraft has entered an airspace, the status
field shows ‘Inside’.
By selecting any airspace name listed on the Nearest
Airspaces Page, additional details are provided —
including controlling agency, communication frequencies
and floor/ceiling limits.
To view additional details for an airspace
listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Airspace Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to scroll through the
list, highlighting the desired airspace.
4.
Press the ALERTS softkey and turn the FMS
knob to select the desired airspace.
5.
The remaining information on the Nearest Airspaces Page pertains to the selected airspace
name.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
To view and quickly load the frequency for
a controlling agency:
1.
Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2.
Press the FREQ softkey and turn the FMS knob
to select the desired frequency. Press the ENT
key to load the frequency into the ‘COM’ frequency standby field
NOTE The airspace alerts are based on threedimensional data (latitude, longitude and
altitude) to avoid nuisance alerts. The alert
boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectored to provide complete information on any
nearby airspace. Once the described conditions
exists, the status and time of entry is shown if
the airspace alert messages are enabled on the
System Setup Page (Auxiliary Page Group).
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
7-139
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
Airspaces
The Nearest Airspaces Page displays – and airspace
messages are provided for the following airspace types:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-140
Alert
Caution
Class B
Class C
TCA
Danger
MOA
Prohibited
Restricted
TMA
Training
TRSA
Unspecified
Warning
The Nearest Airspaces Page also displays the floor and
ceiling limits of the airspace. The following are examples
of what may appear as vertical limits for an airspace:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5,000 ft. msl (5,000 feet mean sea level)
5,000 ft. agl (5,000 feet above ground level)
MSL (at mean sea level)
Notam (see Notice to Airmen)
Unknown
Unlimited
See Chart
Surface
All airspace messages, except for prohibited areas, may
be turned on or off from the System Setup Page in the
Auxiliary Page Group. An altitude buffer is also provided
on the System Setup Page to provide an extra margin of
safety above/below the published limits.
Garmin G1000 MFD Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Automatic Flight Control System
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
8.1 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: This section assumes that the reader
is already familiar with the G1000 Integrated
Cockpit System. Refer to the G1000 Cockpit
Reference Guide and other sections in this Pilot’s
Guide for further information concerning the
G1000 system.
IMPORTANT: The approved Airplane Flight
Manual Supplement always supersedes the
information contained in this guide.
AFCS OVERVIEW
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the G1000 system avionics architecture. The System Overview, located near the
front of this binder, provides a block diagram to support
this system description. The GFC 700 AFCS functionality
in the Beechcraft 58/G58 is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
•
•
•
•
•
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main
operating functions:
Flight Director (FD) — Flight Director operation
takes place within the primary (#1) GIA 63. Flight Director commands are shown on the GDU 1040 PFD. The
Flight Director provides:
• Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
• Pitch/roll mode selection and processing
• Autopilot communication
Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within
the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos and provides servo
monitoring and automatic flight control in response to
Flight Director steering commands, AHRS attitude and
rate information, and airspeed.
Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, vertical acceleration, and airspeed.
Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch
trim servo provides Manual Electric Pitch trim capability
when the Autopilot is not engaged.
GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
GDU 1043 Multi-Function Display (MFD)
GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units (2)
GSA 81 Servos (4)
GSM 85 Servo Mounts (4)
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-1
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS CONTROLS
Dedicated AFCS Controls
The GDU 1043 MFD has the following dedicated
AFCS keys located on the lower left side of the bezel:
1
AP Key – Engages/disengages the Autopilot
6
2
FD Key – Activates/deactivates the Flight
Director only
FLC Key – Selects/deselects Flight Level Change
Mode
7
YD Key – Engages/disengages the Yaw Damper
8
HDG Key – Selects/deselects Heading Select
Mode
9
APR Key – Selects/deselects Approach Mode
Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral modes.
Pressing the FD key again deactivates the
Flight Director and removes the Command
Bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the
Autopilot is engaged, the FD key is disabled.
3
NAV Key – Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
4
ALT Key – Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
5
VS Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
1
7
2
8
3
9
10
NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys – Controls the
active pitch reference for Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, and Flight Level Change Modes
4
5
10
6
Figure 8-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls
8-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Additional AFCS Controls
The following controls used for the AFCS are located
in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
• AP DISC (Autopilot Disconnect) Switch —
Disengages the Autopilot and Yaw Damper and
interrupts pitch trim operation
The AP DISC switch is colored red and is
located forward of the MEPT switch on the
pilot’s control wheel left grip.
This switch may be used to mute the aural
alert associated with an Autopilot disconnect.
• CWS (Control Wheel Steering) Button —
Momentarily disengages the Autopilot and
synchronizes the Flight Director’s Command Bars
to the current aircraft attitude
The CWS button is located on top of the right
grip of the pilot’s control wheel.
Upon release of the CWS button, the Flight
Director may establish new reference points,
depending on the current pitch and roll
modes. CWS operation details are discussed
in the respective mode sections of this
manual.
• MEPT (Manual Electric Pitch Trim) Switch —
Used to command Manual Electric Pitch Trim
The MEPT switch is located on the left grip of
the pilot’s control wheel.
This switch is a composite switch, split into
left and right switches, on the left grip of the
pilot’s control wheel. The left switch is the
ARM contact and the right switch controls the
DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts.
Pushing the ARM switch disengages the Autopilot, if currently engaged, but does not affect
Yaw Damper operation. Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of
the switch are operated simultaneously.
If one side of the switch is active for more
than three seconds without the other side also
being active, the trim switches are ignored
until both switches (ARM, UP/DN) are inactive. This condition is annunciated as ‘PTRM’
in the AFCS Status Field of the PFD.
The MEPT ARM switch may also be used to
cancel AP disconnect alerting.
• GA (Go Around) Switch —
Disengages the Autopilot and selects Go Around
pitch and roll modes on the Flight Director
The GA switch is located on the throttle
handle.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-3
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
8.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
The Flight Director function provides pitch and roll
commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the Flight Director activated, the pilot can hand-fly
the aircraft to follow the path shown by the Command
Bars. The Flight Director also provides the commands to
the Autopilot when engaged.
Roll Modes
Armed
Autopilot Yaw Damper
Status
Status
Active
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
Pressing the FD key or AP key (when the Flight Director is not active) activates the Flight Director in default
pitch/roll modes. Pushing the GA switch or any other
Fight Director mode key activates the Flight Director in
the respective mode(s). When active, the Flight Director
may be turned off by pressing the FD key, if the Autopilot
is not engaged. The FD key is disabled when the Autopilot is engaged.
Pitch Modes
Mode
Active
Reference
AFCS Status Bar
Armed
AFCS Status Field
(See Annunciations &
Alerts section)
Selected Altitude Box
Flight Director
Command Bars
Figure 8-2 PFD AFCS Display
8-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS STATUS BAR
FLIGHT DIRECTOR LIMITATIONS
Flight Director mode annunciations are displayed on
the PFD when the Flight Director is active. Autopilot and
Yaw Damper status are displayed in the center field of the
AFCS Status Bar. Flight Director roll modes are shown on
the left and pitch on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green.
The maximum commanded pitch and roll attitudes are
limited to values established during AFCS certification.
Maximum commanded pitch and roll rates are also limited. Limits may be different from these values in certain
modes, as noted in the section for the mode operation.
COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the Flight Director, Command Bars
are displayed on the PFD as a single cue. The Command
Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands,
and bank left or right to indicate roll commands. If the
attitude information sent to the Flight Director becomes
invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are removed
from the display.
Pitch Angle
Bank Angle
Bank Rate
+20° / -15°
25°
5 deg/sec
Table 8-1 Flight Director Command Limits
Figure 8-3 Command Bars
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-5
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
8.3 FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight Director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on,
press off).
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in
green in the AFCS Status Bar. Automatic transition from
armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed
mode annunciation moving to the green active mode field
and flashing for ten seconds.
PITCH MODES
The following table lists each pitch mode with the corresponding control and annunciation. In the AFCS Status Bar, active pitch mode annunciations are displayed in
green during normal operation.
The mode reference is displayed next to the active
mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed,
and Flight Level Change Modes. The NOSE UP/NOSE
DN keys may be used to change the pitch mode reference while operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change for each
mode using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys are listed next
to the mode annunciation in the table.
The GFC 700 AFCS offers the following pitch modes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pitch Hold (default)
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed
Flight Level Change
Glideslope
Go Around
Control
Pitch Mode
(default)
ALT Key
VS Key
FLC Key
APR Key
GA Switch
Pitch Hold
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed
Flight Level Change
Glideslope Arm/Capture/Track
Go Around
Mode
Mode Reference
Annunciation Change Increment
PIT
0.5°
ALT nnnnn FT
VS nnnn FPM
100 FPM
FLC
nnn KT
1 KT
GS
GA
Table 8-2 Pitch Modes
8-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)
Changing the Pitch Reference
When the Flight Director is activated, Pitch Hold Mode
is selected by default. Pitch Hold Mode is indicated by
the green annunciation ‘PIT’ appearing in the active pitch
mode field.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the Flight Director maintains a
constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference, which is set to
the aircraft attitude at the moment of mode engagement.
If the aircraft pitch attitude exceeds the Flight Director
pitch command limitations, the Flight Director commands
a pitch angle equal to the nose-up/down limit.
Pitch Hold Mode Active
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pilot can adjust the pitch reference using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN
keys in 0.5° increments. The Flight Director pitch reference can also be changed by pressing the CWS button,
hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference,
then releasing the CWS button.
Altitude Hold Mode Armed
Flight Director
Command Bars
maintain desired
pitch reference
Figure 8-4 Pitch Hold Mode
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-7
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)
The Altitude Hold Mode is engaged by pressing the
ALT key. In this mode, the Flight Director establishes the
current aircraft altitude as the Altitude Reference. Altitude
Hold Mode is indicated by an ‘ALT’ annunciation beside
the Altitude Reference.
The Flight Director Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Bar, is independent of the Selected Altitude,
displayed above the Altimeter.
NOTE: Refer to the PFD section for more information regarding the Selected Altitude.
Changing the Altitude Reference
With the CWS button depressed, the pilot can handfly the aircraft to a new Flight Director Altitude Reference.
When the CWS button is released at the desired altitude,
the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
If the Selected Altitude is captured during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed. To adjust
the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS button must
be pressed again after the Selected Altitude is captured.
Altitude Arm/Capture
Altitude Hold Mode is armed automatically when the
Flight Director is in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight
Level Change, or Go Around Mode. This is indicated by
a white annunciation ‘ALT’ in the armed pitch mode field
(see Figure 8-6). When armed, the Flight Director commands a constant acceleration maneuver to capture and
level off at the Selected Altitude. When the Flight Director starts the altitude capture, it transitions to Altitude
Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude. The white
‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active pitch mode field
and flashes green for ten seconds to indicate transition to
Altitude Hold Mode.
Altitude Hold Mode Active
Altitude Reference
Selected Altitude
Altitude Select Bug
Flight Director
Command Bars
hold pitch attitude
to maintain the
Altitude Reference
Figure 8-5 Altitude Hold Mode
8-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
The Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the
VS key. The annunciation ‘VS’ appears in the active pitch
mode field, along with the Vertical Speed Reference to the
right. In Vertical Speed Mode, the Flight Director acquires
and maintains the established Vertical Speed Reference.
Current aircraft vertical speed becomes the Vertical Speed
Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed Mode engagement.
The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed in a Vertical Speed Reference Box, which appears directly above or
below the Vertical Speed Indicator, depending on whether
the aircraft command is for climb or descent. A Vertical
Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed
Reference is shown on the indicator.
Vertical Speed Mode Active
The Vertical Speed Reference may be changed in 100fpm increments using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys.
The aircraft may also be hand-flown to attain a new vertical speed while the CWS button is depressed. Upon
releasing of the CWS button, a new Vertical Speed Reference is established.
NOTE: The Vertical Speed Reference limits are
+1500 and –2000 fpm.
Vertical
Speed
Altitude Hold Mode Armed
Reference
Selected Altitude
Vertical Speed
Reference Box
Vertical Speed
Reference Bug
Flight Director
Command Bars
indicate climb
Figure 8-6 Vertical Speed Mode
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-9
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before
engaging Flight Level Change Mode.
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the
FLC key. This mode acquires and maintains the Airspeed
Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected
Altitude. The Airspeed Reference is set to the current aircraft airspeed upon FLC Mode engagement. Flight Level
Change Mode is indicated by an ‘FLC’ Annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Bar. The
Airspeed Reference is also displayed directly above the
Airspeed Indicator.
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the Autopilot
to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference and the desired flight profile (climb or
descent). The Flight Director maintains current altitude
until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are
adjusted and does not allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
Changing the Airspeed Reference
The Airspeed Reference may be adjusted in 1-knot
increments between 90 and 210 knots, using the NOSE
UP/NOSE DN keys. The pilot may also press the CWS
button, hand-fly the aircraft to a new airspeed, then release the CWS button. A new Airspeed Reference is set
when the CWS button is released.
Airspeed Altitude Hold Mode Armed
Flight Level Change Mode Active Reference
Airspeed Reference Box
Selected Altitude
Airspeed Reference Bug
Figure 8-7 Flight Level Change Mode
8-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Glideslope Mode (GS)
Glideslope Mode is only available when the Flight Director has been set for approach (see Approach Mode under Flight Director roll modes) and is annunciated in the
AFCS Status Bar by ‘GS’. Glideslope Mode is automatically armed under the following conditions:
• Valid localizer frequency is tuned
• HSI is in LOC mode, with valid deviation
indicator
• APR key is pressed
Localizer Approach Mode Armed
NOTE: Pressing the CWS button while Glideslope
Mode is active does not cancel the mode.
The Autopilot guides the aircraft back to the
glideslope upon release of the CWS button.
Upon reaching the glideslope, the Flight Director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to intercept and
track the glideslope.
Glideslope Mode Armed
Figure 8-8 Glideslope Mode Armed
Localizer Approach Mode Active
Glideslope Mode Active
Active ILS
frequency
is tuned
Flight Director
Command Bars
indicate descent
on localizer/
glideslope path
LOC2 is active
navigation receiver
on the HSI
Figure 8-9 Approach Mode
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-11
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Go Around Mode (GA)
Pushing the GA switch engages the Flight Director in
a wings level, 7° pitch-up attitude, allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go-around. Go Around
Mode disengages the Autopilot and arms Altitude Hold
Mode automatically. Other roll modes may be selected after Go Around Mode engagement. Subsequent Autopilot
engagement is also allowed. Attempts to modify the pitch
attitude (with the CWS button or NOSE UP/NOSE DN
keys) result in reversion to Pitch Hold Mode.
NOTE: Go Around Mode is a coupled pitch and
roll mode, and the ‘GA’ annunciation appears in
both the pitch and roll active mode fields in the
AFCS Status Bar.
Go Around Mode Active
Autopilot Disconnect
annunciation flashes
yellow 5 sec
Flight Director
Command Bars
indicate climb
Figure 8-10 Go Around Mode
8-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
ROLL MODES
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)
The GFC 700 offers the following roll modes:
•
•
•
•
•
Roll Hold (default)
Heading Select
Navigation (VOR, GPS, LOC, Backcourse)
Approach (GPS, VOR, ILS)
Go Around
The following table relates each roll mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the Flight Director
pitch modes section for a discussion regarding Go Around
Mode.
Control
(default)
HDG Key
NAV Key
APR Key
GA Switch
Roll mode
Annunciation
Roll Hold
ROL
Heading Select
HDG
Navigation, VOR
VOR
En route Arm/Capture/Track
Navigation, GPS
GPS
Arm/Capture/Track
Navigation, LOC
Arm/Capture/Track
LOC
(No Glideslope)
Navigation, Backcourse
BC
Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, GPS
GPS
Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, VOR
VAPP
Arm/Capture/Track
Approach, ILS
Arm/Capture/Track
LOC
(Glideslope Mode armed)
Go Around
GA
When the Flight Director is activated, Roll Hold Mode
is selected by default. This mode is annunciated as ‘ROL’
in the AFCS Status Bar. The current aircraft bank angle is
held, subject to the following bank angle conditions:
Bank Angle
< 6°
6° to 25°
> 25°
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
Table 8-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
Figure 8-11 Roll Hold Mode
Changing the Roll Reference
The pilot can establish a new roll reference by pressing the CWS button, establishing the desired bank angle,
then releasing the CWS button.
Table 8-3 Roll Modes
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-13
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Heading Select Mode (HDG)
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG
key. The annunciation ‘HDG’ appears in the AFCS Status
Bar to indicate Heading Select Mode. This mode acquires
and maintains the Selected Heading shown on the PFD
in the Selected Heading Box. The Selected Heading is
adjusted using the HDG knob on the PFD or MFD. The
adjustment is shown by the HSI Selected Heading Bug.
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the Bug is turned more
than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to
the right). However, Selected Heading changes of more
than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.
Heading Select
Mode Active
NOTE: Pressing the CWS button and hand-flying
the aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The Autopilot guides the aircraft back to
the Selected Heading upon release of the CWS
button.
NOTE: Press the HDG knob (the SYNC function)
to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading.
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Flight Director
Command Bars track
Selected Heading
Selected Heading Box
Selected Heading Bug
Figure 8-12 Heading Select Mode
8-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Navigation Mode (GPS, VOR, LOC, Backcourse)
Pressing the NAV key activates Navigation Mode.
Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation receiver on the HSI (GPS, VOR, or LOC). The mode
annunciation in the AFCS Status Bar indicates the selected
navigation receiver. The Flight Director follows GPS roll
steering commands when the HSI is in GPS mode, and
creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course
and deviation when the HSI is in VOR or LOC mode. The
Selected Course is controlled using the CRS knob.
Navigation Mode can be used to fly non-precision GPS
and LOC approaches where glideslope tracking is not required. Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the
localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. The annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Bar
indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
Flight Level
Change
Mode Active
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must
have a valid signal (VOR, LOC) or active GPS
course in order for the Flight Director to enter
Navigation or Approach Mode.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS button and handflying the aircraft does not change the Selected
Course while in Navigation or Approach Mode.
The Autopilot guides the aircraft back to the
Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the
CWS button is released.
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set
Selected Course to the localizer front course.
Altitude Hold
Mode Armed
Flight Director
Command Bars
indicate left
turn to track
GPS course and
climb to intercept
Selected Altitude
Selected Course
GPS is active
navigation receiver
on the HSI
Figure 8-13 Navigation Mode
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-15
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Approach Mode (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
Navigation/Approach Mode Armed
Approach Mode is activated when the APR key is
pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation receiver on the HSI (GPS, VOR, or LOC). The
mode annunciation corresponding to the selected navigation receiver (with the exception of VOR, which is annunciated ‘VAPP’ to indicate VOR Approach Mode) is
displayed in the AFCS Status Bar. This mode uses the
selected navigation receiver deviation and desired course
inputs to fly the approach.
Approach Mode provides greater sensitivity for VOR
tracking than Navigation Mode and allows the Autopilot
to fly an ILS approach with a glideslope. Glideslope Mode
is automatically armed when LOC Approach Mode is selected.
Approach Mode Active
If the Course Deviation Indicator is greater than one
dot when Navigation or Approach Mode is selected, the
selected mode is automatically armed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll
mode.
GPS Navigation/Approach mode Armed
Figure 8-15 Navigation/Approach Mode Armed
The Flight Director remains in the active roll mode
until entering capture phase, at which point Navigation
or Approach Mode is annunciated as the active roll mode
in green.
Glideslope Mode Active
Flight Director
Command Bars
indicate descent
on localizer/
glideslope path
LOC2 is active
navigation receiver
on the HSI
Figure 8-14 Approach Mode
8-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
8.4 AUTOPILOT AND YAW
DAMPER OPERATION
The Beechcraft 58/G58’s Autopilot and Yaw Damper
operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control.
When the Autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo
may be used to provide Manual Electric Pitch Trim. This
allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel
switch rather than the trim wheel. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
Roll Axis
The Autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the Flight Director. Pitch Autotrim provides trim commands to the
pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by
the pitch servo.
The Autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize the
aircraft roll attitude during upsets or Flight Director maneuvers. Flight Director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and
sent to the roll servo motor.
The Yaw Damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and
coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
Autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight
maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited by the Yaw
Damper.
Yaw Axis
FLIGHT CONTROL
The Yaw Damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to
dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw Damper
operation is independent of Autopilot engagement.
Emergency Control Override
Pitch and roll commands provided to the GSA 81 servos are based on the active Flight Director modes. Yaw
damping is provided by a GSA 81 servo. Servo motor
control limits the maximum servo speed and torque.
Pitch Axis and Trim
The Autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the
aircraft pitch attitude during aircraft upsets and Flight Director maneuvers. Flight Director pitch commands are
rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper
control, and sent to the pitch servo motor.
NOTE: Refer to the POH for specific instructions
regarding emergency procedures.
The GSM 85 servo mounts are equipped with slipclutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be
overridden in case of an emergency.
The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque)
and provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch
trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average
pitch servo effort.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-17
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGEMENT
Control Wheel Steering Activity
When the AP key is pressed, the Autopilot, Yaw
Damper, and Flight Director (if not already engaged) are
activated. The Flight Director starts in Pitch and Roll
Hold Modes when first engaged.
When the YD key is pressed, the system engages the
Yaw Damper independently of the Autopilot.
Autopilot and Yaw Damper status are displayed in the
center of the AFCS Status Bar. Engagement is indicated by
green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
Autopilot
Engaged
Yaw Damper
Engaged
Figure 8-16 Autopilot Engaged Annunciation
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement
is not the same as servo engagement/disengagement. Servos can be disengaged while the
Autopilot remains engaged (active) through the
use of the CWS switch.
During Autopilot operation, the pilot may wish to
hand-fly the aircraft without disengaging the Autopilot.
Pressing and holding the CWS button disengages the
pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and
allows the pilot to hand-fly the aircraft. At the same time,
the Flight Director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude
during the maneuver. The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS
maneuvers.
8-18
Figure 8-17 CWS Annunciation
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS button reengages the Autopilot with a new reference. Refer to the Flight
Director Modes section for CWS behavior for each mode.
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
While in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level
Change Mode, airspeed is monitored by the Flight Director. In these modes, pitch commands are limited for
overspeed protection. Overspeed protection is provided
in situations where the Flight Director cannot acquire and
maintain the pitch mode reference for the selected pitch
mode without exceeding the certified maximum Autopilot
airspeed.
When an Autopilot overspeed warning occurs, the Airspeed Reference Box appears above the Airspeed Indicator, flashing between ‘MAXSPD’ annunciations:
Figure 8-18 Overspeed Annunciations
Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation
disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
DISENGAGEMENT
Manual Disengagement
Automatic Disengagement
Automatic disengagement occurs:
•
•
•
•
•
In the event of a system failure
Due to invalid sensor data
If the Yaw Damper fails while both are engaged
If a stall warning activates
If the default Flight Director modes cannot be
computed (FD also disengages automatically)
Automatic Autopilot disengagement is indicated by a
flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and by the Autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged
by pushing the AP DISC or MEPT ARM switch.
Automatic Disconnect
The Autopilot may be manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC, GA, or MEPT ARM switch, or the AP
key on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by
a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation accompanied by a two-second Autopilot Disconnect aural alert.
The AP DISC or MEPT ARM switch may be used to cancel the aural alert.
Autopilot Manually Disengaged
Figure 8-20 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
The YD key and AP DISC switch can be used to disengage the Yaw Damper. The ‘YD’ annunciation turns yellow
and flashes for five seconds upon manual disengagement.
Yaw Damper Disengaged
Figure 8-19 Automatic Disconnect Annunciation
Figure 8-21 Yaw Damper Disengagement
Automatic Yaw Damper disengagement occurs when
Autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting the Yaw Damper. This means that the
Yaw Damper can remain operational in some cases where
the Autopilot automatically disengages. A localized failure in the Yaw Damper system or invalid sensor data also
cause Yaw Damper disengagement.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-19
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
8.5 PROCEDURES
NOTE: The diagrams in the following examples
are for instructional purposes only and may not
be current.
This section provides a scenario-based set of procedures showing various GFC 700 modes used during a
flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Reid-Hillview
Airport (KRHV) from runway 13L, en route to Fresno
Yosemite International Airport (KFAT). The pilot desires
to climb to an altitude of 7,000 feet MSL and fly heading of 070 degrees to intercept airway V107. The pilot
flies airway V107 to Panoche VORTAC (PXN) using VOR
navigation, then flies airway V230 using a GPS flight plan.
On this leg, the pilot descends to 3,000 feet prior to reaching Clovis VORTAC (CZQ) and loads the ILS approach to
R29R at KFAT. The pilot then flies the ILS approach and
executes a missed approach.
KRHV
070
33
0
27
30
6
27
9
24
3
V 230
6
Clovis�
VORTAC
(CZQ)
0
33
3
30
V1
07
21
15
18
12
21
24
12
9
Panoche�
VORTAC
(PXN)
15
18
KFAT
Figure 8-22 Flight Plan Overview
8-20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
DEPARTURE
3.
With the Autopilot engaged in a climb, the pilot
sets the Selected Heading to 070 degrees using
the HDG knob, then presses the HDG key. The
Autopilot follows the heading bug on the HSI
and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
To Climb to Selected Altitude and Fly an
Assigned Heading:
1.
2.
Upon takeoff, the pilot sets the Selected Altitude to 7,000 feet, using the ALT knob. To have
the Autopilot capture this altitude, the pilot
may select from Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change. In this example, Vertical
Speed is used.
4.
As the aircraft climbs to the Selected Altitude,
the Flight Director changes from Vertical
Speed Mode to Altitude Hold Mode. This is
annunciated by the green ‘ALT’ annunciation
flashing for ten seconds, informing the pilot of
the new mode.
5.
Upon reaching the Selected Altitude, the
Autopilot completes the capture process and
levels the aircraft. From this point, the Flight
Director continues to operate in Altitude Hold
Mode.
Upon reaching the desired vertical speed
of 1,000 fpm, the pilot presses the VS key,
enabling the Flight Director in Vertical Speed
Mode. Altitude Hold is armed automatically.
After activating Vertical Speed Mode, the pilot
presses the AP key, engaging the Autopilot in
Roll Hold and Vertical Speed Modes.
070
HDG Mode
3.
Selected Altitude of 7,000 MSL
5. ALT Mode
4.
1.
2.
V
LT
de, A
S Mo
med
e Ar
Mod
Figure 8-23 Departure
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-21
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERCEPTING A VOR
After climbout, the Autopilot continues to fly the aircraft
on a heading of 070 degrees at an altitude of 7,000 feet.
The pilot now wishes to intercept airway V107 to Panoche
VORTAC (PXN).
2.
At a predetermined point, the Flight Director changes from Heading Select Mode to
Navigation Mode, and the green annunciation
‘VOR’ flashes. The Autopilot begins turning to
intercept the Selected Course.
3.
The Autopilot continues the turn until the
aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
To Intercept a VOR:
1.
The pilot tunes the VOR frequency, then sets
the HSI mode to VOR, using the CDI softkey.
Selected Course is then set to 116 degrees
using the CRS knob. Note that at this point,
the Flight Director is still in Heading Select
Mode and the Autopilot continues to fly 070
degrees.
The pilot presses the NAV key. This arms the
Navigation Mode and the white annunciation
‘VOR’ appears to the left of the active pitch
mode.
V
NOTE: Changing the HSI mode cancels the
Navigation Mode and causes the Flight Director
to revert back to Roll Hold Mode.
10
7
070
HDG Mode, VOR
1.
Armed
2.
3.
VO
RM
od
e
0
33
6
6
27
3
30
29
24
9
Panoche�
VORTAC�
(PXN)
21
12
15
18
Figure 8-24 Intercepting a VOR
8-22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
Flashes for five seconds, then transitions to ROL
As the aircraft closes upon Panoche VORTAC, the pilot
chooses to enter and fly a GPS flight plan for the next leg,
airway V230. To do this, the pilot enters PXN, CZQ, and
KFAT into the active flight plan.
The pilot must then press the NAV key to reactivate the Flight Director roll mode to use GPS
guidance. At this moment, the Flight Director
couples to GPS guidance and the Autopilot
steers the aircraft toward the active flight plan
leg.
To fly a GPS Flight Plan:
1.
The aircraft is currently tracking inbound on
the 116 degree radial of Panoche VORTAC.
The pilot enters Panoche VORTAC (PXN) and
Covis VORTAC (CZQ) into the GPS flight plan,
in preparation to intercept this leg.
2.
With the flight plan entered, the pilot presses
the CDI softkey until the HSI is in GPS mode.
Doing this cancels VOR mode on the HSI, and
the Flight Director loses the VOR signal. As a
result, the VOR annunciation flashes yellow and
the Flight Director reverts to Roll Hold Mode.
3.
Once the flight plan leg is intercepted, the
Autopilot continues to track GPS guidance to
the end of the flight plan.
0
3
30
33
1.
27
2.
6
M
od
e
0
24
21
27
Leg
12
21
24
12
lan
light P
GPS F
V 230
9
Panoche�
VORTAC
(PXN)
3.
6
ode
18
GPS
M
9
Clovis�
VORTAC
(CZQ)
3
30
33
15
VO
R
15
18
Figure 8-25 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-23
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE DESCENT
3.
While flying the GPS leg from Panoche VORTAC to
Clovis VORTAC, the pilot chooses to make a Flight Level
Change descent to 3,000 feet in preparation for the approach to KFAT.
To make a Flight Level Change descent:
1.
The pilot sets the Selected Altitude to 3,000
feet using the ALT knob. Then the pilot pushes
the FLC key. This activates Flight Level Change
Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears along
with the airspeed reference, which defaults
to the current aircraft airspeed. Altitude Hold
Mode is also armed automatically. The pilot
chooses to descend at the current cruise speed
of 142 knots.
2.
To allow the Flight Level Change Mode to
descend, the pilot reduces power. The Autopilot
maintains 142 knots.
1.
At the predetermined point, the Flight Director changes from Flight Level Change Mode
to Altitude Hold Mode. The annunciation
‘ALT’ flashes in green, informing the pilot of
the capture. After the capture is finished, the
Autopilot holds the aircraft level at the Selected
Altitude.
Cruise Altitude of 7,000 MSL
2.
FLC M
od e
3.
Selected Altitude of 3,000 MSL
ALT Hold Mode
Figure 8-26 FLC Descent
8-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
APPROACHES
2.
The pilot uses the Heading Select Mode to
comply with ATC vectors, as requested.
ILS Approach
3.
In preparation for the approach and at the
pilot’s discretion, the pilot tunes the localizer
frequency, then selects the LOC mode on the
HSI.
4.
When cleared for the approach, the pilot arms
the Approach Mode by pressing the APR key.
LOC and GS appear in the roll and pitch armed
field, respectively. The Autopilot and Flight
Director determine when to begin the turn to
intercept the final approach course.
5.
From this point, the Autopilot flies the ILS. At
the Decision Height, the pilot can push the
AP DISC switch and land the aircraft, or push
the GA switch to execute a missed approach.
To fly an ILS Approach:
1.
The pilot loads the Runway 29R ILS approach
for KFAT into the Flight Plan. The Pilot selects
‘Vectors to Final’ for the transition. Upon
being given vectors from ATC, the pilot sets
the Selected Heading and presses the HDG key.
The Autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired
heading.
0
3
30
33
27
24
12
21
15
1.
9
urse
o
GPS C
6
Clovis
VORTAC
(CZQ)
18
29
0
2
12
KFAT
HD
G
e
od
M
LO
C/G
SM
od
5.
02
5
e
HILAN
2.
11
0
4.
3.
075
Figure 8-27 ILS Approach to KFAT
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-25
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
Go-Around/Missed Approach
2.
Following the published Missed Approach
Procedure, the pilot climbs to the prescribed
altitude. The pilot presses the AP key, reengaging the Autopilot. To have the Autopilot
fly to the hold, the pilot sets the HSI to GPS
mode and presses the NAV key. The Autopilot
flies direct to Clovis VORTAC according to the
loaded approach.
3.
During the climb, the pilot sets a Selected
Altitude at which to hold using the ALT knob.
To climb to the holding altitude, the pilot may
use the CWS button momentarily to cancel the
Go Around pitch mode. Doing this causes the
Flight Director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode
where Altitude Hold is armed. The pilot may
then choose another pitch mode to continue
with the climb, if desired.
4.
At the holding pattern, the pilot commences
with the hold. To fly the hold using the Autopilot, the pilot sets Selected Heading using the
HDG knob and presses the HDG key. The HDG
knob is used for the remainder of the hold to
guide the aircraft.
To fly a Missed Approach:
1.
At the Decision Height, the pilot decides to
execute a missed approach. The pilot applies
climb power and pushes the GA switch. The
Flight Director Command Bars establish a 7degree nose-up climb for the pilot to follow.
Note that when the GA switch is pushed, the
Autopilot disconnects and the AP annunciation
flashes yellow for five seconds.
e
3
6
7
12
27
HD
0
33
30
od
GM
CZQ
9
24
4.
12
21
15
18
S
GP
de
Mo
3.
2.
KFAT
GA
Mo
1.
de
Figure 8-28 Go Around/Missed Approach
8-26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
8.6 AFCS ALERTS
The following annunciations (listed in order of increasing priority) appear in the AFCS Status Field (see Figure
8-2). Only one indication occurs at a time, and messages
are prioritized by criticality.
Alert Condition
Rudder Mistrim Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Right
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Annunciation
Description
Yaw servo providing sustained force
Ensure Slip/Skid Indicator centered; observe maximum fuel imbalance limits
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated direction
Ensure Slip/Skid Indicator centered; observe maximum fuel imbalance limits
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch servo providing sustained force
Apply nose-down/up control wheel force upon AP disconnect
Pitch Trim Failure
(or Stuck MEPT Switch)
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick
Yaw Damper Failure
Yaw Damper control failure; AP inoperative
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
Preflight Test
AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing Preflight System Test; Aural alert sounds at completion
Preflight system test failed
Table 8-5 AFCS Status Field Alerts
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
8-27
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
CONTROL SYSTEM
This page intentionally left blank
8-28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Optional Equipment
SECTION 9 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
9.1 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
The G1000 provides the display and control interface
for the following optional weather and audio entertainment
systems:
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather
Mapping Sensor
• L-3 SKYWATCH® Traffic Advisory System (Model
SKY497)
• L-3 SKYWATCH® HP Traffic Advisory System
(Model SKY899)
• GDL 69A XM® Radio System
• GWX 68 Weather Avoidance Radar System
WARNING: Do not use any G1000 Weather
Data for thunderstorm penetration. Weather
Data is approved only for weather avoidance,
not penetration.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
CAUTION: NEXRAD weather data is intended
for long-range planning purposes only. Due to
inherent delays and relative age of the data
that can be displayed, NEXRAD weather data
should not be used for short-range avoidance of
weather.
NOTE: The information contained in this Pilot’s
Guide must be supplemented with detailed
information contained in the G1000 Multi
Function Display Operation Section. This section
assumes the pilot has experience operating
the G1000 MFD and is also familiar with the
applicable optional equipment User’s Guide.
This Section is divided into five parts: 9.1 - Introduction,
9.2 - Stormscope, 9.3 - SKYWATCH, 9.4 - GDL 69A, and
9.5 - GWX 68 Radar.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-1
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
9.2 STORMSCOPE
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 User’s Guide for a
detailed description of Stormscope operation.
DISPLAYING STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING
DATA ON THE NAV MAP
NOTE: Heading information must be valid in
order to display Stormscope lightning data on
the G1000.
NOTE: If heading information is lost, strikes and/
or cells will not be displayed on the Navigation
Map Page.
The Navigation Map Page (Figure 9-1) displays cell
and strike data using the yellow lightning strike symbols
shown in Table 9-1.
To display Stormscope Lightning Data on
the Navigation Map Page:
Press the MAP softkey. Press the STRMSCP
softkey (pressing the STRMSCP softkey again
removes Stormscope Lightning Data from the
Navigation Map Page).
In normal operation, the mode and rate are displayed
in the top right corner of the Navigation Map Page. The
mode is described by the word ‘STRIKE’ when in strike
mode, or ‘CELL’ when in cell mode.
NOTE: “Cell mode” uses a clustering “program”
to identify clusters of electrical activity that
indicate cells. Cell mode is most useful during
periods of heavy storm activity. Displaying cell
data during heavy storms helps determine where
the storm cells are located.
Stormscope Lightning Data Display Range
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to
2000 nm zoom range (north up) on the Navigation Map
Page. In the ‘track up’ mode there is a portion of
Stormscope lightning data that could be behind the
aircraft which cannot be seen at this range. Since the
range of the Stormscope is 200 nm (in front) in addition
to another 200 nm (behind) (400 nm diameter total), the
500 nm range (in north up mode) shows all the data.
Table 9-1 Lightning Age and Symbols
9-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Lightning Mode
and Rate
Surrounding
Lightning
Strikes
Lightning
Indication
Stormscope
Softkey
Figure 9-1 Navigation Map Page Displaying Stormscope Lightning Data
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-3
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
To change the display range on the Navigation Map
Page, turn the joystick clockwise to zoom out or counterclockwise to zoom in.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope
lightning data is not displayed but can still be present.
The presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by
the annunciation in the upper right hand corner ‘LTNG <
25 nm’ (Figure 9-2).
Figure 9-2 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
Customized Display
The pilot can customize the display of Stormscope
lightning data on the Navigation Map Page using the
Weather Group Options in the Map Setup Menu (Figure
9-3).
2.
Turn the FMS knob to display the ‘On/Off’
window.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ and
press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
To select ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ as the Stormscope
lightning mode:
1.
With the Weather Group selected, press the
ENT key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP
LTNG’.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘STRMSCP
MODE’.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to display the ‘Cell/Strike’
window.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select ‘Cell’ or ‘Strike’.
Press the ENT key.
5.
Push the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
To display the Weather Group Options:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Setup Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed. Turn the small FMS knob to select
the ‘Weather’ group.
To turn Stormscope Lightning Data on or
off:
1.
9-4
With the Weather Group selected, press the
ENT key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP
LTNG’.
Figure 9-3 Weather Group Map Setup Menu
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
To select a Stormscope lightning symbol
zoom range:
1.
With the Weather Group selected, press the
ENT key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP
LTNG.
STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data is displayed on the
Stormscope Page in addition to the Navigation Map Page.
To select the Stormscope Page:
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘STRMSCP
SMBL’.
1.
Turn the large FMS knob until the Map Page
group is selected.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the range
window.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob until the Stormscope
Page is selected (Figure 9-5).
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired range
and press the ENT key.
5.
Push the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Clearing Stormscope Lightning Data Using the
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Stormscope data can be cleared from the Navigation
Map Page by using the third Navigation Map Page Menu
option, ‘Clear Lightning Data’.
NOTE: Periodically clearing Stormscope lightning
data while monitoring thunderstorms is a
good way to determine if a storm is building
or dissipating. Stormscope lightning data in
a building storm will reappear faster and in
larger numbers. Stormscope lightning data in
a dissipating storm will appear slower and in
smaller numbers.
Stormscope Page Operations
The following Stormscope Page operations are available
using softkeys or page menu options:
• Changing the display range
• Changing the lightning mode between cell and
strike
• Changing the viewing mode between 360° and
120° ARC
• Clearing Stormscope lightning data
To change the display range:
To change the display range on the Stormscope Page,
turn the joystick clockwise to zoom out or counterclockwise to zoom in. Display ranges are 25 nm, (25 and
50) nm, (50 and 100) nm, and (100 and 200) nm.
To remove Stormscope lightning data from
the Navigation Map Page:
1.
Press the MENU key with the Navigation Map
Page displayed.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning
Data’ and press the ENT key.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Figure 9-4 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-5
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Current Strike Rate
Current Lightning
Mode
North Arrow
Indicator
Map
Orientation
Active Flight
Plan or Direct To
Navigation
Surrounding
Lightning
Strikes
Weather Map
Ranges
Stormscope
Control Softkeys
Figure 9-5 Stormscope Page
9-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
To change the Stormscope lightning mode
between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’:
To clear Stormscope lightning data from
the display:
1.
Select the Stormscope Page.
1.
2.
Press the MODE softkey. The CELL and STRIKE
softkeys are displayed. Press the CELL softkey
to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE
softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box located in
the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page
Press the CLEAR softkey to remove all
Stormscope lightning data from the display
OR:
2.
Press the MENU key. Select ‘Clear Lightning
Data’ and press the ENT key.
OR:
3.
Press the MENU key. The page menu is
displayed with ‘Strike Mode’ or ‘Cell Mode’
highlighted (Figure 9-6). Press the ENT key on
the desired selection.
To change the viewing mode between 360˚
and 120˚:
1.
Select the Stormscope Page.
2.
Press the VIEW softkey. The 360 and ARC
softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 softkey
to display a 360˚ viewing area or press the ARC
softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area
Figure 9-6 Stormscope Page Options Menu
OR:
3.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Press the MENU key. The page menu is
displayed. Turn the FMS knob to select the
desired view. Press the ENT key on the desired
selection.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-7
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
9.3 TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEMS
NOTE: This addendum assumes the pilot has
experience operating the G1000 Multi Function
Display and is familiar with the G1000 MFD
Pilot’s Guide and the applicable Traffic System
Pilot’s Guide.
NOTE: This section describes the G1000 for TAS
only. The G1000 Multi Function Display Pilot’s
Guide describes the standard TIS interface.
INTRODUCTION
The G1000 provides an optional display interface for
the following Traffic Advisory Systems:
• L-3 SKYWATCH Traffic Advisory System (Model
SKY497)
• L-3 SKYWATCH HP Traffic Advisory System
(Model SKY899)
Displaying and Configuring TAS Traffic on the
Nav Map
The display of TAS traffic on the Navigation Map Page
is designed to closely resemble the display symbology
used on the SKYWATCH. TAS Traffic is only displayed
on the Navigation Map Page if aircraft heading data
is available. When heading is not available, Traffic
Advisories are displayed as non-bearing banners on the
Navigation Map Page.
9-8
To display TAS traffic on the Navigation
Map Page:
Select the Navigation Map Page, press the MAP
softkey, then press the TRAFFIC softkey.
To configure TAS traffic on the Navigation
Map Page:
1. Select the Navigation Map Page.
2. Press MENU to display the Page Menu. Turn the
small FMS knob to select ‘Map Setup’ and press
the ENT key.
3. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘GROUP’ field.
Turn the small FMS knob to select Traffic and press
the ENT key.
4. Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
Traffic Mode option. Turn the small FMS knob to
select the desired option and press the ENT key.
Repeat the step for Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label.
5. Return to the Map Page by pressing the FMS knob
or momentarily pressing and holding the CLR key.
Traffic mode allows the pilot to choose which traffic is
displayed (all traffic, traffic and proximity advisories, or
traffic advisories only). The traffic symbol is the symbol
used to depict the type of traffic (the G1000 and L-3 use
the same symbology):
• Traffic Advisories (TA)—Solid Yellow Circles
• Proximity Advisories (PA)—Solid White
Diamonds
• Other—Hollow White Diamonds
Proximity Advisories (PA) are displayed as solid white
diamonds (SKYWATCH shows these PAs as hollow
diamonds since the SKYWATCH display is monochrome).
PAs are defined as traffic within the 5.0-nm range, within
±1200 ft. of altitude separation, and are not a traffic
advisory (TA).
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Traffic Map Page
Monitoring Traffic
The Traffic Map Page controls the source of traffic
data on the Navigation Map Page. When the G1000
is configured for TAS, the system only receives TAS
traffic. Otherwise, if TAS is not configured, the system
provides TIS traffic data.
To select the Traffic Map Page:
1.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob until the Map Page
group is selected.
Turn the small FMS knob until the Traffic Map
page is selected.
See the information in the SKYWATCH Pilot’s Guide
regarding monitoring traffic on the display and the
corresponding actions to take.
Failure Response
Errors indicated by a FAILED screen prevent continued
use of the TAS interface. See the applicable Pilot’s Guide
for detailed information on Failure Response.
Description of Traffic Advisory Criteria
For a description of Traffic Advisory criteria and display
interpretation see the applicable TAS Pilot’s Guide.
Operating Mode Indicator
Altitude
Display Mode
Indicator
Heading Indicator
Traffic Display
Range
Traffic
Figure 9-7 Traffic Map Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-9
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
L-3 SKYWATCH TRAFFIC ADVISORY
SYSTEMS (SKY497/SKY899)
NOTE: Refer to the SKYWATCH User’s Guide for
a detailed description of Skywatch operation.
Power-up Self-Test
Check for the following test criteria on the Traffic Map
Page during power-up:
1.
2.
3.
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to
be displayed. The ability to switch out of standby into
operating mode on the ground is especially useful for
scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
To switch into Operating Mode from
Standby Mode:
1.
If the SKYWATCH passes the power-up test,
and is on the ground, the Standby Screen is
displayed.
Press the OPERATE softkey or menu ‘Operating
Mode’.
2.
If the SKYWATCH passes the power-up test and
your aircraft is airborne, the Traffic Map Page is
displayed on the last used map display range,
and in the unrestricted altitude display mode.
If ‘Operating Mode’ is selected from the FMS
menu, press the ENT key to confirm and place
the SKYWATCH in operating mode.
To switch into Standby Mode from the
Traffic Page:
If the SKYWATCH continues to fail, refer to
the failure response section in the SKYWATCH
Pilot’s Guide on actions to take.
In addition to the power-up test, the SKYWATCH
performs a continuous self-test. This continuous self-test
is performed several times per minute.
To begin tracking intruder aircraft:
Press the OPERATE softkey.
9-10
Switching Between Standby and Various Operating
Modes
Press the STANDBY softkey.
Altitude Display Mode
To change the Altitude Display Mode:
Press the ALT MODE softkey then press one
of the following options: BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE, UNREST.
With each selection, the screen changes to display
the traffic detected within the selected altitude display
range. The G1000 screen also displays unrestricted traffic
(UNREST) having a range of maximum specified by the
SKYWATCH Pilot’s Guide. Refer to the SKYWATCH
Pilot’s Guide for information regarding altitude display
ranges. Note that confirmation is not required. The mode
is changed immediately when selected.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The pilot can change the display range on the Traffic
Map Page at any time.
To change the display range on the Traffic
Page:
Turn the RNG knob to zoom through the following
range options:
• SKYWATCH (SKY 497)—2 nm, 2 and 6 nm, 6
and 12 nm.
• SKYWATCH HP (SKY 899)—2 nm, 2 and 6 nm, 6
and 12 nm, 12 and 24 nm.
Skywatch Voice Announcements
See the SKYWATCH Pilot’s Guide for information on
voice announcements.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-11
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
9.4 OPTIONAL XM WEATHER
INTRODUCTION
The Garmin GDL 69A receiver interfaces with the
G1000 to bring XM Weather and XM Digital Audio
Entertainment to the cockpit. XM Weather and XM
Radio operate in the S-band frequency range to provide
continuous uplink capabilities at any altitude throughout
North America.
NOTE: Before the GDL 69A can be used, it must
be activated by XM Satellite Radio. The GDL 69A
XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions
that were delivered with the aircraft contain
important information required to initiate the XM
satellite radio subscription for the GDL 69A.
• Weather Information Page - part of the Waypoint
Airport Information Page (METAR and TAF
information only)
XM weather information is also displayed on the
Primary Flight Display Inset Map. See the G1000 PFD
Pilot’s Guide for more information.
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) are
displayed on all pages. Radar coverage is always
displayed with NEXRAD data.
Complete weather products include the following:
• Graphical NEXRAD Data (NEXRAD)
• Graphical METAR Data (METAR)
• Textual METAR Data
• Textual Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts (TAF)
GDL 69A WEATHER
• City Forecast Data
XM weather information provided by the GDL 69A is
displayed on the following MFD Maps and Pages:
• Graphical Echo Tops (ECHO TOP)
• Navigation Map Page (NEXRAD and XM Lightning
only)
• Weather Data Link Page (complete GDL 69A
capability)
• Nearest Pages (NEXRAD and XM Lightning only)
• Airport Information Page (NEXRAD and XM
Lightning only)
• Flight Planning Maps (NEXRAD and XM Lightning
only)
• AUX - Trip Planning Map (NEXRAD and XM
Lightning only)
• Graphical Wind Data (WIND)
• Graphical Cloud Tops (CLD TOP)
• Graphical Lightning Strikes (XM LTNG)
• Graphical Storm Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
• NEXRAD Radar Coverage (displayed with
NEXRAD data)
• SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
• Surface Analysis including City Forecasts (SFC)
• County Warnings (COUNTY)
• Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
• Hurricane Track (CYCLONE)
• Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFR)
9-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Displaying XM Weather on the Navigation Map
The Navigation Map Page displays NEXRAD, Cell
Movement, TFRs, and XM Lightning data.
WARNING: Use of XM weather for hazardous
weather penetration is not recommended.
Weather information provided by XM Radio
Service is approved only for weather avoidance,
not penetration.
NEXRAD
Storms/Legend
NEXRAD
Weather
NEXRAD Softkey
Figure 9-8 Navigation Map Page Displaying NEXRAD Weather
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-13
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Navigation Map Page Weather Control
Softkeys
The following softkeys control the display of NEXRAD
and XM Lightning weather products on the Navigation
Map Page:
NEXRAD – pressing the NEXRAD softkey displays
NEXRAD weather and coverage information. The
NEXRAD option is mutually exclusive with the
TOPO, TERRAIN, and STORMSCOPE options, that
is, when NEXRAD is activated, TOPO and/or
TERRAIN, and/or STORMSCOPE are turned off.
• CELL MOVEMENT - Turns the display of storm cell
movement on or off. The Cell Movement option is
shown only when NEXRAD is turned on.
NOTE: In Figure 9-9, the Stormscope menu
options are shown only when the Stormscope
unit is installed. Stormscope is not a GDL 69A
Weather Product.
XM LTNG – pressing the XM LTNG softkey displays
XM lightning information. XM Lightning is
mutually exclusive with the STORMSCOPE
option.
To display weather data on the Navigation
Map Page:
1.
Press the MAP softkey.
2.
Press the NEXRAD or XM LTNG softkey to display
the desired weather. Press the applicable
softkey again to remove weather data from
the Navigation Map Page.
Navigation Map Setup Options
The pilot can customize the display of XM weather
on the Navigation Map Page by using the Map Setup
Weather Group Options Menu. The following options are
available:
Figure 9-9 Map Setup Options
• NEXRAD DATA - Turns the display of NEXRAD data
and radar coverage on or off and selects the desired
display range.
• XM LTNG - Turns the display of XM Lightning on
or off and selects the desired display range.
9-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
To customize the Navigation Map Page:
1.
Press the Menu key on the Navigation Map
Page.
2.
Select ‘Map Setup’ and press the ENT key.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the group
selection window. Turn the small FMS knob to
select the ‘Weather Group’ and press the ENT
key.
4.
While the Map Setup menu is displayed, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight and move
between the product selections. When an
item is highlighted, turn the small FMS knob
to select the desired option and press the ENT
key.
Displaying Weather Data on the Nearest Pages
In addition to the Navigation Map Page, the Nearest
Pages display Stormscope, NEXRAD, and XM Lightning
data.
Displaying METAR and TAF information on the
Airport Information Page
METAR and TAF text is displayed on the Airport
Information Page when the WX softkey is pressed.
Once the WX softkey is pressed the page title changes
from ‘WPT - Airport Information’ to ‘WPT - Weather
Information’. The METAR data that is displayed is first
displayed in a decoded fashion, then the raw text is
displayed. TAF information is only displayed in its raw
form.
NOTE: METAR is the Aviation Routine Weather
Report and is generally standard around the
world. The temperatures are given in Celsius
degrees. The atmospheric pressure however is
reported in hecto pascals everywhere, but the
US where the atmospheric pressure is reported
in inches of mercury. For aviation purposes the
standard temperature and atmospheric pressure
are 59°F (15°C) and 29.92 in. Hg (1013.2 hPa).
NOTE: TAF is an airport forecast. TAF is generally
standard around the world. TAF forecasts
significant weather changes, temporary changes,
probable changes and expected changes in
weather conditions.
To display METAR and TAF text on the Airport Information Page:
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the WPT Page
Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Airport
Information Page.
3.
Press the WX softkey to display METAR and TAF
text (METAR and TAF information is updated
every 12 minutes).
Displaying Weather Data on the AUX - Trip
Planning Page Map
NEXRAD and XM Lightning Data can be displayed
on the AUX - Trip Planning Page Map by pressing the
NEXRAD and XM LTNG softkeys.
Displaying Weather on the Flight Plan Page
Maps
NEXRAD and XM Lightning Data can be displayed on
the Flight Plan Page Maps by pressing the NEXRAD and
XM LTNG softkeys.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-15
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Displaying Weather on the Weather Data Link
Page
The Weather Data Link Page displays all available
weather products. The display of the weather data can
either be selected by softkeys located at the bottom of the
display or through the Weather Data Link Setup menu.
To select the Weather Data Link Page:
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the Map Page
Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Weather
Data Link Page.
Figure 9-10 Weather Data Link Page
9-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Weather Data Link Page Softkeys
NEXRAD Limitations
The following softkeys perform the GDL 69A weather
functions on the Weather Data Link Page:
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar
displays. Some, but not all, are listed here for the user’s
awareness:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide
sufficient information to determine cloud layers or
precipitation characteristics (hail vs. rain, etc).
NEXRAD – press the NEXRAD softkey to show
NEXRAD weather and radar coverage information
(both are activated at the same time). Composite
data from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the
United States is shown. This data is composed
of the maximum reflectivity from the individual
radar sweeps. The display of the information is
color-coded to indicate the weather level severity.
The update rate is every five minutes. Refer to the
legend for a description of the color code.
NOTE: WSR-88D weather surveillance radar or
NEXRAD (NEXt generation RADar) is a Doppler
radar system that has improved the detection of
meteorological events such as thunderstorms,
tornadoes, and hurricanes. An extensive network
of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete
radar coverage of the continental United States,
Alaska, and Hawaii. The unobstructed range of
each NEXRAD is 124 nautical miles.
NEXRAD Abnormalities
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed
NEXRAD images. Some, but not all, of those include:
• Ground Clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly
at the sun
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which
may cause shadows
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can
cause alterations in radar scans
190-00629-00 Rev. B
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the
minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual
NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms
at close ranges, and has no information about
storms directly over the site.
• The resolution of displayed NEXRAD data is 2
kilometers. Therefore, when zoomed in on the
display, each square block is 2 kilometers. The
intensity level reflected by the square will be the
highest level sampled within the 2 kilometer
square area.
NEXRAD Intensity
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo
intensities (reflectivity) measured in dBZ (decibels of Z).
“Reflectivity” is the amount of transmitted power returned
to the radar receiver. Reflectivity (designated by the letter
Z) covers a wide range of signals (from very weak to very
strong). So, a more convenient number for calculations
and comparison, a decibel (or logarithmic) scale (dBZ), is
used. The dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal
returned to the radar increases.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-17
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
ECHO TOP – press the ECHO TOP softkey to
show the location, elevation, and direction of the
highest radar echo. This may not indicate the
top of a storm or clouds, only the highest radar
return echo. The information is derived from
NEXRAD information and indicates the highest
altitude at which precipitation is falling. ECHO
TOPS and Radar coverage are activated at the
same time. ECHO TOPS are mutually exclusive
from both NEXRAD and CLOUD TOPS, that is,
when ECHO TOPS is activated, NEXRAD and
CLOUD TOPS are removed. Refer to the Legend
for a description of the ECHO TOPS coding. The
update rate is every 7.5 minutes.
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same
color scaling to represent altitude. The use of
both products at the same time is not available.
9-18
RADAR COVERAGE – The display of Radar
Coverage is always active when NEXRAD and
ECHO TOPS are selected. Where information is
not being collected NEXRAD Radar coverage and
ECHO TOPS areas are shown in a grayish-purple
color. Areas where radar capability exists, but is
not active or is off-line, will not be shown. The
update rate is every five minutes.
CLD TOP – press the CLD TOP softkey to show
the cloud top altitude determined from satellite
imagery. Refer to the legend for a description of
the CLOUD TOPS color coding. The update rate
is every 15 minutes.
LTNG – pressing the LTNG softkey shows the
location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. The
update rate is every five minutes.
NOTE: Strike location falls within a 2 km region.
Therefore, the exact location of the strike is not
displayed.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
CELL MOV – pressing the CELL MOV softkey
shows the storm cells identified by the groundbased system. The movement is depicted by an
arrow. The update rate is every 12 minutes.
SIG/AIR – pressing the SIG/AIR softkey shows
SIGMET and AIRMET information to advise
the pilot of potentially hazardous weather. The
advisory covers an area of at least 3,000 square
miles at any one time. The update rate is every
12 minutes.
NOTE: AIRMETs are broadcast for weather
phenomena that potentially affects all aircraft.
For pilots of light aircraft, AIRMET (for “AIRman’s
METeorological information) gives valuable
information about the following conditions:
moderate icing, moderate turbulence, sustained
winds 30 knots or greater at the surface,
widespread area with a ceiling of less than
1,000 feet and/or visibility less than 3 miles and
extensive obscurement of mountains. These
are important to light aircraft that have limited
flight capabilities, lack of equipment, and/or
instrumentation.
NOTE: SIGMETs are broadcast for hazardous
weather that is considered of extreme importance
to all aircraft. SIGMETs (for “SIGnificant
METeorological information”) warn of the
following weather hazards: severe icing, severe
and extreme turbulence, dust storms, sandstorms,
or volcanic ash lowering visibility to less than
3 miles. A Convective SIGMET (WST) is issued
for hazardous convective weather (such as
tornadoes, thunderstorms, hail) and covers severe
or greater turbulence, severe icing, and low-level
wind shear. A localized SIGMET is a significant
weather condition occurring at a localized
geographical position.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-19
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
When enabled, the following AIRMETs can be
displayed:
•
•
•
•
•
Icing
Turbulence
IFR conditions
Mountain obscuration
Surface winds
Refer to the legend for a description of the color
coding.
METAR – press the METAR softkey to display
METARs (METeorological Aviation Reports).
METARS are shown as colored flags at airports
providing METAR reports. Refer to the legend for
a description of the color code. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
To view the available legends:
1.
Press the LEGEND softkey to display the
available legends.
2.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
scroll through the legends if more are available
than fit in the window.
3.
To return to the previous page and remove the
legend window, press the LEGEND, ENT, CLR
key, or the FMS knob.
OR:
4.
On the Weather Data Link Page, press the
LEGEND softkey which displays the Page Menu
Options. Turn either the large or small FMS
knob to select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the
ENT key.
MORE WX – press the MORE WX softkey to
display the following group of softkeys for
additional weather control:
LEGEND – press the LEGEND softkey to display
the Weather Legend Window. Turn the small or
large FMS knob to scroll up or down through the
legend list. Press the small or large FMS knob or
the ENT key to remove the legend display. The
Weather Legends Window describes the graphic
symbols and color coding of the information for
each product that is active.
9-20
NOTE: City Forecast and METAR information
is only displayed within the installed Aviation
Database service area.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SFC – pressing the SFC softkey for Surface
Analysis shows current or forecast conditions.
The city forecasts information is combined with
the surface conditions. The SFC softkey label
changes to reflect the forecast time selected.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24,
36, and 48 hours. The update rate is every 12
minutes.
FRZ LVL – press the FRZ LVL softkey to display
contour lines for freezing levels. The update
rate is every 12 minutes.
NOTE: When no data is shown at a given altitude
for any of the weather features, the data for that
altitude has not been received or the data is out
of date and has been removed from the display.
Wait for the next update. The update rate is every
12 minutes.
WIND – press the WIND softkey to show wind
speed and direction at a selected altitude from
the ground up to 42,000 feet in 3,000 foot
increments. The WIND softkey label changes
to reflect the winds aloft altitude selected. The
update rate is every 12 minutes.
COUNTY – pressing the COUNTY softkey provides
specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings for Tornado, Severe Thunderstorm,
and Flood conditions provided by the National
Weather Service (NWS). Refer to the Legend for
a description of the county warning icon. The
update rate is every 5 minutes.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-21
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Map Panning Information-Weather Data Link
Page
CYCLONE – pressing the CYCLONE softkey shows
the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and
their projected track at various time intervals.
The update rate is every 12 minutes.
Map panning moves the map beyond its current limits
without adjusting the map range. When the panning
function is selected by pushing the joystick, a panning
arrow flashes on the Weather Data Link Page. Panning over
AIRMETs, County Warnings, TFRs, Echo Tops, METARs,
SIGMET’s, and Cell Movement displays text information
for the selection. This information is displayed in the
same location as the “map pointer information” on the
Navigation Map Page.
To display information for selected weather
products:
Weather Data Link Page Setup
1.
The pilot can customize the display of XM Weather
data on the Weather Data Link Page using the Weather
Page Options Menu (Figure 9-9).
Push in the joystick to display the panning
arrow.
2.
Move the joystick to place the panning arrow
on the desired product. Press the ENT key to
display pertinent information for the selected
product.
To customize the display of weather data
on the Weather Data Link Page:
9-22
1.
Press the Menu key on the Weather Data Link
Page.
2.
Select ‘Weather Setup’ on the Page Menu and
press the ENT key.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight and
move between the product selections. Turn the
small FMS knob to select an option for each
selection and press the ENT key.
Note that pressing the ENT key when panning
over an AIRMET or a SIGMET displays an
information box that gives the actual text of
that alert. Panning over an airport with METAR
information does not display more information
but allows the user to press the ENT key and
select that Airport’s Information Page and
displays the actual text. Pressing the ENT key
when panning over a TFR displays TFR specific
information for the panned TFR.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
WEATHER PRODUCT SYMBOLS
Weather Product Age
Figure 9-11 shows the symbol for each weather
product (read from left to right) . When a weather product
is active, the product symbol is displayed in the lower
right of the screen.
The times for each of the enabled products are displayed
on the right side of the display. Times are based on Zulu
times when the data was assembled on the ground, not the
time the data was received by the FIS sensor. When the age
of a weather product is greater than half of the expiration
time, the product time will change from cyan to amber in
color.
Current weather products use an age stamp, ‘Age: _ _ _’
in minutes. Reported (forecasted) weather products use a
date/time stamp; ‘_ _/_ _ /_ _:_ _’.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NEXRAD
Cloud Top/Echo Top
XM Lightning
Cell Movement
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
METARs
City Forecast
Surface Analysis
Freezing Levels
Winds Aloft
County Warnings
Cyclone Warnings
Echo Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive)
Figure 9-11 Weather Product Symbols
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-23
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Weather Product
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
City Forecasts
County Warnings
Cyclone Warnings
Echo Tops
Freezing Levels
METARs
Lightning
NEXRAD
Radar Coverage
Cell Movement
Surface Analysis
TFRs
Winds Aloft
TAFs
Clouds Tops
Expires After
“n” minutes
60
60
60
60
30
60
90
30
30
30
30
60
60
90
60
60
GDL 69A – XM DIGITAL AUDIO
ENTERTAINMENT
Digital audio entertainment is available through the XM
Satellite Radio Service using the GDL 69A. XM Satellite
Radio allows for a variety of radio programming over long
distances without having to constantly search for new
stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far
exceeds land-based transmissions.
XM Information Page
The XM Information Page provides XM Radio
identification numbers, service level, and weather
products.
To select the XM Information Page (Figure
9-12):
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the Auxiliary
Page Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Aux - XM
Page. Radio and Info softkeys are displayed.
3.
Press the INFO softkey to show the XM
Information Page where information about the
XM Satellite Radio feature is displayed.
4.
Press the RADIO softkey to show the XM
Radio Page where the audio entertainment is
controlled.
Table 9-2 Weather Product Age
Data and Audio Radio ID
Each GDL 69A contains a unique Data Radio ID and
Audio Radio ID that allows XM to communicate with the
radio. The owner must activate XM service by providing
the Radio ID(s) to XM to authorize the installed services
for that radio.
9-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
Weather
Products
Window
INFO
Softkey
RADIO
Softkey
DONE
Softkey
Figure 9-12 XM Information Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-25
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Service Class
Active Channel
The ‘Service Class’ refers to the groupings of weather
products available for subscription.
The Active Channel field on the XM Radio Page
displays the currently selected channel that the XM
Radio is using. The Channel feature is used to navigate
through the channels in the selected category. You can
step through the channels one at a time or you may also
select a channel directly by channel number.
Weather Products Window
The Weather Products Window shows the list of
available weather products and indicates the selected
products for the current subscription. The boxes for
active weather products are filled. Before activation, all
boxes are clear.
XM RADIO PAGE
The Channels window of the XM Radio Page shows a
list of the available channels for the selected category.
To step through channels one at a time:
The XM Radio Page provides information and control
of the audio entertainment features of the XM Satellite
Radio.
XM Radio Softkeys
The following XM Radio softkeys are located below the
display and provide control of the GDL 69A:
RADIO – press the RADIO softkey to access the XM
Satellite Radio audio functions.
INFO – press the INFO softkey to show XM
Information, such as Radio IDs, Service Class, and
Weather Products.
DONE – the DONE softkey is used during the
activation process as described on page 9-7.
CHNL – press the CHNL softkey to allow selection
of radio channels.
CATGRY – press the CATGRY softkey to allow
selection of radio categories.
VOL – press the VOL softkey to adjust the audio
volume or to mute the audio.
PRESETS – press the PRESETS softkey to access
preset channels (PS1 - PS15) or to set a new
preset (SET).
9-26
Channels
1.
While on the XM Radio page, press the CHNL
softkey. The user can also push the FMS knob
to highlight the channel list and turn the large
FMS knob to scroll through the channels.
2.
Press the CH + softkey to go up through the
list in the Channel window or move down the
list with the CH – softkey.
To select a channel directly:
1.
While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL
softkey.
2.
Press the DIR CH softkey. The channel
number in the Active Channel window will be
highlighted (Figure 9-13).
3.
Press the numbered softkeys located on the
bottom of the display to directly select the
desired channel number.
4.
Press the ENT key to activate the selected
channel.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Active
Channels
Channel
List
Categories
Field
Volume
Field
Figure 9-13 XM Radio Page
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-27
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Category
The ‘Category’ field of the XM Radio Page displays
the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news, can be selected to list
the available channels for a type of music or other contents.
One of the optional categories is ‘PRESETS’ if the user
desires to view what channels have been programmed.
Figure 9-15 Volume Control
To adjust the volume:
1.
With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the
VOL softkey.
2.
Press the VOL – softkey to reduce volume or
press the VOL + softkey to increase volume.
(Once the VOL softkey is pressed, the volume
can also be adjusted using the small FMS
knob). Pressing the MUTE softkey toggles the
muting of the radio audio volume.
Presets
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned
a preset number. The preset channel can then be selected
directly and added to the Active Channel list for listening.
Figure 9-14 Categories List
To select a category:
1.
2.
Press the CATGRY softkey key on the XM Radio
Page.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the
‘Categories’ list (Figure 9-14). Highlight the
desired category with the small FMS knob and
press the ENT key. Selecting ‘All Categories’
places the channels from ‘All Categories’ in
the Channels field (press the CAT + and CAT
- softkeys to cycle through the categories).
Volume
The Volume ‘control’ (Figure 9-15) sets the audio
volume level, as well as mutes the audio. Pressing the
VOL softkey brings up the Volume bar graph, muting
softkey, and the Volume control softkeys.
9-28
To set a preset channel number:
1.
On the Radio Page while listening to the Active
Channel that you want to assign as a preset,
press PRESETS.
2.
Press the SET softkey.
3.
Press the preset key (PS1 - PS15) to assign
to the active channel. Press the MORE softkey if
necessary.
To select a preset channel number:
1.
While on the Radio page, press the PRESETS
softkey.
2.
Press the numbered softkeys (PS1 - PS15)
on the bottom of the screen to directly select
the desired preset channel. Press MORE, if
necessary.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
GDL 69A TROUBLESHOOTING
Although it is the responsibility of the facility that
installed the GDL 69A to correct any hardware problems,
the user can perform some quick troubleshooting steps to
find the possible cause of a failure.
First, ensure that the owner/operator of the aircraft
in which the GDL 69A is installed has subscribed to XM
Radio, and that it has been activated. Perform a quick
check of the circuit breakers to ensure the GDL 69A has
power applied. If a failure still exists, review the messages
listed in Table 9-3. The advisory messages may provide
insight to a possible failure.
For troubleshooting purposes, the Status, Serial
Number, and Software Version numbers for the GDL 69A
are displayed in the LRU Information Window on the
System Status Page (Figure 9-16).
Figure 9-16 LRU Information Window
To select the System Status Page:
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the AUX
Page Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the System
Status Page.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-29
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Message
Description
CHECK ANTENNA – XM Radio Page, the active channel is
Antenna is not connected
replaced with this message
UPDATING – XM Radio Page, the active channel is
Updating encryption code
replaced with this message
NO SIGNAL – XM Radio Page, the active channel is
replaced with this message; also displayed on the Weather
Loss of signal
Data Link Page when the signal strength is too low for the
receiver
LOADING – XM Radio Page, the active channel is replaced
Acquiring channel audio or information
with this message
OFF AIR – XM Radio Page, the active channel is replaced
Channel not in service
with this message
--- – XM Radio Page, the active channel is replaced with
Missing channel information
this message
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE – Weather Data Link
No communication with the GDL 69A within the last five minutes
Page, displayed in the center of the screen in yellow
ACTIVATION REQUIRED – Weather Data Link Page,
XM Data receiver is not activated
displayed in the center of the screen in yellow
Table 9-3 Advisory Messages
9-30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
9.5 AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
The GWX 68 Airborne Weather Radar System provides
weather detection and ground mapping capability. The
primary function of the weather radar system is to find
storms along the flight path. Weather detection gives
the crew the ability to recognize potentially dangerous
thunderstorm cells.
The GWX 68 weather radar system also provides
ground mapping, giving the ability to distinguish
landscape features and bodies of water.
Weather radar return strength is shown in five different
colors to show intensities of rainfall (black, green, yellow,
red, and magenta).
Rainfall Rate
Very Heavy Rainfall
Heavy Rainfall
Medium Rainfall
Light Rainfall
No Rainfall
In the ground mapping mode, ground mapped radar
return strength is shown using the colors black, cyan,
yellow, magenta, and blue..
Ground Mapping Return
None
Least Reflective
Moderate Return
Heavy Return
Very Heavy Return
Color
Black
Cyan
Yellow
Magenta
Blue
Table 9-5 Ground Mapping Colors
Color
Magenta
Red
Yellow
Green
Black
Table 9-4 Weather Radar Rainfall Rate Colors
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-31
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Displaying Weather on the Weather Radar
Page
Adjusting Antenna Tilt
On the Horizontal Scan Display
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the Map Page
Group.
1.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Weather
Radar Page.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor in
the TILT field.
2.
3.
Press the MODE softkey.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
antenna tilt angle.
4.
If the aircraft is on the ground, press the
STANDBY softkey to initiate the one minute
warm-up period. After the warm-up is
complete, the radar will enter the standby
mode. After the aircraft is airborne, press the
WEATHER softkey.
3.
Press the FMS knob to remove the cursor.
Radar Mode
Antenna Stabilization
Status
OR
If the aircraft is already airborne, press the
WEATHER softkey.
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is
safe to do so. If it is desired to transmit while the
aircraft is on the ground, no personnel or objects
should be within 11 feet of the antenna.
9-32
5.
Press the BACK softkey.
6.
Press the HORIZON softkey for normal
horizontal scanning or press the VERTICAL
softkey for vertical scanning.
7.
Turn the joystick to select the desired range.
Scan Line
Precipitation
Scale
Figure 9-17 Horizontal Scan Display
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Scan Line
Tilt Line
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to place the Bearing
Line on the desired storm cell, or other area,
to be vertically scanned.
3.
Press the VERTICAL softkey. A vertical ‘slice’ of
the selected area will now be displayed.
4.
The small FMS knob may be used to move the
scanned ‘slice’ a few degrees right or left.
5.
Turn the joystick to adjust the range.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the cursor.
7.
To select a new area to be vertically scanned,
press the HORIZON softkey to return to the
Horizontal Scan view and repeat the previous
steps.
Scan Line
Bearing Line
Figure 9-18 Adjusting Tilt on Vertical Scan Display
On the Vertical Scan Display
1.
Press the TILT softkey to activate the cursor in
the TILT field and display the Tilt Line.
If the Tilt Line is not displayed, press the MENU
key and turn the large FMS knob to select
‘Show Tilt Line’. Press the ENT key.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to adjust the antenna
tilt angle. The selected tilt angle will be
implemented when Horizontal Scan is again
selected.
Vertically Scan a Storm Cell
1.
While in the Horizontal Scan view, press the
BRG softkey. This will place the cursor in the
BEARING field and display the Bearing Line.
Figure 9-19 Bearing Line on Horizontal Scan
If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the
MENU key and turn the large FMS knob to select
‘Show Bearing Line’. Press the ENT key.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-33
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 9-20 Vertical Scan Display
Figure 9-21 Calibrated Gain
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode
will cause precipitation intensity to be displayed
as a color not representative of the true intensity.
See Figures 9-21 and 9-22. Remember to return
the gain setting to ‘Calibrated’ for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
Adjusting Gain
9-34
1.
Press the GAIN softkey to activate the cursor
in the GAIN field.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to adjust the gain for
the desirable level. The gain setting is visible
in the gain field as a movable horizontal bar in
a flashing box. The line pointer is a reference
depicting the calibrated position.
3.
Press the FMS knob to remove the cursor.
4.
Press the GAIN softkey again to recalibrate the
gain. CALIBRATED will be displayed in the
GAIN field.
Figure 9-22 Manual Gain Set Below Calibrated
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Ground Mapping
1.
Press the MODE softkey.
2.
Press the GROUND softkey to place the radar
in Ground Map mode.
3.
Press the BACK softkey.
4.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
5.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor in
the Tilt field.
6.
Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the
small FMS knob to position the ground returns
as desired.
7.
Press the FMS knob to remove the cursor.
Figure 9-23 Selecting Sector Scan Position
Sector Scan
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor in
the BEARING field.
If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the
MENU key and turn the large FMS knob to select
‘Show Bearing Line’. Press the ENT key.
OR: Press the BRG softkey to enable the Bearing
Line.
3.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor in
the SECTOR SCAN field.
Turn the small FMS knob to select FULL, 60˚,
40˚, or 20˚ scan.
If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as
discussed previously to change the center of
the Sector Scan.
Press the FMS knob to remove the cursor.
Turn the small FMS knob to place the Bearing
Line in the desired position. The location of
the Bearing Line will become the center point
of the Sector Scan.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
9-35
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
To activate or deactivate the Watch feature, press the
WATCH softkey.
Figure 9-24 40˚ Sector Scan
Antenna Stabilization
1.
2.
Figure 9-25 Horizontal Scan Without WATCH
To activate or deactivate the antenna
stabilization, press the MODE softkey.
Press the STAB ON softkey to activate antenna
stabilization or press the STAB OFF sofkey to
deactivate. The current stabilization condition
is shown in the upper right of the weather radar
display.
Displayed intensity
is questionable. Potentially stronger
than displayed.
Areas of Attenuated
Signal
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH)
This feature is used as a tool to determine areas
of possible inaccuracies in displayed intensity due to
weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known
as ‘attenuation’. The radar energy weakens as it passes
through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of
lesser precipitation, and distance. This has an effect on
the return intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the
lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy of
the displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded
areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions with this
information in mind.
9-36
Figure 9-26 Horizontal Scan With WATCH
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Annunciations and Alerts
SECTION 10 ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
10.1 ANNUNCIATIONS AND
ALERTS
NOTE: The Beechcraft 58/G58 Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) supersedes information found
in this document.
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts to the pilot
using a combination of the following items:
• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation
window displays abbreviated annunciation text.
The Annunciation window is located to the
right of the Altitude and Vertical Speed windows
on the PFD display (or the MFD if system is in
reversionary mode). Up to 12 annunciations can
be displayed simultaneously. A white horizontal
line separates annunciations that are acknowledged
from annunciations that are not yet acknowledged.
Acknowledged annunciations are always above
the line. Annuciations are displayed in order
of priority from top to bottom. The highest
priority annunciation is displayed at the top of the
Annunciation Window.
• Alerts Window: The Alerts window displays
alert text messages. Up to 64 prioritized alerts
can be displayed in the Alerts window. Pressing
the ALERTS softkey displays the Alerts window.
Pressing the ALERTS softkey again removes the
Alerts window from the display. When the Alerts
window is displayed, the pilot may use the large
FMS knob to scroll through the alert list. Higher
priority alerts are displayed at the top of the window.
Lower priority alerts are displayed at the bottom of
the window.
190-00629-00 Rev. A
• ALERTS Softkey Annunciation: When the
Alerting System issues an alert, the ALERTS softkey
is used as a flashing annunciation to accompany an
alert. During the alert, the ALERTS softkey assumes
a new label consistent with alert level (WARNING,
CAUTION, or ADVISORY). Pressing the softkey
annunciation acknowledges that the pilot is aware of
the alert. The softkey then returns to the previous
ALERTS label. The pilot can then press the ALERTS
softkey again to view alert text messages.
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’
appears in a window when a related LRU fails or
detects invalid data.
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 system issues
audio alert tones when specific system conditions
are met. See the Alert Levels Definitions section for
more information.
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
Annunciation
Window
Alerts Window
ALERTS Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 10-1 G1000 Alerting System
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
10-1
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
The G1000 Alerting System, as installed in Beechcraft
58/G58 aircraft, uses four alert levels.
• WARNING: This level of alert is time critical and
requires immediate pilot attention. A warning
annunciation is displayed in the Annunciation
Window as red text. A warning annunciation is
also accompanied by a flashing red WARNING
softkey label, as shown in Figure 10-2. Pressing
the WARNING softkey acknowledges the presence
of the warning alert, and stops the aural tone (if
applicable). The softkey has now reverted to the
ALERTS softkey label and displays a description
of the warning annunciation in the Alerts Window
when pressed.
• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the
existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft
that may require pilot intervention. A caution
annunciation is displayed in the Annunciation
Window as yellow text. A caution annunciation is
also accompanied by a flashing yellow WARNING
softkey label, as shown in Figure 10-3. Pressing the
CAUTION softkey acknowledges the presence of
the caution alert. The softkey has now reverted to
the ALERTS softkey label and displays a description
of the caution annunciation in the Alerts Window
when pressed.
• ADVISORY ANNUNCIATION: This level of
alert provides general information to the pilot that
may not need immediate attention. An advisory
annunciation is displayed in the Annunciation
Window as white text. An advisory annunciation is
also accompanied by a flashing white ADVISORY
softkey label, as shown in Figure 10-4.
10-2
Pressing the ADVISORY softkey acknowledges the
presence of the advisory alert. The softkey has now
reverted to the ALERTS softkey label and displays
a description of the advisory annunciation in the
Alerts Window when pressed.
• ALERT MESSAGE: These messages are provided
to make the pilot aware of G1000 system problems
or status, and may not require pilot action. An
alert message is accompanied by a flashing white
ADVISORY softkey label, as shown in Figure 10-4.
Pressing the ADVISORY softkey acknowledges the
presence of the advisory alert, The softkey has now
reverted to the ALERTS softkey label and displays
a description of the alert message in the Alerts
Window when pressed.
Figure 10-2 WARNING Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 10-3 CAUTION Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 10-4 ADVISORY Softkey
Annunciation
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
BEECHCRAFT 58/G58 ANNUNCIATIONS &
ALERTS
See the Beechcraft 58/G58 Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for information regarding pilot responses.
WARNING Annunciation
Annunciation Window Text
GEAR UP
Alerts Window Message
Gear up.
Audio Alert
Continuous Tone (received through the G1000 audio from
another source)
L ALT INOP
Left alternator offline.
Repeating Tone
R ALT INOP
Right alternator offline.
Repeating Tone
Right and Left alternators offline.
Repeating Tone
L-R ALT INOP
CAUTION Annunciation
Annunciation Window Text
Alerts Window Message
Audio Alert
L START ENGD
Left starter relay has power applied.
Single Chime
R START ENGD
Right starter relay has power applied.
Single Chime
LBUS VOLT HI
Left bus voltage greater than 30 VDC.
Single Chime
RBUS VOLT HI
Right bus voltage greater than 30 VDC.
Single Chime
LBUS VOLT LO
Left bus voltage less than 24 V. Suppressed below 500 RPM
Single Chime
RBUS VOLT LO
Right bus voltage less than 24 V. Suppressed below 500 RPM
Single Chime
AFT DOOR
Aft door not latched.
Single Chime
L AIR PUMP
Press Low — Ops in icing conditions not approved.
Single Chime
R AIR PUMP
Press Low — Ops in icing conditions not approved.
Single Chime
ADVISORY Annunciation
Annunciation Window Text
BUSES TIED
Alerts Window Message
Audio Alert
Right Bus is tied to Left Bus.
None
Alerts Window Message
Audio Alert
Alert Message
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative.
None
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative.
None
AVIONICS FAN – The cooling fan for remote avionics is inoperative.
None
190-00629-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
10-3
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
AFCS ALERTS
System Status Field
System Status Field
The following AFCS alert annunciations appear in the
AFCS System Status field on the PFD.
• WARNING: Red annunciation is time critical and
indicates an abnormal AFCS condition requiring
immediate pilot attention.
• CAUTION: Yellow annunciation indicates the
existence of abnormal AFCS conditions that may
require pilot intervention.
Condition
Pitch Failure
Annunciation
Figure 10-5 AFCS System Status Field
Description
Pitch axis control failure. AP is inoperative.
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure. AP is inoperative.
MET Switch Stuck, or
Pitch Trim Axis Control
Failure
If annunciated when AP is engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage the
autopilot. If annunciated when AP is not engaged, move each half of the MET switch
separately to check if a stuck switch is causing the annunciation.
Yaw Damper Failure
Yaw Damper control failure.
System Failure
AP and MET are unavailable. FD may still be available.
Elevator Mistrim Up
A condition has developed causing the pitch servo to provide a sustained force. Be
prepared to apply nose up control wheel force upon autopilot disconnect.
A condition has developed causing the pitch servo to provide a sustained force. Be
prepared to apply nose down control wheel force upon autopilot disconnect.
A condition has developed causing the roll servo to provide a sustained left force. Ensure
the slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any maximum fuel imbalance limits.
A condition has developed causing the roll servo to provide a sustained right force. Ensure the slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any maximum fuel imbalance limits.
A condition has developed causing the yaw servo to provide a sustained force. Ensure
the slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any maximum fuel imbalance limits.
A condition has developed causing the yaw servo to provide a sustained force. Ensure
the slip/skid indicator is centered and observe any maximum fuel imbalance limits.
Performing preflight system test. Upon completion, the aural alert will be heard.
Elevator Mistrim
Down
Aileron Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
Rudder Mistrim Right
Preflight Test
Preflight system test has failed.
10-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
TAWS ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
PFD/MFD TAWS
Page
Annunciation
Alert Type
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
or
190-00629-00 Rev. A
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
10-5
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
TAWS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
PFD/MFD TAWS
Page
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
TAWS System Test Fail
None
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
No GPS position or excessively degraded
GPS signal
None
“TAWS Not Available”
System Test in progress
None
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
Alert Type
None
System Test pass
G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the failed
data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the POH for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations. Upon power-up of the G1000 system, certain windows remain invalid as
G1000 equipment begins to initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. Should any
window continue to remain flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair center.
Traffic Voice Alerts
Voice Alert
“Traffic”
“Traffic Not Available”
“Traffic, Traffic”
“Traffic Advisory System Test Passed”
“Traffic Advisory System Test Failed”
System Annunciation
Alert Trigger
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued.
Played when the traffic system fails or cannot communicate.
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (Skywatch TAS system).
Played when the TAS system passes a pilot-initiated self test.
Played when the TAS system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
Comment
Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
10-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
System Annunciation
Comment
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the AHRS.
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from air data computer.
Display is not receiving altitude input from the air data computer.
Display is not receiving vertical speed input from the air data computer.
Display is not receiving valid heading input from AHRS.
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation use.
Note that AHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal operation. AHRS operation may be degraded if GPS signals are not present (see POH).
Display is not receiving valid transponder information.
Other Various Red X Indications
190-00629-00 Rev. A
A red ‘X’ through any other display field, such as engine instrumentation
fields, indicates that the field is not receiving valid data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
10-7
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
A red ‘X’ may be the result of an LRU or an LRU
function failure. The Figure 12-6 illustrates all possible
flags and the responsible LRUs.
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air Data
Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
OR
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Unit
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air Data
Computer
Figure 10-6 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
G1000 SYSTEM ALERT MESSAGES
This section describes various G1000 system alert
messages. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or
an LRU function failure. Such messages are displayed in
the Alerts Window and are normally accompanied by a
corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation as shown previously in
the G1000 System Annunciation section.
10-8
GTX 33 Transponder
OR
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
NOTE: This section provides information
regarding G1000 alert messages that may be
displayed by the system. Knowledge of the
aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other
existing operational priorities must be considered
when responding to a message. Always use
sound pilot judgment. The Beechcraft 58/
G58 Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) takes
precedence over any conflicting guidance found
in this section.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
MFD & PFD Alert Messages
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
mismatch. Xtalk is off.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck.
MFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
190-00629-00 Rev. A
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings.
The pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD configuration module backup memory has failed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
10-9
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
Database Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
Comments
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 aviation
database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the aviation database. Attempt to reload
the aviation database. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 aviation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terdatabase error exists.
rain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, The
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database G1000 system should be serviced.
error exists.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation database
The PFD and MFD have different aviation database versions installed. Crossfill is off.
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Install correct aviation database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation database
The PFD and MFD have different aviation database types installed (Americas, European, etc.). Crossfill is off. Install correct aviation database type in both displays.
type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
DB MISMATCH – Basemap database
The PFD and MFD have different basemap database versions installed. Crossfill is
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
off. Install correct basemap database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions installed. Crossfill is off.
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Install correct terrain database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database types installed. Crossfill is off.
type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Install correct terrain database type in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database
The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions installed. Crossfill is off.
version mismatch. Xtalk is off
Install correct obstacle database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrrain databases installed. Crossfill is off.
database mismatch. Xtalk is off
Install correct airport terrain database in both displays.
10-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GMA 1347 Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
error. Config service req’d.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
mismatch. Communication halted.
serviced.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions
service. Return unit for repair.
may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The G1000 system
should be serviced when possible.
BACKUP PATH – Audio panel 1 using
The #1 audio panel is using a backup communication path. The G1000 system
backup data path.
should be serviced when possible.
GIA 63 Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
GIA1/2 CONFIG – GIA1/2 configuration error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
190-00629-00 Rev. A
Comments
The GIA1/2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000
system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
10-11
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GIA 63 Alert Messages (Cont.)
Alerts Window Message
Comments
MANIFEST – GIA1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should
MANIFEST – GIA2 software mismatch. be serviced.
Communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
Reducing transmitter power.
transmitter will operate at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000 system
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
should be serviced.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
is stuck.
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) positransfer key is stuck.
tion. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
the G1000 system should be serviced.
transfer key is stuck.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not
GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
available from FAF to MAP waypoints.
Monitoring (RAIM) from the FAF to the MAP waypoints.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not
GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
available.
Monitoring (RAIM) for the current phase of flight.
POSN ERROR – RAIM has determined When a RAIM position error is detected, GPS is flagged and the system no longer
GPS position is in error.
provides GPS-based guidance.
DGRD GPS ACC – GPS position
GPS position accuracy has been degraded and RAIM is not available.
accuracy degraded & RAIM unavailable.
10-12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver is
unavailable. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.
GIA 63 Alert Messages (Cont.)
Alerts Window Message
Comments
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service. be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
transfer key is stuck.
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
the G1000 system should be serviced.
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The G1000
system should be serviced.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GEA 71 Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
190-00629-00 Rev. A
Comments
The GEA 71 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
10-13
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
BACKUP PATH – EIS using backup
data path.
The GEA 71 is using a backup communication path. The G1000 system should be
serviced when possible.
GTX 33 Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – XPDR1 using backup
data path.
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #1 transponder is using a backup communications path. The G1000 system
should be serviced when possible.
GRS 77 Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – AHRS1 using backup
data path.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
10-14
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The G1000
system should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS limitations. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 system
should be serviced when possible.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GMU 44 Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
Comments
A fault has occurred in the GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GDL 69 Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 configuration error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The G1000
system should be serviced
GDC 74A Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
GDC1 CONFIG – GDC1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – ADC1 using backup
data path.
Comments
GDC 74A configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The GDC 74A is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 system
should be serviced when possible.
GWX 68 Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
GWX CONFIG – GWX configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GWX FAIL – GWX is inoperative.
GWX SERVICE – GWX needs service.
Return unit for repair.
190-00629-00 Rev. A
Comments
GWX 68 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
The GDU is not recieving status packet from the GWX 68. The GWX 68 radar system
should be serviced.
The GDU is receiving a fault from the GWX 68. The GWX 68 radar system should be
serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
10-15
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
Miscellaneous Alert Messages
Alerts Window Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the G1000 system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is
is locked.
locked. This occurs when an aviation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This
can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
aviation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
Verify user modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after an aviation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed aviation database eliminates an obsolete approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
truncated.
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
APPR VPROF – Approaching VNAV
Aircraft is approaching VNAV profile. Prepare to climb or descend to meet VNAV
profile.
profile.
APPR TRG ALT – Approaching target
Aircraft is approaching target altitude. Prepare to level aircraft.
altitude.
10-16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
Miscellaneous Alert Messages (Cont.)
Alerts Window Message
Comments
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate locked This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace
than 10 minutes.
within 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
than 2 nm.
LEG UNSMOOTH – Flight plan leg will The approaching flight plan waypoints are too close to allow for smooth turns.
not be smooth.
Prepare for steep turns ahead and expect noticeable course deviations.
APPR INACTV – Approach is not
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate apactive.
proach when required.
SLCT AUTOSEQ – Select auto
The system notifies the pilot to select auto-sequence mode. Press the OBS softkey to
sequence mode.
deactivate the OBS mode.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI
approach.
to the correct NAV receiver.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
The selected waypoint [xxxx] does not use the WGS 84 datum. Cross-check position
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
with alternate navigation sources.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
The traffic information system TIS has failed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
failed.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
Stormscope has failed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
failed.
Stormscope is using the backup communication path. The G1000 system should be
BACKUP PATH – Stormscope using
backup path.
serviced when possible.
190-00629-00 Rev. A
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
10-17
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
This page intentionally left blank
10-18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. A
G1000
TM
Appendices
APPENDICES
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A SD CARD USE
SD CARD USE
4.
The G1000 system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards
to load and store various types of data. For basic flight
operations, SD cards are required for terrain database
storage as well as aviation database updates.
After the update completes, the PFD starts in
normal mode. Remove the aviation database
update SD card from the PFD.
5.
Turn the G1000 system OFF.
6.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the MFD. The
MFD and PFD aviation databases are now
updated.
7.
Verify that the correct update cycle is loaded
during startup of the MFD.
AVIATION DATABASE
Jeppesen aviation databases are released every 28
days, and are provided directly to the pilot by Jeppesen.
Updates must be loaded to both the MFD and PFD using
an aviation database update SD card provided by Jeppesen.
The card reader downloads the aviation database files and
stores them in the PFD and MFD internal memory.
NOTE: The display downloads the aviation
database and stores it internally. The aviation
database SD card is not required to remain in
the display after the update.
To update the Jeppesen aviation database:
1.
With the G1000 system OFF, insert the aviation
database update SD card into the top card slot
of the PFD (Label of SD card facing left).
2.
Turn the G1000 system ON. The following
prompt is displayed on the upper left corner
of the PFD:
3.
Press the ENT key to confirm the database
updated. The following prompt is displayed:
190-00629-00 Rev. B
TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE DATABASES
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and
obstacle databases comes from government
agencies. Garmin accurately processes and
cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee
the accuracy and completeness of the data.
NOTE: Obstacles 200’ and higher are included in
the obstacle database. It is very important to note
that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and
therefore may not be contained in the obstacle
database.
G1000 topography, terrain, and obstacle data is stored
on a Supplemental Data Card provided by Garmin. The
obstacle database update cycle is every 56 days. The
terrain database is updated less often, and on an irregular
basis. Since these databases are not stored internally in
the MFD or PFD, Supplemental Data Cards containing
identical database versions must be kept in both displays
to retain terrain and obstacle data. A Supplemental Data
Card should be inserted into the bottom card slot of the
PFD and MFD.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
A-1
APPENDIX A
NOTE: If the Supplemental Data Card is removed
from the display, the TOPO and TERRAIN
softkeys are not functional and are grayed out
on the MFD Map Page.
The obstacle and terrain database updates can be
obtained by following the instructions detailing in the
‘Aviation Databases’ section of the Garmin website
(www.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been
downloaded from the website, a PC equipped with an
appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program
the new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data
Cards. Equipment required to perform the update is as
follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows
2000 or XP recommended).
• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or
SDDR-99 or equivalent card reader.
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin
website.
• Existing 010-00330-41 Supplemental Database
SD Cards from both PFD and MFD.
After the data has been copied to both data cards,
perform the following steps:
1.
Insert one card in the bottom card slot of the
MFD and one in the bottom card slot of the
PFD.
2.
Apply power to the G1000 system. View the
MFD Power-up Page. Check that the Terrain
and Obstacle databases are initialized and
displayed on the scrolling window of the
Power-up Page as shown in the following
figure:
3.
Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by
pressing the ENT key or the rightmost softkey.
At the MAP – NAVIGATION MAP page, press
the MAP softkey and check to make sure that
the TOPO and TERRAIN softkeys are functional
(not grayed out).
4.
Power down the G1000.
Figure A-1 MFD Power-up Screen
A-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX B ABBREVIATIONS, ACRONYMS & NAV
TERMS
Abbreviation or Acronym
ADF
AF
AFM
AFMS
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
ALT
AMPS
ANNUNC
APPR
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ATC
ATCRBS
AUTOSEQ
AUX
Definition
Automatic Direction Finder
Arc to fix
Aircraft Flight Manual
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
Altitude
Amperes
Annunciation
Approach
Approach
Airport
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
B ALT
BARO
BKSP
BRG
Barometric Altitude
Barometer
Backspace
Bearing
C
CA
CALC
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
COM
CONFIG
COPLT
CR
CRG
CRNT
CRS
CRSR
Celsius
Course to Altitude
Calculator
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Channel
Course to Intercept
Cloud
Clear
Communication Radio
Configuration
Co-pilot
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
Course
Cursor
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
Abbreviation or Acronym
CTRL
CVR
CVRG
CYL
Definition
Control
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Cylinder
D ALT
DB
DBASE
DBZ
DEC FUEL
DECLTR
DEP
DF
DFLT
DFLTS
DIS
DME
DOP
DP
DSBL
DTK
Density Altitude
Database
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Decrease Fuel
Declutter
Departure
Direct to Fix
Default
Defaults
Distance
Distance Measuring Equipment
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Disabled
Desired Track
ECU
EGT
EIS
ELEV
EMI
ENDUR
ENGD
ENR
ENT
EPE
ERR
ESA
ETA
ETE
EXPIRD
Engine Control Unit
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
Elevation
Electromagnetic Interference
Endurance
Engaged
Enroute
Enter
Estimated Position Error
Error
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Expired
FA
FAA
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
Forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance,
Flight Director
Fuel Flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FM
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
B-1
APPENDIX B
B-2
Abbreviation or Acronym
FMS
FOB
FPL
FPM
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Definition
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
Flight Plan
Feet Per Minute
Frequency
Freezing
Flight Service Station
Foot/feet
G/S
GAL
GDC
GDU
GEA
GIA
GL
GMU
GND
GPH
GPS
GRS
GS
GTX
Glideslope
Gallon(s)
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Gallon(s)
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Global Positioning System
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed
Garmin Transponder
HA
HDG
HF
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
hPa
HR
HSI
HUL
Hz
Hold Terminating at Altitude
Heading
Hold Terminating at Fix
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination
Hectopascal
Hour
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz
I
IAF
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
INACTV
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inactive
Abbreviation or Acronym
INC FUEL
IND
INT
IrDA, IRDA
Definition
Increase Fuel
Indicated
Intersection(s)
Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK
KG
KHz
KM
KT
Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot
L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LED
LIFR
LO
LOC
LON
LRU
LTNG
LVL
Left
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Light Emitting Diode
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Low
Localizer
Longitude
Line Replacement Unit
Lightning
Level
M
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
METAR
MFD
MGRS
MIC
MIN
MKR
MOA
MOV
MPM
MSA
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
Middle Marker
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
Maximum
Meteorological Aviation Routine
Multi Function Display
Military Grid Reference System
Microphone
Minimum
Marker Beacon
Military Operations Area
Movement
Meters Per Minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
NAV
NAVAID
Navigation
NAVigation AID
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
Abbreviation or Acronym
NDB
Nexrad
nm
NRST
Definition
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Nautical Mile(s)
Nearest
O
OAT
OBS
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
P ALT
PA
PASS
PFD
PI
POSN
P. POS
PRES
PRESS
PROC
PSI
PT
PTCH
PTT
PWR
Pressure Altitude
Passenger Address
Passenger(s)
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
Position
Present Position
Pressure
Pressure
Procedure(s)
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Pitch
Push-to-Talk
Power
QTY
Quantity
R
RAD
RAIM
REF, REFS
REM
REQ
RES
RF
RMI
RNG
RNWY
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RVRSNRY
RX
Right
Radial
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
References
Remaining (fuel remaining above Reserve)
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Range
Runway
Revolutions per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve
Reversionary
Receive
SA
SAT
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL
SFC
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Surface
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Abbreviation or Acronym
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
Sim
SLCT
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SW
SYS
Definition
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Select
Slip/skid
Symbol
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Special Use Airspace
Suspend
Software
System
T HDG
TAS
TAF
TAT
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
TIS
TKE
TMA
TRG
TRK
TRUNC
TX
True Heading
True Airspeed
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
Total Air Temperature
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
Traffic Information System
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Target
Track
Truncated
Transmit
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Unavailable
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator / Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
V
Vne
Vr
Vx
Vy
VA
Airspeed/Velocity
Never-exceed Speed
Rotate Speed
Best Angle of Climb Speed
Best Rate of Climb speed
Heading Vector to Altitude
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
B-3
APPENDIX B
B-4
Abbreviation or Acronym
VD
VERT
VFR
VHF
VI
VLOC
VM
VMC
VNAV
VOL
VOR
VPROF
VR
VS
Vspeed
Definition
Heading Vector to DME Distance
Vertical
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
Heading Vector to Intercept
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VNAV Profile
Heading Vector to Radial
Vertical Speed
Airspeed
WAAS
WGS-84
WPT
WPTS
WW
WX
Wide Area Augmentation System
World Geodetic System - 1984
Waypoint(s)
Waypoints
World Wide
Weather
XFER
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
Transfer
Transponder
Cross-talk
Cross-track
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX B
Navigation Term
Bearing
Calibrated Airpseed
Course
Course to Steer
Crosstrack Error
Cumulative
Distance
Dillution of Precision
Desired Track
Efficiency
Endurance
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Position Error
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Fuel Flow
Fuel On Board
Groundspeed
Heading
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Definition
The compass direction from your present
position to a destination waypoint.
Indicated airspeed corrected for installation
and instrument errors.
The line between two points to be followed
by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer in order
to reduce course error or stay on course.
Provides the most efficient heading to get
back to the desired course and proceed along
your flight plan.
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
The ‘great circle’ distance from your present
position to a destination waypoint.
A measure of GPS satellite geometry quality
on a scale of one to ten (lower numbers
equal better geometry, where higher numbers
equal poorer geometry)
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
A measure of fuel consumption, expressed in
distance per unit of fuel.
Flight endurance, or total possible flight time
based on available fuel on board.
The recommended minimum altitude within
ten miles left or right of the desired course on
an active flight plan or direct-to.
A measure of horizontal GPS position error
derrived by satellite geometry conditions and
other factors.
The estimated time at which the aircraft
should reach the destination waypoint, based
upon current speed and track.
The estimeated time it takes to reach the
destination waypoint from the present position, based upon current groundspeed.
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of fuel
per hour.
The total amount of usable fuel on board the
aircraft.
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based
upon indications from a magnetic compass or
a properly set directional gyro.
Navigation Term
Indicated
Leg
Left Over Fuel On Board
Left Over Fuel Reserve
Minimum Safe Altitude
Track
Track Angle Error
Vertical Speed Required
Definition
Information provided by properly calibrated
and set instrumentation on the aircraft panel.
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
The amount of fuel remaining on board after
the completion of one or more legs of a flight
plan or direct-to.
The amount of flight time remaining, based
on the amount of fuel on board after the
completion of one or more legs of a flight
plan or direct-to, and a known consumption
rate.
Uses Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitudes (Grid
MORAs) to determine a safe altitude within
ten miles of the aircraft present position.
Grid MORAs are one degree latitude by one
degree longitude in size. The Grid MORA
clears the highest elevation reference point in
the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of the grid.
The direction of aircraft movement relative
to a ground position. Also referred to as
‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and your current track.
The vertical speed necessary to descend/climb
from a current position and altitude to a
defined target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
B-5
APPENDIX B
This page intentionally left blank.
B-6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX C
APPENDIX C QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
This Appendix answers common questions regarding
G1000 system operational capabilities. If a particular
subject is not covered in this Appendix, the index may
be used to find the appropriate section in this manual.
If a sufficient answer is still not found, an authorized
Garmin dealer or contact Garmin directly (see Copyright
page). Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and
customers.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach
operations?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous
Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function
that performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of
tracked GPS satellites.
• Eliminates a corrupt satellite from the navigation
solution.
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do
not provide the necessary coverage to support a
certain phase of flight.
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to
determine whether the number of available satellites is sufficient to satisfy requirements.
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must
track at least five (5) satellites. A minimum of six (6)
satellites is required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single
corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for
a navigation solution calculation within a specified
protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm
for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches).
The G1000 system monitors RAIM and issues an alert
message when RAIM is not available (see Annunciation
190-00629-00 Rev. B
and Alerts Pilot’s Guide). Without RAIM, GPS position
accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the pilot must fly the missed
approach procedure.
N OT E : I f R A I M i s n o t p r e d i c t e d t o
b e a va i l a b l e f o r t h e f i n a l a p p r o a c h
course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available
from FAF to MAP” message and the INTEG
annunciation flagging.
Why are there not any approaches available for
a flight plan?
Approaches are available for the final destination
airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport
identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the
available procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected?
Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure,
or an arrival be stored?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into
the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure, or arrival
waypoints is inserted into the flight plan – along with a
header line showing the title of the selected instrument
procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight
plan remains active, unless the instrument procedure is
activated. This may be done either when the procedure is
loaded, or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a
departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active
flight plan is overwritten when a stored flight plan is
activated.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
C-1
APPENDIX C
When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure,
or an arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information
from the current database to define the waypoints. If
the database is changed or updated, the G1000 system
automatically updates the information, provided the
procedure has not been modified. Should an approach,
departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the
flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted
from the flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the
G1000?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 system
meets the requirements of TSO-C129 Class A1 or A2
installation. Non-precision GPS approaches are not to
be flown with an expired database. See the approved
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) as well as
the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.
What does the OBS softkey do?
The OBS softkey is used to select manual sequencing
of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference
and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled,
automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and the
G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the
flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present active
waypoint.
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
• Manual course change on HSI is not possible
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach course
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
• Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
C-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX C
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot
to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the CRS/
BARO knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
One application for the OBS softkey is holding patterns.
The OBS softkey is used to suspend waypoint sequencing
and select the desired course along the waypoint side of
the hold. For many approach operations, setting and
resetting of waypoint sequencing is automatic. Holding
patterns that are part of an approach automatically disable
waypoint sequencing, then re-enable waypoint sequencing
after one time around the holding pattern. To fly the
holding pattern a second time, press the OBS softkey. An
example of this operation is an approach which begins
with a holding pattern at the initial approach fix (IAF).
The most common application for using the OBS
softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a “SUSP”
annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the
G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the
OBS softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing the
SUSP softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing.
The OBS softkey then resumes its normal functionality.
WARNING: The G1000 does not provide
guidance to the missed approach hold point
(MAHP). Always follow published missed
approach procedures when flying a missed
approach.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Beechcraft 58/G58
C-3
APPENDIX C
Why does the G1000 not automatically sequence
to the next waypoint?
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when
automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or “SUSP”
annunciation).
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach,
a departure, or an arrival?
The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any
approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of the
flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD,
from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and pressing the ACT LEG softkey,
then the ENT key to approve the selection. The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
The G1000 smoothes adjacent leg transitions based
upon a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
25°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
1) A waypoint alert (“NEXT DTK ###°”) flashes on
the PFD 10 seconds before the turn point.
2) A flashing turn advisory (“TURN TO ###°”)
appears on the PFD when the pilot is to begin
the turn. The HSI (GPS mode) automatically
sequences to the next DTK value.
3) The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has
been crossed.
When does the CDI scale change?
When 30 nm from the destination, the G1000 begins
a smooth CDI scale transition from 5.0 nm (en-route
mode) to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). When 2 nm from the
FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
to 0.3 nm (approach mode). When executing a missed
approach, the CDI can be returned to the 1.0 nm scale by
pressing the SUSP softkey. The CDI is also set to 1.0 nm
(terminal mode) within 30 nm of the departure airport.
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when
OBS mode is active?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment
is based on the cross-track distance to the desired course,
not on angular relationship to the destination. Therefore,
the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant regardless of
the distance to the destination and does not become less
sensitive when further away from the destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure?
How is the missed approach holding point
selected?
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does
not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes
the active waypoint when the SUSP softkey is pressed
AFTER crossing the MAP. All published missed approach
procedures must be followed, as indicated on the approach
plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the
MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG softkey to activate the missed
approach portion of the procedure.
C-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX D G1000 MAP DATUMS
G1000 MAP DATUMS
The G1000 system supports the following map
datums.
WARNING: WGS 84 is the default datum and
should be used in all situations except when
another datum is specifically required for safe
navigation. Pilots using map datums other than
WGS 84 do so at their own risk.
ADINDAN
Ethiopia, Mali, Senegal, Sudan
AFGOOYE
Somalia
AIN El ABD 1970
Bahrain Island, Saudi Arabia
ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965
Cocos Islands
ARC 1950
Botswana, Lesotho, Malawi, Swaziland, Zaire, Zambia, Zimbabwe
ARC 1960
Kenya, Tanzania
ASCENSION IS 1958
Ascension Island
ASTRO B4 SOROL ATOLL
Tern Island
ASTRO BEACON “E”
Iwo Jima Island
ASTRO DOS 71/4
St. Helena Island
ASTRONOMIC STN 1952
Marcus Island
AUSTRALIAN GEOD 1966
Australia, Tasmania Island
AUSTRALIAN GEOD 1984
Australia, Tasmania Island
AUSTRIA NS
Austria
BELGIUM 1950
Belgium
BELLEVUE (IGN)
Efate and Erromango Islands
BERMUDA 1957
Bermuda Islands
BOGATA OBSERVATORY
Colombia
BUKIT RIMPAH
Indonesia
CAMP AREA ASTRO
Antarctica
CAMPO INCHAUSPE
Argentina
CANTON ASTRO 1966
Phoenix Islans
CAPE
South Africa
CAPE CANAVERAL
Florida, Bahama Islands
CARTHAGE
Tunisia
CH-1903
Switzerland
CHATHAM 1971
Chatham Island (New Zealand)
CHUA ASTRO
Paraguay
CORREGO ALEGRE
Brazil
DANISH GI 1934
Denmark
DJAKARTA (BATAVIA)
Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
DOS 1968
Gizo Island (New Georgia Islands)
EASTER ISLAND 1967
Easter Island
EUROPEAN 1950
Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France,
Germany, Gibraltar, Greece, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland
EUROPEAN 1979
Austria, Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland
190-00629-00 Rev. B
FINLAND HAYFORD 1910
G. SEGARA
GANDAJIKA BASE
GEODETIC DATUM 1949
GGRS 87
GUAM 1963
GUX 1 ASTRO
HERAT NORTH
HJORSEY 1955
HONG KONG 1963
HU-TZU SHAN
INDIAN BNGLDSH NEPAL
INDIAN MEAN VALUE
INDIAN THAILAND VIETN
INDONESIA 74
IRELAND 1965
ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969
JOHNSTON ISLAND 1961
KANDAWALA
KERGUELEN ISLAND
KERTAU 1948
L.C. 5 ASTRO
LIBERIA 1964
LUZON MEAN VALUE
LUZON MINDANAO IS
LUZON PHILIPPINES
MAHE 1971
MARCO ASTRO
MASSAWA
MERCHICH
MIDWAY ASTRO 1961
MINNA
NAD27 ALASKA
NAD27 BAHAMAS
NAD27 CANADA
NAD27 CANAL ZONE
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
APPENDIX D
Finland
Borneo
Republic of Maldives
New Zealand
Greece
Guam Island
Guadalcanal Island
Afghanistan
Iceland
Hong Kong
Taiwan
Bangladesh, India, Nepal
India
Thailand, Vietnam
Indonesia
Ireland
Diego Garcia
Johnston Island
Sri Lanka
Kerguelen Island
West Malaysia
Cayman Brac Island
Liberia
Philippines
Mindanao Island
Philippines (excluding Mindanao Isl.)
Mahe Island
Salvage Islands
Eritrea (Ethiopia)
Morocco
Midway Island
Nigeria
North American 1927 – Alaska
North American 1927 – Bahamas
North American 1927 – Canada
North American 1927 – Canal Zone
D-1
APPENDIX D
G1000 MAP DATUMS (CONT.)
NAD27 CARIBBEAN
North American 1927 – Caribbean: Barbados, Caicos
Islands, Cuba, Dominican
Republic, Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Leeward and Turks Islands
NAD27 CENTRAL AMERICA
North American 1927 – Central America: Belize,
Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, and Nicaragua
NAD27 CONUS
North American 1927 – Continental United States
NAD27 CUBA
North American 1927 – Cuba
NAD27 GREENLAND
North American 1927 – Greenland (Hayes Peninsula)
NAD27 MEXICO
North American 1927 – Mexico
NAD27 SAN SALVADOR IS
North American 1927 – San Salvador Island
NAD83
North American 1983 – Alaska, Canada, Central America, CONUS, Mexico
NAHRWAN MASIRAH IS
Masirah Island (Oman)
NAHRWAN SAUDI ARABIA
Saudi Arabia
NAHRWAN UNITD ARAB E
United Arab Emirates
NAPARIMA BWI
Trinidad and Tobago
NETHERLAND TRIAG ’21
Netherlands
NOU TRIAG FRANCE
France
NOU TRIAG LUXEMBOURG
Luxembourg
OBSERVATORIO 1966
Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
OLD EGYPTIAN
Egypt
OLD HAWAIIAN KAUAI
Kauai
OLD HAWAIIAN MAUI
Maui
OLD HAWAIIAN MEAN
Mean Value
OLD HAWAIIAN OAHU
Oahu
OMAN
Oman
ORD SRV GRT BRITAIN England, Isle of Man, Scotland, Shetland Islands, Wales
PICO DE LAS NIEVAS
Canary Islands
PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967
Pitcairn Island
PORTUGUESE 1973
Portugal
D-2
POTSDAM
Germany
PROV SO AMERICA ’56
Bolivia, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana, Peru, Venezuala
PROV SO CHILEAN 1963
South Chile
PUERTO RICO
Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
QATAR NATIONAL
Qatar
QORNOQ
South Greenland
REUNION
Mascarene Island
ROME 1940
Sardinia Island
RT 90
Sweden
SANTO (DOS)
Espirito Santo Island
SAO BRAZ
Sao Miguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
SAPPER HILL 1943
East Falkland Island
SCHWARZECK
Namibia
SOUTH AMERICAN 1969
Argentina,
Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana, Paraguay, Peru, Venezuela
SOUTH ASIAN
Singapore
SOUTHEAST BASE
Porto Santo and Madeira Islands
SOUTHWEST BASE
Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge and Terceira Islands
TANANARIVE OBSV 1925
Madagascar
TIMBALAI 1948
Brunei and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sabah)
TOKYO
Japan, Korea, Okinawa
TRISTAN ASTRO 1968
Tristan da Cunha
VITI LEVU 1916
Viti Levu Island, Fiji Islands
WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960
Marshal Islands
WGS 72
World Geodetic System 1972
WGS 84
World Geodetic System 1984
YACARE
Uruguay
ZANDERIJ
Surinam
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX E
APPENDIX E GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic
advisory information in the cockpit of non-TCAS equipped
aircraft. TIS is a ground-based service providing relative
location of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C transponder
equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The
TIS ground sensor uses real time track reports to generate
traffic notification. The G1000 system displays TIS traffic
information on the Traffic Map Page of the MFD. TIS
information may be displayed for overlay on the default
map page on the MFD, as well as on the PFD map inset.
Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped
aircraft within the coverage volume. The G1000 system
displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 nautical
mile radius, from 3,000 feet below, to 3,500 feet above the
requesting aircraft.
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder
are invisible to TIS.
TIS VS. TCAS
The main difference between TIS and TCAS is the
source of surveillance data. TCAS uses an airborne
interrogator with a half-second update rate, while TIS
utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and
accompanying data link to provide a five-second update
rate. TIS and TCAS both have similar ranges.
TIS LIMITATIONS
NOTE: TIS is NOT intended to be used as a
collision avoidance system and does not relieve
the pilot of the responsibility to “see and avoid”
other aircraft. TIS shall not be used for avoidance
maneuvers during IMC or when there is no visual
contact with the intruder aircraft.
TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition
of other aircraft in VMC conditions. No recommended
avoidance maneuvers are given, nor authorized, as a direct
result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.
While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance,
system limitations must be fully understood to ensure
proper use. Many limitations are inherent in secondary
radar surveillance. Information provided by TIS is neither
better nor more accurate than the information used by
ATC.
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system,
which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system similar to
that used by ATCRBS. TIS operation may be intermittent
during turns or other maneuvering. TIS is dependent
on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the
aircraft and the Mode-S radar antenna. Whenever the
structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder
antenna and the ground-based radar antenna, the signal
may be temporarily interrupted. Other limitations and
anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM.
WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S
geographical coverage. Operation of the ground
stations is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to
the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
This section describes basic TIS limitations and is not
comprehensive. The pilot should review the Surveillance
System section of the Aeronautical Information Manual
(AIM) for a complete listsing of TIS limitations.
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
E-1
APPENDIX E
NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many
areas of the United States. This is often the case
in mountainous regions.
TIS information is collected during a single radar
sweep. Collected information is then sent through the
Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of
this, the surveillance information is approximately five
seconds old. TIS ground station tracking software uses
prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay. These
algorithms uses track history data to calculate expected
intruder positions consistent with the time of display.
Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations
in this calculation and create slight errors on the Traffic
Map Page. Errors affect relative bearing information and
target track vector. This can cause a delay in the displayed
intruder information. However, intruder distance and
altitude typically remain relatively accurate and may be
used to assist in spotting traffic.
The following errors are common examples:
Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the
correction of malfunctions by reporting their observations
of undesirable performance. Reporters should identify
the time of observation, location, type and identity
of the aircraft, and describe the condition observed.
Reports should also include the type of transponder
and transponder software version as well. Since TIS
performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not
ATC, malfunctions should be reported in the following
ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station
(FSS) facility.
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report
(Postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs,
General Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards
District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base
Operators).
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers
excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm
may report incorrect horizontal position until the
maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course
that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head-on), and
either aircraft abruptly changes course within
0.25 nautical miles, TIS may display the intruder
aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved
within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder aircraft
course stabilizes.
E-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX F
APPENDIX F MAP SYMBOLS
IDENTIFYING AVIATION MAP DATA
The following aviation data is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page:
Airport Symbols:
• Non-towered airports (purple in color).
• Towered airports (blue in color).
• Non-serviced airports (displayed as solid circle
icons).
• Serviced airports (displayed as circles with protruding tick marks pointing to the top, bottom,
left, and right portions of the screen).
Classification:
• Unclassified airports (displayed with a question
mark “?” character centered within the airport
symbol).
• Restricted airports (displayed with the letter “R”
centered within the airport symbol).
• Hard surface public airports (displayed with the
airports longest runway oriented according to
the direction in which it runs centered within the
airport symbol).
• Heliports (displayed with the letter “H” centered
within the heliport symbol).
• Soft surface public airports (displayed with a
hollow circle in the center of the airport symbol).
Airspace:
The Navigation Map Page displays airspace as one of
the following colors:
Terminal Zone Airspace (ATZ), Class D
• Purple:
Class C
ICAO terminal control area
Terminal radar service area (TRSA)
Mode C area
Military operations area (MOA)
Mode C
Class A
Class E
Line Style:
The Navigation Map Page displays airspace as one of
the following line styles:
• Solid line:
Class C
ICAO control area
ICAO terminal control area
Class B, Terminal radar service area
Mode C, Class A
• Dashed line:
Mode C tower area
Class D, Class E
• Consecutive parallel lines forming a
boundary defining the airspace:
Military operations area (MOA)
Warning area, Alert area, Caution area
Danger area, Prohibited area
Restricted area, Training area
Unknown area, Terminal Zone Airspace (ATZ)
• Blue:
ICAO control area
Class B, Alert area
Caution area, Danger area, Prohibited area
Restricted area, Training area
Unknown area, Warning area
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
F-1
APPENDIX F
MAP SYMBOLS
BASEMAP
AIRPORT
Item
Interstate Highway – 2-digit drawn inside
Item
Symbol
Symbol
Unknown Airport
Interstate Highway – 3-digit drawn inside
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
State Highway – 2-digit drawn inside
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
State Highway – 3-digit drawn inside
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
State Highway – 4-digit drawn inside
State Highway – 5-digit drawn inside
Towered, Serviced Airport
US Highway – 2-digit drawn inside
Restricted (Private) Airport
US Highway – 3-digit drawn inside
Heliport
National Highway – 2-digit drawn inside
National Highway – 3-digit drawn inside
NAVAIDS
National Highway – 4-digit drawn inside
Item
Symbol
Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)
National Highway – 5-digit drawn inside
Small City or Town
Medium City
Large City
VOR
VOR/DME
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
F-2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX F
TRAFFIC
MISCELLANEOUS
Item
Symbol
Traffic
Item
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Proximate Traffic
Default Map Cursor
Symbol
Elevation Pointer Cursor
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Measuring Cursor
Traffic Advisory
Overzoom Indicator (map toolbar)
LIGHTNING STRIKE
Terrain Proximity Enabled (map toolbar)
Item
Lightning Strike – Age is 0-6 Seconds
Symbol
Lightning Strike – Age is 6-20 Seconds
Traffic Enabled (map toolbar)
User Waypoint
Wind Vector
Lightning Strike – Age is 20-60 Seconds
Lightning Strike – Age is 60-120 Seconds
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
F-3
APPENDIX F
LINE SYMBOLS
Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Symbol
Mode C Tower Area
Warning Area
Alert Area
Caution Area
Danger Area
Prohibited Area
Restricted Area
Training Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)
State or Province Border
International Border
Road
Railroad
Lattitude/Longitude
F-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX F
OBSTACLE DATABASE
Obstacle
Color
RED
YELLOW
GRAY
Indication
WARNING: Obstacle height is at or above 100 ft below the current
aircraft altitude.
CAUTION: Obstacle height is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
current aircraft altitude.
SAFE: Obstacle height is lower than 1000 ft below the current aircraft
altitude.
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000 ft AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000 ft AGL)
TERRAIN COLOR CHART
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft AGL
Figure F.1 Terrain Color Chart
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
G-1
APPENDIX G G1000 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX G
G1000 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Physical Specifications
GDU 1040 MFD & PFD
Physical Specifications
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
Display:
7.70 inches (19.56 cm)
11.80 inches (29.97 cm)
3.55 inches (9.02 cm)
6.6 lb (2.99 kg)
9 – 33 Vdc
10.4-inch diagonal XGA
1024 x 768 pixels
262,144 colors
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Altitude Range:
-40º C to +55º C
95% non-condensing
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL
Physical Specifications
Bezel Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
7.70 inches (19.56 cm)
1.3 inches (3.4 cm)
7.79 inches (19.70 cm)
1.7 lb (0.8 kg)
11 – 33 Vdc
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Altitude Range:
G-2
GIA 63 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS
-20º C to +70º C
95% non-condensing
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
7.26 inches (18.44 cm)
3.83 inches (9.73 cm)
9.73 inches (24.71 cm)
4.9 lb (2.22 kg)
22 – 33 Vdc
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
-40º C to +65º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
GPS Specifications
Receiver:
12 parallel channel PhaseTrac12™
Acquisition Time:
15 seconds (warm)
45 seconds (cold)
Update Rate:
Once per second, continuous
Accuracy:
Position – 49 feet (15 meters)
Velocity – 0.1 knot RMS steady state
Dynamics:
1,000 knots maximum velocity
6g maximum acceleration
VHF COM Performance
Channels:
Frequency Range:
Transmit Power:
760 (25 kHz spacing)
or 2280 (8.33 kHz spacing)
118.000 MHz to 136.975 MHz
16 watts
VHF NAV Performance
VOR Frequency Range:
G/S Frequency Range:
LOC Frequency Range:
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
108.00 MHz to 117.95 MHz
329.15 MHz to 335.00 MHz
108.10 MHz to 111.95 MHz
190-00629-00 Rev. B
APPENDIX G
GDC 74A AIR DATA COMPUTER
Physical Specifications
Physical Specifications
Height:
Width:
Length:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
3.23 inches (8.20 cm)
3.05 inches (7.75 cm)
6.45 inches (16.38 cm)
1.69 lb (0.77 kg)
10 – 33 Vdc
Pressure Altitude Range:
-1,400 feet to 50,000 feet
Vertical Speed Range:
-20,000 fpm to +20,000 fpm
Airspeed Range:
450 knots
Airspeed Mach Range:
<1.00 Mach
Total Air Temperature Range:
-85º C to +85º C
GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
Physical Specifications
6.30 inches (16.0 cm)
1.72 inches (4.4 cm)
11.05 inches (28.1 cm)
3.0 lb (1.36 kg)
11 – 33 Vdc
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
6.30 inches (16.0 cm)
1.23 inches (3.12 cm)
8.73 inches (22.17 cm)
1.75 lb (0.712 kg)
9 – 33 Vdc
Environmental Specifications
Air Data Specifications
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
GEA 71 ENGINE/AIRFRAME UNIT
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
-55º C to +70º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
GDL 69/69A WEATHER DATA LINK
Physical Specifications
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight (GDL 69A):
Voltage Range:
6.15 inches (15.62 cm)
1.05 inches (2.66 cm)
7.20 inches (18.26 cm)
1.86 lb (0.84 kg)
9 – 33 Vdc
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
-20º C to +55º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
-45º C to +70º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
G-3
APPENDIX G
GRS 77 AHRS
AHRS Performance
Bank/Pitch Error:
Physical Specifications
Height:
Width:
Length:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
3.25 inches (8.36 cm)
3.75 inches (9.53 cm)
8.5 inches (21.59 cm)
2.40 lb (1.08 kg)
10 – 33 Vdc
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
G-4
-55º C to +70º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
Maneuvers Range:
Rotation Rate:
Heading:
±1.25º within 30º roll, left or right
and 15º pitch, nose up or down
360º pitch and roll
±200º per second
±2º straight and level flight
Initialization Limitations
For successful in-flight initialization of the GRS 77, the
following attitude limitations must be met:
Primary AHRS operation:
Reversion AHRS operation:
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
±20º bank and ±5º pitch
±10º bank and ±5º pitch
190-00629-00 Rev. B
G1000
TM
Index
INDEX
INDEX
A
Activate a flight plan 7-64
Activate a flight plan 7-55
Active Channel 9-26
Active Channel list 9-28
Active flight plan 7-27, 7-49
Active Flight Plan Page 7-53
Active Flight Plan Page options 7-53
Active frequency 3-2
Advisory 2-43–2-44, 2-44, 10-2
Advisory softkey 2-44
AFCS Controls 8-2–8-3
Age Stamp 9-23
AHRS 1-2, 1-11, 10-14
Aircraft alerts 10-3
Aircraft heading data 9-8
AIRMET 9-19
Airport frequency 7-131
Airport Frequency Information field
7-79
Airport Information Page 9-12, 9-15
Airport Information Window 2-30–231
Airport Runway Information Field 7-80
Airport Symbols 7-12, F-1
Airspace 7-12, F-1
Airspace boundaries 7-28
Airspace messages 7-140
Airspeed Indicator 2-2, 2-9
Airspeed Reference 8-10
Airspeed Reference Box 8-10, 8-18
Airspeed Trend Vector 2-9
Air Data Computer 1-3
Alerting System 10-1
Alerts 10-1
Alerts softkey 2-5–2-8, 2-43–2-44
Alerts Window 2-3, 2-43
Alert levels 10-2
Alert Message 10-2
Alert messages 10-8, 10-9, 10-10,
10-11, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14,
10-15, 10-16, 10-17
Alert Pop-Up 7-44
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Alternator Load 6-3, 6-6
Altimeter 2-2, 2-12–2-13
Altitude Alerting 2-13
Altitude buffer 7-122
Altitude Display Mode 9-10
Altitude Hold 1-6
Altitude hold 1-6
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT) 8-8
Altitude Reference 8-8
Altitude Trend Vector 2-12
ALT key 8-2, 8-8
ALT knob 1-6
ALT softkey 2-6–2-8, 4-3
Annunciations 10-1
Annunciation Window 2-3, 2-43
Annunciator lights 5-4
Antenna stabilization 9-36
Antenna tilt 9-32
Approach
Activate 2-41–2-42
Load 2-36
Remove 2-37
Select 2-36, 2-38
Approach C-1, C-2, C-3, C-4
Approach(es) 7-71
Approach Information Page 7-81
Approach markers
Outer, Middle, Inner 5-6
Signal sense, marker 5-6
Approach Mode 8-16
Approach Page menu 7-87
APR key 8-2, 8-11, 8-16
APR softkey 7-86
AP DISC switch 8-3
AP key 8-2, 8-18–8-19
ARC HSI 2-16
ARINC 429 1-2
ARINC leg types 7-72
Arrival
Load 2-36
Remove 2-37
Select 2-36, 2-39
Arrivals and departures 7-71
Arrival Alerts 7-123
Arrival Page Menu 7-84
Arrow, double green 3-8
Arrow, single green 3-8
Arrow, single magenta 3-8
ARTCC 7-137
Assist, Engine Leaning 6-5
ASSIST softkey 6-5
Attenuation 9-36
Attitude 1-2
Attitude Indicator 2-2, 2-10–2-11
Audio alerting system 10-1
Audio Alerts 7-123
Audio panel controls
COM1, COM1 MIC 5-2, 5-4
COM2, COM2 MIC 5-2, 5-4
COM 1/2 5-5
COPLT key 5-8
NAV1, NAV2 5-7
SPKR 5-5
Auto-tuning 3-10, 3-11, 3-17
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)
8-1–8-28
Alerts 8-27
Status Bar 8-5
Status Field 8-4, 8-27
Automatic sequencing C-2, C-3
Automatic squelch 3-3, 3-6
Autopilot 1-5, 8-1, 8-17–8-19, 10-4
Autopilot Disconnect Alert 8-3, 8-19
Auto zoom 7-11, 7-20
Auxiliary Page Group 7-105
Auxiliary Windows 2-26–2-40
Auxiliary Window Keys 2-26
AUX - Trip Planning Map 9-12
Aviation database A-1
Aviation group options 7-27
Aviation map data 7-12, F-1
B
Backcourse 8-15
Backlighting 1-9, 2-4, 7-2
Backup 1-10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
I-1
INDEX
BACK softkey 2-5–2-8, 4-1
Barometric Setting Box 2-2, 2-12
Bearing Information Windows 2-3,
2-18
Bearing line 9-33, 9-35
Bearing Pointers 2-18–2-19
BKSP softkey 4-1, 4-4
BRG1 softkey 2-5, 2-18–2-19
BRG2 softkey 2-5, 2-18–2-19
Bus voltage 6-6
C
Canceling direct-to navigation 7-51
Category 9-26
CATGRY softkey 9-26
Caution iii, iv, 2-43–2-44, 10-1, 10-2
CAUTION softkey 2-44
CDI 10-17
CDI scale 7-124, C-3
CDI scaling 7-74
CDI softkey 2-5–2-8, 2-20, 3-8
Cell data 9-2
Change fields 7-62
Changing the Map Scale 7-34
ChannelList 9-27
Channels 9-26
CHNL softkey 9-26
City Forecast Data 9-12
CLEAR softkey 9-7
Closest point of flight plan 7-61
Closest Point of FPL 2-37–2-38
CLR key 1-5, 2-26
Code selection softkeys 4-1, 4-4
CODE softkey 2-6–2-8, 4-1
Command Bars 8-5
Communication (COM) Frequency
Window 2-2, 2-21
COM channel spacing 3-6, 7-125
COM Configuration 7-124
COM frequency window 3-1
COM tuning knob 3-3, 3-4, 3-5
COM volume/squelch knob 3-3, 3-6
Controls 1-4, 3-1
I-2
Control Wheel Steering (CWS) 8-18
Convective SIGMET 9-19
Copyright i
Copy a flight plan 7-65
COUNTY softkey 9-21
County Warnings 9-12
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 2-15,
2-17
Course Pointer 2-15, 2-17
Create a new flight plan 7-65
Create a new waypoint 7-103
Creating a Profile 7-117
Customized Display 9-4
CWS button 8-3
CYCLONE softkey 9-22
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) 6-3,
6-4–6-5
Cylinder Select 6-4
CYL SLCT softkey 6-4
D
Database 1-8
Date/Time box 7-119
dBZ 9-17
DCLTR softkey 2-5–2-7, 2-24
Declutter 2-5, 2-24
Decluttering 7-13
Default power-on settings 5-4
Delete all flight plans 7-67
Delete all user waypoints 7-101
Delete a flight plan 7-66
Delete a user waypoint 7-103
Delete a waypoint 7-57
Deleting a Profile 7-118
Density Altitude 7-108
Departure
Load 2-35
Remove 2-37
Select 2-35–2-36, 2-40
Departure Procedures 7-83
Departure timer 7-110
DFLTS softkey 2-5–2-7
Digital Audio entertainment 9-24
Dilution of Precision 7-113
Direct-to
Activate 2-30, 2-41
Cancel 2-32
Navigation 2-31
Select 2-31, 2-36, 2-38–2-39
DIRECT-TO key 2-26
Direct-to navigation 7-47
Direct-to Page 7-47
Direct-to Waypoint 7-48
Direct-to Window 2-31–2-32
DISPLAY BACKUP button 2-42
Display interpretation 9-9
Display Units 7-119
DME 3-9
HOLD mode 3-9
NAV1 mode 3-9
NAV2 mode 3-9
Tuning mode 3-9
DME Information Window 2-19
DME Radio 2-19
DME softkey 2-5–2-7
DME Tuning window 3-1, 3-9
DP softkey 7-83
E
ECHO TOP 9-18
Edit a flight plan 7-55
Edit flight plan 7-67
Emergency frequency 3-3, 3-7
Engine Indication System (EIS) 6-1–6-6
Engine Leaning 6-4–6-5
Engine Page 6-3
ENGINE softkey 6-1, 6-3, 7-2
Entering a transponder code 4-4
Entering Flight ID 4-2
Entertainment inputs 5-9
ENT Key 2-26
Estimated Position Error 7-113
Ethernet 1-2, 1-9, 1-10
Excessive Descent Rate 7-43
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) 6-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
INDEX
F
Failure
Display 1-10
Input 1-11
Failure Response 9-9
FCC iv
FD 1-6, 10-4
FD key 8-2
FIS weather information 9-12
Five-Hundred Aural Alert 7-43
FLC 1-6
FLC key 8-2
Flight Director 8-1
Command Bars 8-5
Limitations 8-5
Modes, Pitch 8-6
Modes, Roll 8-13
Operation 8-4
Flight ID 2-28
Flight level change 1-6
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC) 8-10
Flight Plan
Activate 2-33, 2-41
Closest Point 2-37
Create 2-33
Delete 2-34
Invert 2-34
Remove 2-37
Select 2-31, 2-36, 2-38–2-40
Store 2-33
Flight planning 7-53
Flight Planning Maps 9-12
Flight Plan Catalog Page 7-63
Flight Plan Catalog Page operations
7-63
Flight Plan Catalog Page options 7-63
Flight Plan Window 2-32–2-37
Flight timer 7-110
FLTA 7-42
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
7-42
FPL key 1-5, 2-26, 2-32
Freezing Levels 9-12
Frequency list 7-81
Frequency spacing 3-6, 3-8
Frequency toggle key 1-5
Frequency transfer arrow 3-4, 3-5
Frequency transfer key 3-3
FRZ LVL softkey 9-21
FSS information 7-137
FSS softkey 3-16
Fuel Calculations 6-6
Fuel Flow 6-3, 6-4
Fuel Flow Leaning Marks 6-3
Fuel flow totalizer 6-6
Fuel Planning 7-107
Fuel Quantity 6-3
Fuel range ring 7-24
Fuel Reserve Rings 2-23
G
G1000 Multi Function Display Pilot’s
Guide 9-1
Gain 9-34
GA switch 8-3
GDC 74A 1-3
GDL 69 Troubleshooting 9-28
GDL 69 Weather Interface 9-12
GEA 71 1-3
Generic timer 7-110
GFC 700 AFCS 8-1
Glideslope Indicator 2-3, 2-14
Glideslope Mode (GS) 8-11
GMA 1347 1-7, 1-9
GMU 44 1-2
Go Around Mode (GA) 8-12
GPS iii, C-1
GPS receiver 7-115
Graphical Cloud Tops 9-12
Graphical Echo Tops 9-12
Graphical Lightning Strikes 9-12
Graphical METAR Data 9-12
Graphical NEXRAD Data 9-12
Graphical Wind Data 9-12
Ground Clutter 9-17
Ground mapping 9-35
GRS 77 1-2
GTX 33 1-3
GTX 33 Transponder 4-2
H
HDG key 8-2
Heading 9-8
Heading Box 2-2, 2-16
Heading Bug 2-15
Heading Indication 2-15, 2-16
Heading Select 1-5, 1-6
Heading Select Mode (HDG) 8-14
Heading Trend Vector 2-15
HI SENS 5-6
Horizontal scan 9-32, 9-33, 9-36
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) 22, 2-15–2-20
Horizon Line 2-10–2-11
Hottest Cylinder 6-3, 6-4
Hurricane Track 9-12
I
Icing 9-20
IDENT softkey 2-5–2-8, 4-3, 4-5
ID indicator 3-3, 3-5, 3-8
IFR conditions 9-20
Imminent Terrain Impact 7-42
Impact point 7-42
INFO softkey 3-11, 9-26
Inhibit 7-41
Inhibit TAWS 7-41
Initialization (system) 1-7
Inset Map 2-3, 2-5, 2-23–2-25
INSET softkey 2-5–2-7, 2-23–2-25
INTEG Annunciation 2-20
Intercom system (ICS) 5-8, 5-9
Intruder aircraft 9-10
Invert and activate a flight plan 7-65
Invert flight plan 7-57
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
I-3
INDEX
IOI 7-42, 7-45, 10-5
ITI 7-42
J
Jeppesen ii, A-1
K
Key(s) 1-6
L
L-3 SKYWATCH HP Traffic Advisory
System 9-8
Land data 7-20
Land group options 7-29
Lateral Deviation Scale 2-15
Leaning, Engine 6-4–6-5
Leaning Marks 6-3
Lean Assist Mode, EIS 6-5
Lean Page 6-4–6-5
LEAN softkey 6-2, 6-4
LEGEND 9-20
LEGEND softkey 9-20
Lighted obstacle 7-44
Lightning Information 2-5, 2-25
Liquid crystal displays 7-1
Loading Departure options 7-58
Load an Arrival 7-59
Load approach 7-60
Load departure 7-58
localized SIGMET 9-19
Long-range planning 9-1
LRU(s) 1-1
LRU Information Window 9-29
Lubber Line 2-15
M
Magnetic Variation 7-93
Magnetometer 1-2, 1-11
Manifold Pressure 6-1
Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) 8-1,
8-17
Manual sequencing C-2
I-4
Manual squelch (MAN SQ) 5-9
Manual tuning 3-4
Map Datums 7-120
Map datums D-1
Map group options 7-18
Map Orientation 2-24
Map orientation 7-11
Map Page group 9-5
Map Panning 9-22
Map panning 7-14
Map scale 7-11
Map setup 7-18
Map Symbols F-1
Marker beacon 5-6
Marker Beacon Annunciations 2-3,
2-14
MASQ 5-7
Measuring Bearing/Distance 7-31
Measuring bearing/distance 7-31
Menus 7-8
MENU key 2-26
MEPT switch 8-3, 8-27
Messages 10-1
MET 1-3, 10-4
METAR 9-15
Metric Display 2-13
METRIC softkey 2-5–2-7, 2-13
MFD Data Bar Fields 7-123
MFD softkeys 7-2
Minimum runway length 7-125
Missed approach C-2
Missed approach procedure C-3
Mistrim 10-4
MKR/MUTE 5-6
Modes, Transponder 2-6, 2-22
Mode S 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, E-1, E-2
Mode selection softkeys 4-1, 4-3, 4-4
Monitoring Traffic 9-9
MORE WX softkey 9-20
Morse code identifier 3-3, 3-5, 3-8
Mountain obscuration 9-20
MUSIC #1 5-9, 5-10
MUSIC #2 5-10
Muting
MUSIC #1 5-10
N
National Weather Service 9-21
NAV1 5-7
NAV2 5-7
NAVAID iii
NAVAIDS iii
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Window
2-2, 2-21
Navigation Map Page 7-9, 9-2
Navigation Map Page options menu
7-18
Navigation Mode 8-15
Navigation mode selection 3-8
Navigation Source 2-15, 2-20
Navigation Status Bar 2-2, 2-22
Navigation Status bar 3-2
NAV frequencies 3-8, 3-12, 3-17, 3-18
NAV frequency window 3-1
NAV key 8-2
NAV range ring 7-22
NAV station identifiers 3-8
NAV tuning knob 3-3, 3-4, 3-5
NAV volume/ID knob 3-3, 3-8
NCR 7-43
NDB Information Page Options 7-92
NDB Page Menu 7-92
Nearest Airport 7-125
Nearest airport 7-50
Nearest airports, frequency tuning 310, 3-14
Nearest Airports Page 7-130
Nearest Airports Window 2-29–2-30
Nearest Pages 9-12
Nearest Page Group 7-127
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff 7-43
NEXRAD 2-5, 2-25, 9-12
NEXRAD Abnormalities 9-17
NEXRAD Intensity 9-17
NEXRAD Limitations 9-17
NEXRAD softkey 9-14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
INDEX
Normal operating mode 1-9
NOSE UP/NOSE DN keys 8-2, 8-6
NRST softkey 2-5–2-8, 2-29
O
OAT 1-3
Obstacles 7-44, 10-10
OBS Mode 2-6, 2-15, 2-20
OBS mode C-2
OBS softkey 2-6–2-7, 2-20
OFF softkey 2-5–2-7
Oil
Pressure 6-3, 6-6
Temperature 6-3, 6-6
ON softkey 2-6–2-8
Operating Mode 9-10
Operational ii
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Box
2-2, 2-23
Overspeed Protection 8-18
P
PA 5-5
Page groups 7-7
Pan Map 2-25
PDA 7-42
Peak, Cylinder 6-5
Performance G-2, G-4
PFD 3-1
Pilot Controlled lighting frequency
3-12
Pitch hold 1-6
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT) 8-7
Pitch Indication 2-11
Pitch Modes, Flight Director 8-6
Pitch Scale 2-10–2-11
Pitch Trim, Manual Electric 8-1, 8-3,
8-17
PLAY key 5-11
Point-n-shoot flight plan 7-68
Power 7-34, 7-110
Power-up 1-7
Power-up Self-Test 9-10
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Power-up test 7-34
Premature Descent Alert 7-42
Presets 9-28
PRESETS softkey 9-26
Pressure
Manifold 6-1
Oil 6-3, 6-6
Primary Flight Display (PFD) 2-1–2-44
Procedures 7-71
GFC 700 AFCS 8-20
Procedures Page 7-71
Procedures Window 2-38–2-40
PROC key 1-5, 2-26
Propeller Sync Indicator 6-1
Proximity Advisories 9-8
Q
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz 3-7
R
Radar coverage 9-18
RADIO softkey 9-24, 9-26
Radio Tuning Window 2-19
RAIM C-1
Recently used VORs 3-13
Recorded COM 5-11
Registered trademark i
Remove departure, arrival, or approach
7-61
Removing Stormscope Lightning Data
9-5
Rename a user waypoint 7-103
Renaming a Profile 7-118
Restore Defaults 2-29, 2-38
Restore defaults 7-62
Reversionary Mode 2-42
Reversionary mode 1-10, 1-11, 5-2
ROC 7-42, 7-45, 10-5
Roll Hold Mode (ROL) 8-13
Roll Indication 2-11
Roll Modes, Flight Director 8-13
Roll Pointer 2-10–2-11
Roll Scale 2-10–2-11
RS-232 1-2, 1-3
RS-485 1-2, 1-3
RTC 7-42
RX indicator 3-5, 3-6
S
Satellites C-1
Scheduler 7-111
SD card 1-6, A-1
Sector scan 9-35, 9-36
Selected Altitude 8-8, 8-10
Selected Altitude Box 2-2, 2-12
Selected Altitude Bug 2-12
Selected Course Box 2-3, 2-16
Selected Heading Box 2-3, 2-16
Selecting a COM radio 3-6
Selecting a NAV radio 3-8
Select approach 7-60, 7-73
Select departure 7-58
Service Class 9-26
Servo 1-3
Servos, AFCS 8-17
Severe Thunderstorm 9-21
SFC softkey 9-21
SIGMET 9-19
SIGMETs/AIRMETs 9-12
SKYWATCH 9-10
Slip/Skid Indicator 2-2, 2-10, 2-11
Softkey
ENGINE 7-2
SYSTEM softkey 7-2
Softkeys
PFD 2-2, 2-5–2-8
Softkey Annunciations 2-43–2-44
Sort by comment/number 7-67
Speaker 5-5
Specifications G-2, G-3
Specifying a course to a waypoint 7-51
Speed Indication 2-9
Speed Ranges 2-9
Spell N Find 7-48
SPKR key 5-5
STAB 9-36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
I-5
INDEX
Standard instrument departures 7-58
Standby 9-32
Standby frequency 3-2, 3-4, 3-10,
3-16
Standby frequency field 3-3, 3-4, 3-11,
3-17, 3-18
STAR softkey 7-84
STBY softkey 2-6–2-8, 4-3
STD BARO softkey 2-5–2-7
Stereo Headsets 5-2
Stop navigating a flight plan 7-64
Store Flight Plan 7-56
Stormscope 2-25
Stormscope Page 9-5
Stormscope Page Operations 9-5
Storm cells 9-19
Strike data 9-2
Strike location 9-18
Stuck microphone 3-7
Surface Analysis 9-12
Surface winds 9-20
SUSP softkey 2-20
Symbols F-2
System annunciations 10-1, 10-6
System message advisories 10-8
System Page 6-6
SYSTEM softkey 6-2, 6-6
System Status Page 9-29
System Time Box 2-2, 2-23
System time format 7-119
T
TA 10-6
Tachometer 6-1
TAF 9-15
TAS 9-32, 9-33, 9-34, 9-35, 9-36,
10-6, 10-14
TAS Traffic 9-8
TAWS 7-40, 7-41, 7-42, 7-44, 7-45,
7-46, 10-5, 10-6
TAWS-B 7-40
TAWS system test 7-41
TCAS 4-2
I-6
TCAS symbology 7-34
Temperature
Cylinder Head 6-3, 6-4–6-5
Exhaust Gas 6-4
Oil 6-3, 6-6
Peak Cylinder 6-5
Temporary Flight Restrictions 9-12
Terrain ii, 7-40, 7-44, 7-46, 10-10
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
(TAWS) 2-2, 2-44
Terrain data 7-23
Terrain data scale 7-23, 7-24
Terrain information 7-17
Terrain Proximity Page 7-37
Terrain Proximity Page operations 7-39
Terrain separation ii
TERRAIN softkey 2-5, 2-25
Textual METAR Data 9-12
Textual Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts
9-12
Tilt 9-32, 9-33
Tilt line 9-33
Timer 2-28
Timer/References Window 2-27–2-28
Time offset 7-119
TIS 7-17, 10-17, E-1
TIS interface 9-8
TIS symbology 7-34
TIS Traffic Advisory 7-35
TIS Ttraffic status 7-36
TMR/REF softkey 2-5–2-8, 2-27–2-28
TO/FROM Arrow 2-15
Topographic Information 7-16
Topo data 7-22
Topo scale box 7-23
TOPO softkey 2-5, 2-25
Tracking intruder aircraft 9-10
Track vector 7-21
Trademark i
Traffic 7-17, E-1
Traffic Advisories 9-8
Traffic advisory 7-46, 9-32, 9-33, 10-6
Traffic Advisory Criteria 9-9
Traffic Advisory Systems 9-8
Traffic Annunciation 2-3, 2-44
Traffic Banner 7-36
Traffic group options 7-25
Traffic Information Service (TIS) 4-2
Traffic label 7-27
Traffic Map Page 7-33
Traffic map page 7-44
Traffic Map Page operations 7-34
Traffic mode 7-25
TRAFFIC softkey 2-5, 2-24, 9-8
Traffic symbol 7-26
Transponder-equipped aircraft 4-2
Transponder code field 4-1
Transponder code selection 4-4
Transponder ground mode 4-3
Transponder Modes 2-6, 2-22
Transponder mode field 4-1, 4-3, 4-4
Transponder standby mode 4-1, 4-3
Transponder Status Bar 2-2, 2-22
Transponder Status bar 4-1, 4-3, 4-4,
4-5
Trip planning operations 7-106
True Airspeed Box 2-2
Turbulence 9-20
Turn Rate Indicator 2-2, 2-15–2-16
TX indicator 3-5
U
Unlighted obstacle 7-44
Update rate 9-18
User Waypoint Information Page 7-100
V
Vertical Deviation Indicator 2-3, 2-14
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Page 7-69
Vertical navigation profile 7-69
Vertical scan 9-33, 9-34
Vertical speed 1-6, 10-1
Vertical Speed Indicator 2-2, 2-14
Vertical Speed Mode (VS) 8-9
Vertical Speed Pointer 2-14
Vertical Speed Reference 8-9
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
INDEX
Vertical Speed Reference Box 8-9
Vertical Speed Reference Bug 8-9
VFR 2-6
VFR code 4-5
View Recent User WPT List 7-101
VLOC receiver 7-74
Voice alerts 10-6
Voice Announcements 9-11
VOL/PUSH ID knob 3-3, 3-8
VOL/PUSH SQ knob 3-3, 3-5
Volume 5-5, 9-28
Volume/squelch control 5-9
VOL softkey 9-26
VOR/ILS approach, frequency activation
3-11
VOR frequency loading 3-15
VOR information 3-13
VOR list 7-95
VOR Page Menu 7-95
VOR selection 3-2, 3-8
VS 1-6
Vspeeds 2-9, 2-27–2-28
VS key 8-2
W
Warning 10-1, 10-2, 10-4
Warning, altitude 5-2
Warnings ii, iv
WARNING softkey 2-43
WARN Annunciation 2-20
Warranty v
WATCH 9-36
Waypoint Facility or City Location 7-79
Waypoint identifier 7-78
Waypoint Page group 7-77
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
9-36
Weather Data Link Page 9-12, 9-16,
9-20, 9-22
Weather Group Options 9-4
Weather Group Options Menu 9-4
Weather Information 2-5, 2-25
Weather Legends Window 9-20
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Weather Products 9-26
Weather Product Age 9-23
Weather Product Symbols 9-23
Weather radar 9-31
Wind shear 9-19
WIND softkey 9-21
Wind vector 7-21
Wings Level 8-12, 8-13
WPT - Weather Information Page 9-12
WPT Page Group. 9-15
WSR-88D weather surveillance radar
9-17
WX-500 User’s Guide 9-2
WX frequency loading 3-16
WX softkey 9-15
X
XM Information Page 9-24
XM Lightning 9-12
XM LTNG softkey 2-5, 2-25, 9-14
XM Radio 9-12
XM Radio Interface Softkeys 9-26
XM Radio Page 9-26
XM Satellite Radio 9-24
XM weather 9-13
XPDR softkey 2-6–2-8, 4-1, 4-3, 4-4,
4-5
Y
Yaw Damper 1-6, 8-2, 8-4, 8-17–8-19,
10-4
Yaw damper 1-6, 10-4
YD 1-6
YD key 8-2
Z
Zoom Range 2-24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
I-7
INDEX
This page intentionally left blank.
I-8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Beechcraft 58/G58
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p: 913.397.8200 f: 913.397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p: 503.391.3411 f: 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Unit 5, The Quadrangle
Abbey Park Industrial Estate
Romsey, SO51 9DL, U.K.
p: 44/0870.8501241 f: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p: 886/2.2642.9199 f: 886/2.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
© 2005 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
190-00629-00 Rev. B
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising